1 /* Convert tree expression to rtl instructions, for GNU compiler.
2 Copyright (C) 1988, 1992, 1993, 1994, 1995, 1996, 1997, 1998, 1999,
3 2000, 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006, 2007, 2008, 2009, 2010, 2011
4 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
6 This file is part of GCC.
8 GCC is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it under
9 the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by the Free
10 Software Foundation; either version 3, or (at your option) any later
13 GCC is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT ANY
14 WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or
15 FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU General Public License
18 You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
19 along with GCC; see the file COPYING3. If not see
20 <http://www.gnu.org/licenses/>. */
24 #include "coretypes.h"
31 #include "hard-reg-set.h"
34 #include "insn-config.h"
35 #include "insn-attr.h"
36 /* Include expr.h after insn-config.h so we get HAVE_conditional_move. */
43 #include "typeclass.h"
45 #include "langhooks.h"
48 #include "tree-iterator.h"
49 #include "tree-pass.h"
50 #include "tree-flow.h"
52 #include "common/common-target.h"
55 #include "diagnostic.h"
56 #include "ssaexpand.h"
57 #include "target-globals.h"
60 /* Decide whether a function's arguments should be processed
61 from first to last or from last to first.
63 They should if the stack and args grow in opposite directions, but
64 only if we have push insns. */
68 #ifndef PUSH_ARGS_REVERSED
69 #if defined (STACK_GROWS_DOWNWARD) != defined (ARGS_GROW_DOWNWARD)
70 #define PUSH_ARGS_REVERSED /* If it's last to first. */
76 #ifndef STACK_PUSH_CODE
77 #ifdef STACK_GROWS_DOWNWARD
78 #define STACK_PUSH_CODE PRE_DEC
80 #define STACK_PUSH_CODE PRE_INC
85 /* If this is nonzero, we do not bother generating VOLATILE
86 around volatile memory references, and we are willing to
87 output indirect addresses. If cse is to follow, we reject
88 indirect addresses so a useful potential cse is generated;
89 if it is used only once, instruction combination will produce
90 the same indirect address eventually. */
93 /* This structure is used by move_by_pieces to describe the move to
95 struct move_by_pieces_d
104 int explicit_inc_from
;
105 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT len
;
106 HOST_WIDE_INT offset
;
110 /* This structure is used by store_by_pieces to describe the clear to
113 struct store_by_pieces_d
119 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT len
;
120 HOST_WIDE_INT offset
;
121 rtx (*constfun
) (void *, HOST_WIDE_INT
, enum machine_mode
);
126 static unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT
move_by_pieces_ninsns (unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT
,
129 static void move_by_pieces_1 (rtx (*) (rtx
, ...), enum machine_mode
,
130 struct move_by_pieces_d
*);
131 static bool block_move_libcall_safe_for_call_parm (void);
132 static bool emit_block_move_via_movmem (rtx
, rtx
, rtx
, unsigned, unsigned, HOST_WIDE_INT
);
133 static tree
emit_block_move_libcall_fn (int);
134 static void emit_block_move_via_loop (rtx
, rtx
, rtx
, unsigned);
135 static rtx
clear_by_pieces_1 (void *, HOST_WIDE_INT
, enum machine_mode
);
136 static void clear_by_pieces (rtx
, unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT
, unsigned int);
137 static void store_by_pieces_1 (struct store_by_pieces_d
*, unsigned int);
138 static void store_by_pieces_2 (rtx (*) (rtx
, ...), enum machine_mode
,
139 struct store_by_pieces_d
*);
140 static tree
clear_storage_libcall_fn (int);
141 static rtx
compress_float_constant (rtx
, rtx
);
142 static rtx
get_subtarget (rtx
);
143 static void store_constructor_field (rtx
, unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT
,
144 HOST_WIDE_INT
, enum machine_mode
,
145 tree
, tree
, int, alias_set_type
);
146 static void store_constructor (tree
, rtx
, int, HOST_WIDE_INT
);
147 static rtx
store_field (rtx
, HOST_WIDE_INT
, HOST_WIDE_INT
,
148 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT
, unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT
,
150 tree
, tree
, alias_set_type
, bool);
152 static unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT
highest_pow2_factor_for_target (const_tree
, const_tree
);
154 static int is_aligning_offset (const_tree
, const_tree
);
155 static void expand_operands (tree
, tree
, rtx
, rtx
*, rtx
*,
156 enum expand_modifier
);
157 static rtx
reduce_to_bit_field_precision (rtx
, rtx
, tree
);
158 static rtx
do_store_flag (sepops
, rtx
, enum machine_mode
);
160 static void emit_single_push_insn (enum machine_mode
, rtx
, tree
);
162 static void do_tablejump (rtx
, enum machine_mode
, rtx
, rtx
, rtx
);
163 static rtx
const_vector_from_tree (tree
);
164 static void write_complex_part (rtx
, rtx
, bool);
166 /* This macro is used to determine whether move_by_pieces should be called
167 to perform a structure copy. */
168 #ifndef MOVE_BY_PIECES_P
169 #define MOVE_BY_PIECES_P(SIZE, ALIGN) \
170 (move_by_pieces_ninsns (SIZE, ALIGN, MOVE_MAX_PIECES + 1) \
171 < (unsigned int) MOVE_RATIO (optimize_insn_for_speed_p ()))
174 /* This macro is used to determine whether clear_by_pieces should be
175 called to clear storage. */
176 #ifndef CLEAR_BY_PIECES_P
177 #define CLEAR_BY_PIECES_P(SIZE, ALIGN) \
178 (move_by_pieces_ninsns (SIZE, ALIGN, STORE_MAX_PIECES + 1) \
179 < (unsigned int) CLEAR_RATIO (optimize_insn_for_speed_p ()))
182 /* This macro is used to determine whether store_by_pieces should be
183 called to "memset" storage with byte values other than zero. */
184 #ifndef SET_BY_PIECES_P
185 #define SET_BY_PIECES_P(SIZE, ALIGN) \
186 (move_by_pieces_ninsns (SIZE, ALIGN, STORE_MAX_PIECES + 1) \
187 < (unsigned int) SET_RATIO (optimize_insn_for_speed_p ()))
190 /* This macro is used to determine whether store_by_pieces should be
191 called to "memcpy" storage when the source is a constant string. */
192 #ifndef STORE_BY_PIECES_P
193 #define STORE_BY_PIECES_P(SIZE, ALIGN) \
194 (move_by_pieces_ninsns (SIZE, ALIGN, STORE_MAX_PIECES + 1) \
195 < (unsigned int) MOVE_RATIO (optimize_insn_for_speed_p ()))
198 /* SLOW_UNALIGNED_ACCESS is nonzero if unaligned accesses are very slow. */
200 #ifndef SLOW_UNALIGNED_ACCESS
201 #define SLOW_UNALIGNED_ACCESS(MODE, ALIGN) STRICT_ALIGNMENT
204 /* This is run to set up which modes can be used
205 directly in memory and to initialize the block move optab. It is run
206 at the beginning of compilation and when the target is reinitialized. */
209 init_expr_target (void)
212 enum machine_mode mode
;
217 /* Try indexing by frame ptr and try by stack ptr.
218 It is known that on the Convex the stack ptr isn't a valid index.
219 With luck, one or the other is valid on any machine. */
220 mem
= gen_rtx_MEM (VOIDmode
, stack_pointer_rtx
);
221 mem1
= gen_rtx_MEM (VOIDmode
, frame_pointer_rtx
);
223 /* A scratch register we can modify in-place below to avoid
224 useless RTL allocations. */
225 reg
= gen_rtx_REG (VOIDmode
, -1);
227 insn
= rtx_alloc (INSN
);
228 pat
= gen_rtx_SET (VOIDmode
, NULL_RTX
, NULL_RTX
);
229 PATTERN (insn
) = pat
;
231 for (mode
= VOIDmode
; (int) mode
< NUM_MACHINE_MODES
;
232 mode
= (enum machine_mode
) ((int) mode
+ 1))
236 direct_load
[(int) mode
] = direct_store
[(int) mode
] = 0;
237 PUT_MODE (mem
, mode
);
238 PUT_MODE (mem1
, mode
);
239 PUT_MODE (reg
, mode
);
241 /* See if there is some register that can be used in this mode and
242 directly loaded or stored from memory. */
244 if (mode
!= VOIDmode
&& mode
!= BLKmode
)
245 for (regno
= 0; regno
< FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
246 && (direct_load
[(int) mode
] == 0 || direct_store
[(int) mode
] == 0);
249 if (! HARD_REGNO_MODE_OK (regno
, mode
))
252 SET_REGNO (reg
, regno
);
255 SET_DEST (pat
) = reg
;
256 if (recog (pat
, insn
, &num_clobbers
) >= 0)
257 direct_load
[(int) mode
] = 1;
259 SET_SRC (pat
) = mem1
;
260 SET_DEST (pat
) = reg
;
261 if (recog (pat
, insn
, &num_clobbers
) >= 0)
262 direct_load
[(int) mode
] = 1;
265 SET_DEST (pat
) = mem
;
266 if (recog (pat
, insn
, &num_clobbers
) >= 0)
267 direct_store
[(int) mode
] = 1;
270 SET_DEST (pat
) = mem1
;
271 if (recog (pat
, insn
, &num_clobbers
) >= 0)
272 direct_store
[(int) mode
] = 1;
276 mem
= gen_rtx_MEM (VOIDmode
, gen_rtx_raw_REG (Pmode
, 10000));
278 for (mode
= GET_CLASS_NARROWEST_MODE (MODE_FLOAT
); mode
!= VOIDmode
;
279 mode
= GET_MODE_WIDER_MODE (mode
))
281 enum machine_mode srcmode
;
282 for (srcmode
= GET_CLASS_NARROWEST_MODE (MODE_FLOAT
); srcmode
!= mode
;
283 srcmode
= GET_MODE_WIDER_MODE (srcmode
))
287 ic
= can_extend_p (mode
, srcmode
, 0);
288 if (ic
== CODE_FOR_nothing
)
291 PUT_MODE (mem
, srcmode
);
293 if (insn_operand_matches (ic
, 1, mem
))
294 float_extend_from_mem
[mode
][srcmode
] = true;
299 /* This is run at the start of compiling a function. */
304 memset (&crtl
->expr
, 0, sizeof (crtl
->expr
));
307 /* Copy data from FROM to TO, where the machine modes are not the same.
308 Both modes may be integer, or both may be floating, or both may be
310 UNSIGNEDP should be nonzero if FROM is an unsigned type.
311 This causes zero-extension instead of sign-extension. */
314 convert_move (rtx to
, rtx from
, int unsignedp
)
316 enum machine_mode to_mode
= GET_MODE (to
);
317 enum machine_mode from_mode
= GET_MODE (from
);
318 int to_real
= SCALAR_FLOAT_MODE_P (to_mode
);
319 int from_real
= SCALAR_FLOAT_MODE_P (from_mode
);
323 /* rtx code for making an equivalent value. */
324 enum rtx_code equiv_code
= (unsignedp
< 0 ? UNKNOWN
325 : (unsignedp
? ZERO_EXTEND
: SIGN_EXTEND
));
328 gcc_assert (to_real
== from_real
);
329 gcc_assert (to_mode
!= BLKmode
);
330 gcc_assert (from_mode
!= BLKmode
);
332 /* If the source and destination are already the same, then there's
337 /* If FROM is a SUBREG that indicates that we have already done at least
338 the required extension, strip it. We don't handle such SUBREGs as
341 if (GET_CODE (from
) == SUBREG
&& SUBREG_PROMOTED_VAR_P (from
)
342 && (GET_MODE_PRECISION (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (from
)))
343 >= GET_MODE_PRECISION (to_mode
))
344 && SUBREG_PROMOTED_UNSIGNED_P (from
) == unsignedp
)
345 from
= gen_lowpart (to_mode
, from
), from_mode
= to_mode
;
347 gcc_assert (GET_CODE (to
) != SUBREG
|| !SUBREG_PROMOTED_VAR_P (to
));
349 if (to_mode
== from_mode
350 || (from_mode
== VOIDmode
&& CONSTANT_P (from
)))
352 emit_move_insn (to
, from
);
356 if (VECTOR_MODE_P (to_mode
) || VECTOR_MODE_P (from_mode
))
358 gcc_assert (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (from_mode
) == GET_MODE_BITSIZE (to_mode
));
360 if (VECTOR_MODE_P (to_mode
))
361 from
= simplify_gen_subreg (to_mode
, from
, GET_MODE (from
), 0);
363 to
= simplify_gen_subreg (from_mode
, to
, GET_MODE (to
), 0);
365 emit_move_insn (to
, from
);
369 if (GET_CODE (to
) == CONCAT
&& GET_CODE (from
) == CONCAT
)
371 convert_move (XEXP (to
, 0), XEXP (from
, 0), unsignedp
);
372 convert_move (XEXP (to
, 1), XEXP (from
, 1), unsignedp
);
381 gcc_assert ((GET_MODE_PRECISION (from_mode
)
382 != GET_MODE_PRECISION (to_mode
))
383 || (DECIMAL_FLOAT_MODE_P (from_mode
)
384 != DECIMAL_FLOAT_MODE_P (to_mode
)));
386 if (GET_MODE_PRECISION (from_mode
) == GET_MODE_PRECISION (to_mode
))
387 /* Conversion between decimal float and binary float, same size. */
388 tab
= DECIMAL_FLOAT_MODE_P (from_mode
) ? trunc_optab
: sext_optab
;
389 else if (GET_MODE_PRECISION (from_mode
) < GET_MODE_PRECISION (to_mode
))
394 /* Try converting directly if the insn is supported. */
396 code
= convert_optab_handler (tab
, to_mode
, from_mode
);
397 if (code
!= CODE_FOR_nothing
)
399 emit_unop_insn (code
, to
, from
,
400 tab
== sext_optab
? FLOAT_EXTEND
: FLOAT_TRUNCATE
);
404 /* Otherwise use a libcall. */
405 libcall
= convert_optab_libfunc (tab
, to_mode
, from_mode
);
407 /* Is this conversion implemented yet? */
408 gcc_assert (libcall
);
411 value
= emit_library_call_value (libcall
, NULL_RTX
, LCT_CONST
, to_mode
,
413 insns
= get_insns ();
415 emit_libcall_block (insns
, to
, value
,
416 tab
== trunc_optab
? gen_rtx_FLOAT_TRUNCATE (to_mode
,
418 : gen_rtx_FLOAT_EXTEND (to_mode
, from
));
422 /* Handle pointer conversion. */ /* SPEE 900220. */
423 /* Targets are expected to provide conversion insns between PxImode and
424 xImode for all MODE_PARTIAL_INT modes they use, but no others. */
425 if (GET_MODE_CLASS (to_mode
) == MODE_PARTIAL_INT
)
427 enum machine_mode full_mode
428 = smallest_mode_for_size (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (to_mode
), MODE_INT
);
430 gcc_assert (convert_optab_handler (trunc_optab
, to_mode
, full_mode
)
431 != CODE_FOR_nothing
);
433 if (full_mode
!= from_mode
)
434 from
= convert_to_mode (full_mode
, from
, unsignedp
);
435 emit_unop_insn (convert_optab_handler (trunc_optab
, to_mode
, full_mode
),
439 if (GET_MODE_CLASS (from_mode
) == MODE_PARTIAL_INT
)
442 enum machine_mode full_mode
443 = smallest_mode_for_size (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (from_mode
), MODE_INT
);
445 gcc_assert (convert_optab_handler (sext_optab
, full_mode
, from_mode
)
446 != CODE_FOR_nothing
);
448 if (to_mode
== full_mode
)
450 emit_unop_insn (convert_optab_handler (sext_optab
, full_mode
,
456 new_from
= gen_reg_rtx (full_mode
);
457 emit_unop_insn (convert_optab_handler (sext_optab
, full_mode
, from_mode
),
458 new_from
, from
, UNKNOWN
);
460 /* else proceed to integer conversions below. */
461 from_mode
= full_mode
;
465 /* Make sure both are fixed-point modes or both are not. */
466 gcc_assert (ALL_SCALAR_FIXED_POINT_MODE_P (from_mode
) ==
467 ALL_SCALAR_FIXED_POINT_MODE_P (to_mode
));
468 if (ALL_SCALAR_FIXED_POINT_MODE_P (from_mode
))
470 /* If we widen from_mode to to_mode and they are in the same class,
471 we won't saturate the result.
472 Otherwise, always saturate the result to play safe. */
473 if (GET_MODE_CLASS (from_mode
) == GET_MODE_CLASS (to_mode
)
474 && GET_MODE_SIZE (from_mode
) < GET_MODE_SIZE (to_mode
))
475 expand_fixed_convert (to
, from
, 0, 0);
477 expand_fixed_convert (to
, from
, 0, 1);
481 /* Now both modes are integers. */
483 /* Handle expanding beyond a word. */
484 if (GET_MODE_PRECISION (from_mode
) < GET_MODE_PRECISION (to_mode
)
485 && GET_MODE_PRECISION (to_mode
) > BITS_PER_WORD
)
492 enum machine_mode lowpart_mode
;
493 int nwords
= CEIL (GET_MODE_SIZE (to_mode
), UNITS_PER_WORD
);
495 /* Try converting directly if the insn is supported. */
496 if ((code
= can_extend_p (to_mode
, from_mode
, unsignedp
))
499 /* If FROM is a SUBREG, put it into a register. Do this
500 so that we always generate the same set of insns for
501 better cse'ing; if an intermediate assignment occurred,
502 we won't be doing the operation directly on the SUBREG. */
503 if (optimize
> 0 && GET_CODE (from
) == SUBREG
)
504 from
= force_reg (from_mode
, from
);
505 emit_unop_insn (code
, to
, from
, equiv_code
);
508 /* Next, try converting via full word. */
509 else if (GET_MODE_PRECISION (from_mode
) < BITS_PER_WORD
510 && ((code
= can_extend_p (to_mode
, word_mode
, unsignedp
))
511 != CODE_FOR_nothing
))
513 rtx word_to
= gen_reg_rtx (word_mode
);
516 if (reg_overlap_mentioned_p (to
, from
))
517 from
= force_reg (from_mode
, from
);
520 convert_move (word_to
, from
, unsignedp
);
521 emit_unop_insn (code
, to
, word_to
, equiv_code
);
525 /* No special multiword conversion insn; do it by hand. */
528 /* Since we will turn this into a no conflict block, we must ensure
529 that the source does not overlap the target. */
531 if (reg_overlap_mentioned_p (to
, from
))
532 from
= force_reg (from_mode
, from
);
534 /* Get a copy of FROM widened to a word, if necessary. */
535 if (GET_MODE_PRECISION (from_mode
) < BITS_PER_WORD
)
536 lowpart_mode
= word_mode
;
538 lowpart_mode
= from_mode
;
540 lowfrom
= convert_to_mode (lowpart_mode
, from
, unsignedp
);
542 lowpart
= gen_lowpart (lowpart_mode
, to
);
543 emit_move_insn (lowpart
, lowfrom
);
545 /* Compute the value to put in each remaining word. */
547 fill_value
= const0_rtx
;
549 fill_value
= emit_store_flag (gen_reg_rtx (word_mode
),
550 LT
, lowfrom
, const0_rtx
,
553 /* Fill the remaining words. */
554 for (i
= GET_MODE_SIZE (lowpart_mode
) / UNITS_PER_WORD
; i
< nwords
; i
++)
556 int index
= (WORDS_BIG_ENDIAN
? nwords
- i
- 1 : i
);
557 rtx subword
= operand_subword (to
, index
, 1, to_mode
);
559 gcc_assert (subword
);
561 if (fill_value
!= subword
)
562 emit_move_insn (subword
, fill_value
);
565 insns
= get_insns ();
572 /* Truncating multi-word to a word or less. */
573 if (GET_MODE_PRECISION (from_mode
) > BITS_PER_WORD
574 && GET_MODE_PRECISION (to_mode
) <= BITS_PER_WORD
)
577 && ! MEM_VOLATILE_P (from
)
578 && direct_load
[(int) to_mode
]
579 && ! mode_dependent_address_p (XEXP (from
, 0)))
581 || GET_CODE (from
) == SUBREG
))
582 from
= force_reg (from_mode
, from
);
583 convert_move (to
, gen_lowpart (word_mode
, from
), 0);
587 /* Now follow all the conversions between integers
588 no more than a word long. */
590 /* For truncation, usually we can just refer to FROM in a narrower mode. */
591 if (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (to_mode
) < GET_MODE_BITSIZE (from_mode
)
592 && TRULY_NOOP_TRUNCATION_MODES_P (to_mode
, from_mode
))
595 && ! MEM_VOLATILE_P (from
)
596 && direct_load
[(int) to_mode
]
597 && ! mode_dependent_address_p (XEXP (from
, 0)))
599 || GET_CODE (from
) == SUBREG
))
600 from
= force_reg (from_mode
, from
);
601 if (REG_P (from
) && REGNO (from
) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
602 && ! HARD_REGNO_MODE_OK (REGNO (from
), to_mode
))
603 from
= copy_to_reg (from
);
604 emit_move_insn (to
, gen_lowpart (to_mode
, from
));
608 /* Handle extension. */
609 if (GET_MODE_PRECISION (to_mode
) > GET_MODE_PRECISION (from_mode
))
611 /* Convert directly if that works. */
612 if ((code
= can_extend_p (to_mode
, from_mode
, unsignedp
))
615 emit_unop_insn (code
, to
, from
, equiv_code
);
620 enum machine_mode intermediate
;
624 /* Search for a mode to convert via. */
625 for (intermediate
= from_mode
; intermediate
!= VOIDmode
;
626 intermediate
= GET_MODE_WIDER_MODE (intermediate
))
627 if (((can_extend_p (to_mode
, intermediate
, unsignedp
)
629 || (GET_MODE_SIZE (to_mode
) < GET_MODE_SIZE (intermediate
)
630 && TRULY_NOOP_TRUNCATION_MODES_P (to_mode
, intermediate
)))
631 && (can_extend_p (intermediate
, from_mode
, unsignedp
)
632 != CODE_FOR_nothing
))
634 convert_move (to
, convert_to_mode (intermediate
, from
,
635 unsignedp
), unsignedp
);
639 /* No suitable intermediate mode.
640 Generate what we need with shifts. */
641 shift_amount
= (GET_MODE_PRECISION (to_mode
)
642 - GET_MODE_PRECISION (from_mode
));
643 from
= gen_lowpart (to_mode
, force_reg (from_mode
, from
));
644 tmp
= expand_shift (LSHIFT_EXPR
, to_mode
, from
, shift_amount
,
646 tmp
= expand_shift (RSHIFT_EXPR
, to_mode
, tmp
, shift_amount
,
649 emit_move_insn (to
, tmp
);
654 /* Support special truncate insns for certain modes. */
655 if (convert_optab_handler (trunc_optab
, to_mode
,
656 from_mode
) != CODE_FOR_nothing
)
658 emit_unop_insn (convert_optab_handler (trunc_optab
, to_mode
, from_mode
),
663 /* Handle truncation of volatile memrefs, and so on;
664 the things that couldn't be truncated directly,
665 and for which there was no special instruction.
667 ??? Code above formerly short-circuited this, for most integer
668 mode pairs, with a force_reg in from_mode followed by a recursive
669 call to this routine. Appears always to have been wrong. */
670 if (GET_MODE_PRECISION (to_mode
) < GET_MODE_PRECISION (from_mode
))
672 rtx temp
= force_reg (to_mode
, gen_lowpart (to_mode
, from
));
673 emit_move_insn (to
, temp
);
677 /* Mode combination is not recognized. */
681 /* Return an rtx for a value that would result
682 from converting X to mode MODE.
683 Both X and MODE may be floating, or both integer.
684 UNSIGNEDP is nonzero if X is an unsigned value.
685 This can be done by referring to a part of X in place
686 or by copying to a new temporary with conversion. */
689 convert_to_mode (enum machine_mode mode
, rtx x
, int unsignedp
)
691 return convert_modes (mode
, VOIDmode
, x
, unsignedp
);
694 /* Return an rtx for a value that would result
695 from converting X from mode OLDMODE to mode MODE.
696 Both modes may be floating, or both integer.
697 UNSIGNEDP is nonzero if X is an unsigned value.
699 This can be done by referring to a part of X in place
700 or by copying to a new temporary with conversion.
702 You can give VOIDmode for OLDMODE, if you are sure X has a nonvoid mode. */
705 convert_modes (enum machine_mode mode
, enum machine_mode oldmode
, rtx x
, int unsignedp
)
709 /* If FROM is a SUBREG that indicates that we have already done at least
710 the required extension, strip it. */
712 if (GET_CODE (x
) == SUBREG
&& SUBREG_PROMOTED_VAR_P (x
)
713 && GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (x
))) >= GET_MODE_SIZE (mode
)
714 && SUBREG_PROMOTED_UNSIGNED_P (x
) == unsignedp
)
715 x
= gen_lowpart (mode
, x
);
717 if (GET_MODE (x
) != VOIDmode
)
718 oldmode
= GET_MODE (x
);
723 /* There is one case that we must handle specially: If we are converting
724 a CONST_INT into a mode whose size is twice HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT and
725 we are to interpret the constant as unsigned, gen_lowpart will do
726 the wrong if the constant appears negative. What we want to do is
727 make the high-order word of the constant zero, not all ones. */
729 if (unsignedp
&& GET_MODE_CLASS (mode
) == MODE_INT
730 && GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode
) == 2 * HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT
731 && CONST_INT_P (x
) && INTVAL (x
) < 0)
733 double_int val
= uhwi_to_double_int (INTVAL (x
));
735 /* We need to zero extend VAL. */
736 if (oldmode
!= VOIDmode
)
737 val
= double_int_zext (val
, GET_MODE_BITSIZE (oldmode
));
739 return immed_double_int_const (val
, mode
);
742 /* We can do this with a gen_lowpart if both desired and current modes
743 are integer, and this is either a constant integer, a register, or a
744 non-volatile MEM. Except for the constant case where MODE is no
745 wider than HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT, we must be narrowing the operand. */
748 && GET_MODE_PRECISION (mode
) <= HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT
)
749 || (GET_MODE_CLASS (mode
) == MODE_INT
750 && GET_MODE_CLASS (oldmode
) == MODE_INT
751 && (GET_CODE (x
) == CONST_DOUBLE
752 || (GET_MODE_PRECISION (mode
) <= GET_MODE_PRECISION (oldmode
)
753 && ((MEM_P (x
) && ! MEM_VOLATILE_P (x
)
754 && direct_load
[(int) mode
])
756 && (! HARD_REGISTER_P (x
)
757 || HARD_REGNO_MODE_OK (REGNO (x
), mode
))
758 && TRULY_NOOP_TRUNCATION_MODES_P (mode
,
761 /* ?? If we don't know OLDMODE, we have to assume here that
762 X does not need sign- or zero-extension. This may not be
763 the case, but it's the best we can do. */
764 if (CONST_INT_P (x
) && oldmode
!= VOIDmode
765 && GET_MODE_PRECISION (mode
) > GET_MODE_PRECISION (oldmode
))
767 HOST_WIDE_INT val
= INTVAL (x
);
769 /* We must sign or zero-extend in this case. Start by
770 zero-extending, then sign extend if we need to. */
771 val
&= GET_MODE_MASK (oldmode
);
773 && val_signbit_known_set_p (oldmode
, val
))
774 val
|= ~GET_MODE_MASK (oldmode
);
776 return gen_int_mode (val
, mode
);
779 return gen_lowpart (mode
, x
);
782 /* Converting from integer constant into mode is always equivalent to an
784 if (VECTOR_MODE_P (mode
) && GET_MODE (x
) == VOIDmode
)
786 gcc_assert (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode
) == GET_MODE_BITSIZE (oldmode
));
787 return simplify_gen_subreg (mode
, x
, oldmode
, 0);
790 temp
= gen_reg_rtx (mode
);
791 convert_move (temp
, x
, unsignedp
);
795 /* Return the largest alignment we can use for doing a move (or store)
796 of MAX_PIECES. ALIGN is the largest alignment we could use. */
799 alignment_for_piecewise_move (unsigned int max_pieces
, unsigned int align
)
801 enum machine_mode tmode
;
803 tmode
= mode_for_size (max_pieces
* BITS_PER_UNIT
, MODE_INT
, 1);
804 if (align
>= GET_MODE_ALIGNMENT (tmode
))
805 align
= GET_MODE_ALIGNMENT (tmode
);
808 enum machine_mode tmode
, xmode
;
810 for (tmode
= GET_CLASS_NARROWEST_MODE (MODE_INT
), xmode
= tmode
;
812 xmode
= tmode
, tmode
= GET_MODE_WIDER_MODE (tmode
))
813 if (GET_MODE_SIZE (tmode
) > max_pieces
814 || SLOW_UNALIGNED_ACCESS (tmode
, align
))
817 align
= MAX (align
, GET_MODE_ALIGNMENT (xmode
));
823 /* Return the widest integer mode no wider than SIZE. If no such mode
824 can be found, return VOIDmode. */
826 static enum machine_mode
827 widest_int_mode_for_size (unsigned int size
)
829 enum machine_mode tmode
, mode
= VOIDmode
;
831 for (tmode
= GET_CLASS_NARROWEST_MODE (MODE_INT
);
832 tmode
!= VOIDmode
; tmode
= GET_MODE_WIDER_MODE (tmode
))
833 if (GET_MODE_SIZE (tmode
) < size
)
839 /* STORE_MAX_PIECES is the number of bytes at a time that we can
840 store efficiently. Due to internal GCC limitations, this is
841 MOVE_MAX_PIECES limited by the number of bytes GCC can represent
842 for an immediate constant. */
844 #define STORE_MAX_PIECES MIN (MOVE_MAX_PIECES, 2 * sizeof (HOST_WIDE_INT))
846 /* Determine whether the LEN bytes can be moved by using several move
847 instructions. Return nonzero if a call to move_by_pieces should
851 can_move_by_pieces (unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT len
,
852 unsigned int align ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED
)
854 return MOVE_BY_PIECES_P (len
, align
);
857 /* Generate several move instructions to copy LEN bytes from block FROM to
858 block TO. (These are MEM rtx's with BLKmode).
860 If PUSH_ROUNDING is defined and TO is NULL, emit_single_push_insn is
861 used to push FROM to the stack.
863 ALIGN is maximum stack alignment we can assume.
865 If ENDP is 0 return to, if ENDP is 1 return memory at the end ala
866 mempcpy, and if ENDP is 2 return memory the end minus one byte ala
870 move_by_pieces (rtx to
, rtx from
, unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT len
,
871 unsigned int align
, int endp
)
873 struct move_by_pieces_d data
;
874 enum machine_mode to_addr_mode
, from_addr_mode
875 = targetm
.addr_space
.address_mode (MEM_ADDR_SPACE (from
));
876 rtx to_addr
, from_addr
= XEXP (from
, 0);
877 unsigned int max_size
= MOVE_MAX_PIECES
+ 1;
878 enum insn_code icode
;
880 align
= MIN (to
? MEM_ALIGN (to
) : align
, MEM_ALIGN (from
));
883 data
.from_addr
= from_addr
;
886 to_addr_mode
= targetm
.addr_space
.address_mode (MEM_ADDR_SPACE (to
));
887 to_addr
= XEXP (to
, 0);
890 = (GET_CODE (to_addr
) == PRE_INC
|| GET_CODE (to_addr
) == PRE_DEC
891 || GET_CODE (to_addr
) == POST_INC
|| GET_CODE (to_addr
) == POST_DEC
);
893 = (GET_CODE (to_addr
) == PRE_DEC
|| GET_CODE (to_addr
) == POST_DEC
);
897 to_addr_mode
= VOIDmode
;
901 #ifdef STACK_GROWS_DOWNWARD
907 data
.to_addr
= to_addr
;
910 = (GET_CODE (from_addr
) == PRE_INC
|| GET_CODE (from_addr
) == PRE_DEC
911 || GET_CODE (from_addr
) == POST_INC
912 || GET_CODE (from_addr
) == POST_DEC
);
914 data
.explicit_inc_from
= 0;
915 data
.explicit_inc_to
= 0;
916 if (data
.reverse
) data
.offset
= len
;
919 /* If copying requires more than two move insns,
920 copy addresses to registers (to make displacements shorter)
921 and use post-increment if available. */
922 if (!(data
.autinc_from
&& data
.autinc_to
)
923 && move_by_pieces_ninsns (len
, align
, max_size
) > 2)
925 /* Find the mode of the largest move...
926 MODE might not be used depending on the definitions of the
927 USE_* macros below. */
928 enum machine_mode mode ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED
929 = widest_int_mode_for_size (max_size
);
931 if (USE_LOAD_PRE_DECREMENT (mode
) && data
.reverse
&& ! data
.autinc_from
)
933 data
.from_addr
= copy_to_mode_reg (from_addr_mode
,
934 plus_constant (from_addr
, len
));
935 data
.autinc_from
= 1;
936 data
.explicit_inc_from
= -1;
938 if (USE_LOAD_POST_INCREMENT (mode
) && ! data
.autinc_from
)
940 data
.from_addr
= copy_to_mode_reg (from_addr_mode
, from_addr
);
941 data
.autinc_from
= 1;
942 data
.explicit_inc_from
= 1;
944 if (!data
.autinc_from
&& CONSTANT_P (from_addr
))
945 data
.from_addr
= copy_to_mode_reg (from_addr_mode
, from_addr
);
946 if (USE_STORE_PRE_DECREMENT (mode
) && data
.reverse
&& ! data
.autinc_to
)
948 data
.to_addr
= copy_to_mode_reg (to_addr_mode
,
949 plus_constant (to_addr
, len
));
951 data
.explicit_inc_to
= -1;
953 if (USE_STORE_POST_INCREMENT (mode
) && ! data
.reverse
&& ! data
.autinc_to
)
955 data
.to_addr
= copy_to_mode_reg (to_addr_mode
, to_addr
);
957 data
.explicit_inc_to
= 1;
959 if (!data
.autinc_to
&& CONSTANT_P (to_addr
))
960 data
.to_addr
= copy_to_mode_reg (to_addr_mode
, to_addr
);
963 align
= alignment_for_piecewise_move (MOVE_MAX_PIECES
, align
);
965 /* First move what we can in the largest integer mode, then go to
966 successively smaller modes. */
970 enum machine_mode mode
= widest_int_mode_for_size (max_size
);
972 if (mode
== VOIDmode
)
975 icode
= optab_handler (mov_optab
, mode
);
976 if (icode
!= CODE_FOR_nothing
&& align
>= GET_MODE_ALIGNMENT (mode
))
977 move_by_pieces_1 (GEN_FCN (icode
), mode
, &data
);
979 max_size
= GET_MODE_SIZE (mode
);
982 /* The code above should have handled everything. */
983 gcc_assert (!data
.len
);
989 gcc_assert (!data
.reverse
);
994 if (HAVE_POST_INCREMENT
&& data
.explicit_inc_to
> 0)
995 emit_insn (gen_add2_insn (data
.to_addr
, constm1_rtx
));
997 data
.to_addr
= copy_to_mode_reg (to_addr_mode
,
998 plus_constant (data
.to_addr
,
1001 to1
= adjust_automodify_address (data
.to
, QImode
, data
.to_addr
,
1008 to1
= adjust_address (data
.to
, QImode
, data
.offset
);
1016 /* Return number of insns required to move L bytes by pieces.
1017 ALIGN (in bits) is maximum alignment we can assume. */
1019 static unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT
1020 move_by_pieces_ninsns (unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT l
, unsigned int align
,
1021 unsigned int max_size
)
1023 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT n_insns
= 0;
1025 align
= alignment_for_piecewise_move (MOVE_MAX_PIECES
, align
);
1027 while (max_size
> 1)
1029 enum machine_mode mode
;
1030 enum insn_code icode
;
1032 mode
= widest_int_mode_for_size (max_size
);
1034 if (mode
== VOIDmode
)
1037 icode
= optab_handler (mov_optab
, mode
);
1038 if (icode
!= CODE_FOR_nothing
&& align
>= GET_MODE_ALIGNMENT (mode
))
1039 n_insns
+= l
/ GET_MODE_SIZE (mode
), l
%= GET_MODE_SIZE (mode
);
1041 max_size
= GET_MODE_SIZE (mode
);
1048 /* Subroutine of move_by_pieces. Move as many bytes as appropriate
1049 with move instructions for mode MODE. GENFUN is the gen_... function
1050 to make a move insn for that mode. DATA has all the other info. */
1053 move_by_pieces_1 (rtx (*genfun
) (rtx
, ...), enum machine_mode mode
,
1054 struct move_by_pieces_d
*data
)
1056 unsigned int size
= GET_MODE_SIZE (mode
);
1057 rtx to1
= NULL_RTX
, from1
;
1059 while (data
->len
>= size
)
1062 data
->offset
-= size
;
1066 if (data
->autinc_to
)
1067 to1
= adjust_automodify_address (data
->to
, mode
, data
->to_addr
,
1070 to1
= adjust_address (data
->to
, mode
, data
->offset
);
1073 if (data
->autinc_from
)
1074 from1
= adjust_automodify_address (data
->from
, mode
, data
->from_addr
,
1077 from1
= adjust_address (data
->from
, mode
, data
->offset
);
1079 if (HAVE_PRE_DECREMENT
&& data
->explicit_inc_to
< 0)
1080 emit_insn (gen_add2_insn (data
->to_addr
,
1081 GEN_INT (-(HOST_WIDE_INT
)size
)));
1082 if (HAVE_PRE_DECREMENT
&& data
->explicit_inc_from
< 0)
1083 emit_insn (gen_add2_insn (data
->from_addr
,
1084 GEN_INT (-(HOST_WIDE_INT
)size
)));
1087 emit_insn ((*genfun
) (to1
, from1
));
1090 #ifdef PUSH_ROUNDING
1091 emit_single_push_insn (mode
, from1
, NULL
);
1097 if (HAVE_POST_INCREMENT
&& data
->explicit_inc_to
> 0)
1098 emit_insn (gen_add2_insn (data
->to_addr
, GEN_INT (size
)));
1099 if (HAVE_POST_INCREMENT
&& data
->explicit_inc_from
> 0)
1100 emit_insn (gen_add2_insn (data
->from_addr
, GEN_INT (size
)));
1102 if (! data
->reverse
)
1103 data
->offset
+= size
;
1109 /* Emit code to move a block Y to a block X. This may be done with
1110 string-move instructions, with multiple scalar move instructions,
1111 or with a library call.
1113 Both X and Y must be MEM rtx's (perhaps inside VOLATILE) with mode BLKmode.
1114 SIZE is an rtx that says how long they are.
1115 ALIGN is the maximum alignment we can assume they have.
1116 METHOD describes what kind of copy this is, and what mechanisms may be used.
1118 Return the address of the new block, if memcpy is called and returns it,
1122 emit_block_move_hints (rtx x
, rtx y
, rtx size
, enum block_op_methods method
,
1123 unsigned int expected_align
, HOST_WIDE_INT expected_size
)
1130 if (CONST_INT_P (size
)
1131 && INTVAL (size
) == 0)
1136 case BLOCK_OP_NORMAL
:
1137 case BLOCK_OP_TAILCALL
:
1138 may_use_call
= true;
1141 case BLOCK_OP_CALL_PARM
:
1142 may_use_call
= block_move_libcall_safe_for_call_parm ();
1144 /* Make inhibit_defer_pop nonzero around the library call
1145 to force it to pop the arguments right away. */
1149 case BLOCK_OP_NO_LIBCALL
:
1150 may_use_call
= false;
1157 gcc_assert (MEM_P (x
) && MEM_P (y
));
1158 align
= MIN (MEM_ALIGN (x
), MEM_ALIGN (y
));
1159 gcc_assert (align
>= BITS_PER_UNIT
);
1161 /* Make sure we've got BLKmode addresses; store_one_arg can decide that
1162 block copy is more efficient for other large modes, e.g. DCmode. */
1163 x
= adjust_address (x
, BLKmode
, 0);
1164 y
= adjust_address (y
, BLKmode
, 0);
1166 /* Set MEM_SIZE as appropriate for this block copy. The main place this
1167 can be incorrect is coming from __builtin_memcpy. */
1168 if (CONST_INT_P (size
))
1170 x
= shallow_copy_rtx (x
);
1171 y
= shallow_copy_rtx (y
);
1172 set_mem_size (x
, INTVAL (size
));
1173 set_mem_size (y
, INTVAL (size
));
1176 if (CONST_INT_P (size
) && MOVE_BY_PIECES_P (INTVAL (size
), align
))
1177 move_by_pieces (x
, y
, INTVAL (size
), align
, 0);
1178 else if (emit_block_move_via_movmem (x
, y
, size
, align
,
1179 expected_align
, expected_size
))
1181 else if (may_use_call
1182 && ADDR_SPACE_GENERIC_P (MEM_ADDR_SPACE (x
))
1183 && ADDR_SPACE_GENERIC_P (MEM_ADDR_SPACE (y
)))
1185 /* Since x and y are passed to a libcall, mark the corresponding
1186 tree EXPR as addressable. */
1187 tree y_expr
= MEM_EXPR (y
);
1188 tree x_expr
= MEM_EXPR (x
);
1190 mark_addressable (y_expr
);
1192 mark_addressable (x_expr
);
1193 retval
= emit_block_move_via_libcall (x
, y
, size
,
1194 method
== BLOCK_OP_TAILCALL
);
1198 emit_block_move_via_loop (x
, y
, size
, align
);
1200 if (method
== BLOCK_OP_CALL_PARM
)
1207 emit_block_move (rtx x
, rtx y
, rtx size
, enum block_op_methods method
)
1209 return emit_block_move_hints (x
, y
, size
, method
, 0, -1);
1212 /* A subroutine of emit_block_move. Returns true if calling the
1213 block move libcall will not clobber any parameters which may have
1214 already been placed on the stack. */
1217 block_move_libcall_safe_for_call_parm (void)
1219 #if defined (REG_PARM_STACK_SPACE)
1223 /* If arguments are pushed on the stack, then they're safe. */
1227 /* If registers go on the stack anyway, any argument is sure to clobber
1228 an outgoing argument. */
1229 #if defined (REG_PARM_STACK_SPACE)
1230 fn
= emit_block_move_libcall_fn (false);
1231 /* Avoid set but not used warning if *REG_PARM_STACK_SPACE doesn't
1232 depend on its argument. */
1234 if (OUTGOING_REG_PARM_STACK_SPACE ((!fn
? NULL_TREE
: TREE_TYPE (fn
)))
1235 && REG_PARM_STACK_SPACE (fn
) != 0)
1239 /* If any argument goes in memory, then it might clobber an outgoing
1242 CUMULATIVE_ARGS args_so_far_v
;
1243 cumulative_args_t args_so_far
;
1246 fn
= emit_block_move_libcall_fn (false);
1247 INIT_CUMULATIVE_ARGS (args_so_far_v
, TREE_TYPE (fn
), NULL_RTX
, 0, 3);
1248 args_so_far
= pack_cumulative_args (&args_so_far_v
);
1250 arg
= TYPE_ARG_TYPES (TREE_TYPE (fn
));
1251 for ( ; arg
!= void_list_node
; arg
= TREE_CHAIN (arg
))
1253 enum machine_mode mode
= TYPE_MODE (TREE_VALUE (arg
));
1254 rtx tmp
= targetm
.calls
.function_arg (args_so_far
, mode
,
1256 if (!tmp
|| !REG_P (tmp
))
1258 if (targetm
.calls
.arg_partial_bytes (args_so_far
, mode
, NULL
, 1))
1260 targetm
.calls
.function_arg_advance (args_so_far
, mode
,
1267 /* A subroutine of emit_block_move. Expand a movmem pattern;
1268 return true if successful. */
1271 emit_block_move_via_movmem (rtx x
, rtx y
, rtx size
, unsigned int align
,
1272 unsigned int expected_align
, HOST_WIDE_INT expected_size
)
1274 int save_volatile_ok
= volatile_ok
;
1275 enum machine_mode mode
;
1277 if (expected_align
< align
)
1278 expected_align
= align
;
1280 /* Since this is a move insn, we don't care about volatility. */
1283 /* Try the most limited insn first, because there's no point
1284 including more than one in the machine description unless
1285 the more limited one has some advantage. */
1287 for (mode
= GET_CLASS_NARROWEST_MODE (MODE_INT
); mode
!= VOIDmode
;
1288 mode
= GET_MODE_WIDER_MODE (mode
))
1290 enum insn_code code
= direct_optab_handler (movmem_optab
, mode
);
1292 if (code
!= CODE_FOR_nothing
1293 /* We don't need MODE to be narrower than BITS_PER_HOST_WIDE_INT
1294 here because if SIZE is less than the mode mask, as it is
1295 returned by the macro, it will definitely be less than the
1296 actual mode mask. */
1297 && ((CONST_INT_P (size
)
1298 && ((unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT
) INTVAL (size
)
1299 <= (GET_MODE_MASK (mode
) >> 1)))
1300 || GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode
) >= BITS_PER_WORD
))
1302 struct expand_operand ops
[6];
1305 /* ??? When called via emit_block_move_for_call, it'd be
1306 nice if there were some way to inform the backend, so
1307 that it doesn't fail the expansion because it thinks
1308 emitting the libcall would be more efficient. */
1309 nops
= insn_data
[(int) code
].n_generator_args
;
1310 gcc_assert (nops
== 4 || nops
== 6);
1312 create_fixed_operand (&ops
[0], x
);
1313 create_fixed_operand (&ops
[1], y
);
1314 /* The check above guarantees that this size conversion is valid. */
1315 create_convert_operand_to (&ops
[2], size
, mode
, true);
1316 create_integer_operand (&ops
[3], align
/ BITS_PER_UNIT
);
1319 create_integer_operand (&ops
[4], expected_align
/ BITS_PER_UNIT
);
1320 create_integer_operand (&ops
[5], expected_size
);
1322 if (maybe_expand_insn (code
, nops
, ops
))
1324 volatile_ok
= save_volatile_ok
;
1330 volatile_ok
= save_volatile_ok
;
1334 /* A subroutine of emit_block_move. Expand a call to memcpy.
1335 Return the return value from memcpy, 0 otherwise. */
1338 emit_block_move_via_libcall (rtx dst
, rtx src
, rtx size
, bool tailcall
)
1340 rtx dst_addr
, src_addr
;
1341 tree call_expr
, fn
, src_tree
, dst_tree
, size_tree
;
1342 enum machine_mode size_mode
;
1345 /* Emit code to copy the addresses of DST and SRC and SIZE into new
1346 pseudos. We can then place those new pseudos into a VAR_DECL and
1349 dst_addr
= copy_to_mode_reg (Pmode
, XEXP (dst
, 0));
1350 src_addr
= copy_to_mode_reg (Pmode
, XEXP (src
, 0));
1352 dst_addr
= convert_memory_address (ptr_mode
, dst_addr
);
1353 src_addr
= convert_memory_address (ptr_mode
, src_addr
);
1355 dst_tree
= make_tree (ptr_type_node
, dst_addr
);
1356 src_tree
= make_tree (ptr_type_node
, src_addr
);
1358 size_mode
= TYPE_MODE (sizetype
);
1360 size
= convert_to_mode (size_mode
, size
, 1);
1361 size
= copy_to_mode_reg (size_mode
, size
);
1363 /* It is incorrect to use the libcall calling conventions to call
1364 memcpy in this context. This could be a user call to memcpy and
1365 the user may wish to examine the return value from memcpy. For
1366 targets where libcalls and normal calls have different conventions
1367 for returning pointers, we could end up generating incorrect code. */
1369 size_tree
= make_tree (sizetype
, size
);
1371 fn
= emit_block_move_libcall_fn (true);
1372 call_expr
= build_call_expr (fn
, 3, dst_tree
, src_tree
, size_tree
);
1373 CALL_EXPR_TAILCALL (call_expr
) = tailcall
;
1375 retval
= expand_normal (call_expr
);
1380 /* A subroutine of emit_block_move_via_libcall. Create the tree node
1381 for the function we use for block copies. The first time FOR_CALL
1382 is true, we call assemble_external. */
1384 static GTY(()) tree block_move_fn
;
1387 init_block_move_fn (const char *asmspec
)
1393 fn
= get_identifier ("memcpy");
1394 args
= build_function_type_list (ptr_type_node
, ptr_type_node
,
1395 const_ptr_type_node
, sizetype
,
1398 fn
= build_decl (UNKNOWN_LOCATION
, FUNCTION_DECL
, fn
, args
);
1399 DECL_EXTERNAL (fn
) = 1;
1400 TREE_PUBLIC (fn
) = 1;
1401 DECL_ARTIFICIAL (fn
) = 1;
1402 TREE_NOTHROW (fn
) = 1;
1403 DECL_VISIBILITY (fn
) = VISIBILITY_DEFAULT
;
1404 DECL_VISIBILITY_SPECIFIED (fn
) = 1;
1410 set_user_assembler_name (block_move_fn
, asmspec
);
1414 emit_block_move_libcall_fn (int for_call
)
1416 static bool emitted_extern
;
1419 init_block_move_fn (NULL
);
1421 if (for_call
&& !emitted_extern
)
1423 emitted_extern
= true;
1424 make_decl_rtl (block_move_fn
);
1425 assemble_external (block_move_fn
);
1428 return block_move_fn
;
1431 /* A subroutine of emit_block_move. Copy the data via an explicit
1432 loop. This is used only when libcalls are forbidden. */
1433 /* ??? It'd be nice to copy in hunks larger than QImode. */
1436 emit_block_move_via_loop (rtx x
, rtx y
, rtx size
,
1437 unsigned int align ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED
)
1439 rtx cmp_label
, top_label
, iter
, x_addr
, y_addr
, tmp
;
1440 enum machine_mode x_addr_mode
1441 = targetm
.addr_space
.address_mode (MEM_ADDR_SPACE (x
));
1442 enum machine_mode y_addr_mode
1443 = targetm
.addr_space
.address_mode (MEM_ADDR_SPACE (y
));
1444 enum machine_mode iter_mode
;
1446 iter_mode
= GET_MODE (size
);
1447 if (iter_mode
== VOIDmode
)
1448 iter_mode
= word_mode
;
1450 top_label
= gen_label_rtx ();
1451 cmp_label
= gen_label_rtx ();
1452 iter
= gen_reg_rtx (iter_mode
);
1454 emit_move_insn (iter
, const0_rtx
);
1456 x_addr
= force_operand (XEXP (x
, 0), NULL_RTX
);
1457 y_addr
= force_operand (XEXP (y
, 0), NULL_RTX
);
1458 do_pending_stack_adjust ();
1460 emit_jump (cmp_label
);
1461 emit_label (top_label
);
1463 tmp
= convert_modes (x_addr_mode
, iter_mode
, iter
, true);
1464 x_addr
= gen_rtx_PLUS (x_addr_mode
, x_addr
, tmp
);
1466 if (x_addr_mode
!= y_addr_mode
)
1467 tmp
= convert_modes (y_addr_mode
, iter_mode
, iter
, true);
1468 y_addr
= gen_rtx_PLUS (y_addr_mode
, y_addr
, tmp
);
1470 x
= change_address (x
, QImode
, x_addr
);
1471 y
= change_address (y
, QImode
, y_addr
);
1473 emit_move_insn (x
, y
);
1475 tmp
= expand_simple_binop (iter_mode
, PLUS
, iter
, const1_rtx
, iter
,
1476 true, OPTAB_LIB_WIDEN
);
1478 emit_move_insn (iter
, tmp
);
1480 emit_label (cmp_label
);
1482 emit_cmp_and_jump_insns (iter
, size
, LT
, NULL_RTX
, iter_mode
,
1486 /* Copy all or part of a value X into registers starting at REGNO.
1487 The number of registers to be filled is NREGS. */
1490 move_block_to_reg (int regno
, rtx x
, int nregs
, enum machine_mode mode
)
1493 #ifdef HAVE_load_multiple
1501 if (CONSTANT_P (x
) && !targetm
.legitimate_constant_p (mode
, x
))
1502 x
= validize_mem (force_const_mem (mode
, x
));
1504 /* See if the machine can do this with a load multiple insn. */
1505 #ifdef HAVE_load_multiple
1506 if (HAVE_load_multiple
)
1508 last
= get_last_insn ();
1509 pat
= gen_load_multiple (gen_rtx_REG (word_mode
, regno
), x
,
1517 delete_insns_since (last
);
1521 for (i
= 0; i
< nregs
; i
++)
1522 emit_move_insn (gen_rtx_REG (word_mode
, regno
+ i
),
1523 operand_subword_force (x
, i
, mode
));
1526 /* Copy all or part of a BLKmode value X out of registers starting at REGNO.
1527 The number of registers to be filled is NREGS. */
1530 move_block_from_reg (int regno
, rtx x
, int nregs
)
1537 /* See if the machine can do this with a store multiple insn. */
1538 #ifdef HAVE_store_multiple
1539 if (HAVE_store_multiple
)
1541 rtx last
= get_last_insn ();
1542 rtx pat
= gen_store_multiple (x
, gen_rtx_REG (word_mode
, regno
),
1550 delete_insns_since (last
);
1554 for (i
= 0; i
< nregs
; i
++)
1556 rtx tem
= operand_subword (x
, i
, 1, BLKmode
);
1560 emit_move_insn (tem
, gen_rtx_REG (word_mode
, regno
+ i
));
1564 /* Generate a PARALLEL rtx for a new non-consecutive group of registers from
1565 ORIG, where ORIG is a non-consecutive group of registers represented by
1566 a PARALLEL. The clone is identical to the original except in that the
1567 original set of registers is replaced by a new set of pseudo registers.
1568 The new set has the same modes as the original set. */
1571 gen_group_rtx (rtx orig
)
1576 gcc_assert (GET_CODE (orig
) == PARALLEL
);
1578 length
= XVECLEN (orig
, 0);
1579 tmps
= XALLOCAVEC (rtx
, length
);
1581 /* Skip a NULL entry in first slot. */
1582 i
= XEXP (XVECEXP (orig
, 0, 0), 0) ? 0 : 1;
1587 for (; i
< length
; i
++)
1589 enum machine_mode mode
= GET_MODE (XEXP (XVECEXP (orig
, 0, i
), 0));
1590 rtx offset
= XEXP (XVECEXP (orig
, 0, i
), 1);
1592 tmps
[i
] = gen_rtx_EXPR_LIST (VOIDmode
, gen_reg_rtx (mode
), offset
);
1595 return gen_rtx_PARALLEL (GET_MODE (orig
), gen_rtvec_v (length
, tmps
));
1598 /* A subroutine of emit_group_load. Arguments as for emit_group_load,
1599 except that values are placed in TMPS[i], and must later be moved
1600 into corresponding XEXP (XVECEXP (DST, 0, i), 0) element. */
1603 emit_group_load_1 (rtx
*tmps
, rtx dst
, rtx orig_src
, tree type
, int ssize
)
1607 enum machine_mode m
= GET_MODE (orig_src
);
1609 gcc_assert (GET_CODE (dst
) == PARALLEL
);
1612 && !SCALAR_INT_MODE_P (m
)
1613 && !MEM_P (orig_src
)
1614 && GET_CODE (orig_src
) != CONCAT
)
1616 enum machine_mode imode
= int_mode_for_mode (GET_MODE (orig_src
));
1617 if (imode
== BLKmode
)
1618 src
= assign_stack_temp (GET_MODE (orig_src
), ssize
, 0);
1620 src
= gen_reg_rtx (imode
);
1621 if (imode
!= BLKmode
)
1622 src
= gen_lowpart (GET_MODE (orig_src
), src
);
1623 emit_move_insn (src
, orig_src
);
1624 /* ...and back again. */
1625 if (imode
!= BLKmode
)
1626 src
= gen_lowpart (imode
, src
);
1627 emit_group_load_1 (tmps
, dst
, src
, type
, ssize
);
1631 /* Check for a NULL entry, used to indicate that the parameter goes
1632 both on the stack and in registers. */
1633 if (XEXP (XVECEXP (dst
, 0, 0), 0))
1638 /* Process the pieces. */
1639 for (i
= start
; i
< XVECLEN (dst
, 0); i
++)
1641 enum machine_mode mode
= GET_MODE (XEXP (XVECEXP (dst
, 0, i
), 0));
1642 HOST_WIDE_INT bytepos
= INTVAL (XEXP (XVECEXP (dst
, 0, i
), 1));
1643 unsigned int bytelen
= GET_MODE_SIZE (mode
);
1646 /* Handle trailing fragments that run over the size of the struct. */
1647 if (ssize
>= 0 && bytepos
+ (HOST_WIDE_INT
) bytelen
> ssize
)
1649 /* Arrange to shift the fragment to where it belongs.
1650 extract_bit_field loads to the lsb of the reg. */
1652 #ifdef BLOCK_REG_PADDING
1653 BLOCK_REG_PADDING (GET_MODE (orig_src
), type
, i
== start
)
1654 == (BYTES_BIG_ENDIAN
? upward
: downward
)
1659 shift
= (bytelen
- (ssize
- bytepos
)) * BITS_PER_UNIT
;
1660 bytelen
= ssize
- bytepos
;
1661 gcc_assert (bytelen
> 0);
1664 /* If we won't be loading directly from memory, protect the real source
1665 from strange tricks we might play; but make sure that the source can
1666 be loaded directly into the destination. */
1668 if (!MEM_P (orig_src
)
1669 && (!CONSTANT_P (orig_src
)
1670 || (GET_MODE (orig_src
) != mode
1671 && GET_MODE (orig_src
) != VOIDmode
)))
1673 if (GET_MODE (orig_src
) == VOIDmode
)
1674 src
= gen_reg_rtx (mode
);
1676 src
= gen_reg_rtx (GET_MODE (orig_src
));
1678 emit_move_insn (src
, orig_src
);
1681 /* Optimize the access just a bit. */
1683 && (! SLOW_UNALIGNED_ACCESS (mode
, MEM_ALIGN (src
))
1684 || MEM_ALIGN (src
) >= GET_MODE_ALIGNMENT (mode
))
1685 && bytepos
* BITS_PER_UNIT
% GET_MODE_ALIGNMENT (mode
) == 0
1686 && bytelen
== GET_MODE_SIZE (mode
))
1688 tmps
[i
] = gen_reg_rtx (mode
);
1689 emit_move_insn (tmps
[i
], adjust_address (src
, mode
, bytepos
));
1691 else if (COMPLEX_MODE_P (mode
)
1692 && GET_MODE (src
) == mode
1693 && bytelen
== GET_MODE_SIZE (mode
))
1694 /* Let emit_move_complex do the bulk of the work. */
1696 else if (GET_CODE (src
) == CONCAT
)
1698 unsigned int slen
= GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (src
));
1699 unsigned int slen0
= GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (XEXP (src
, 0)));
1701 if ((bytepos
== 0 && bytelen
== slen0
)
1702 || (bytepos
!= 0 && bytepos
+ bytelen
<= slen
))
1704 /* The following assumes that the concatenated objects all
1705 have the same size. In this case, a simple calculation
1706 can be used to determine the object and the bit field
1708 tmps
[i
] = XEXP (src
, bytepos
/ slen0
);
1709 if (! CONSTANT_P (tmps
[i
])
1710 && (!REG_P (tmps
[i
]) || GET_MODE (tmps
[i
]) != mode
))
1711 tmps
[i
] = extract_bit_field (tmps
[i
], bytelen
* BITS_PER_UNIT
,
1712 (bytepos
% slen0
) * BITS_PER_UNIT
,
1713 1, false, NULL_RTX
, mode
, mode
);
1719 gcc_assert (!bytepos
);
1720 mem
= assign_stack_temp (GET_MODE (src
), slen
, 0);
1721 emit_move_insn (mem
, src
);
1722 tmps
[i
] = extract_bit_field (mem
, bytelen
* BITS_PER_UNIT
,
1723 0, 1, false, NULL_RTX
, mode
, mode
);
1726 /* FIXME: A SIMD parallel will eventually lead to a subreg of a
1727 SIMD register, which is currently broken. While we get GCC
1728 to emit proper RTL for these cases, let's dump to memory. */
1729 else if (VECTOR_MODE_P (GET_MODE (dst
))
1732 int slen
= GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (src
));
1735 mem
= assign_stack_temp (GET_MODE (src
), slen
, 0);
1736 emit_move_insn (mem
, src
);
1737 tmps
[i
] = adjust_address (mem
, mode
, (int) bytepos
);
1739 else if (CONSTANT_P (src
) && GET_MODE (dst
) != BLKmode
1740 && XVECLEN (dst
, 0) > 1)
1741 tmps
[i
] = simplify_gen_subreg (mode
, src
, GET_MODE(dst
), bytepos
);
1742 else if (CONSTANT_P (src
))
1744 HOST_WIDE_INT len
= (HOST_WIDE_INT
) bytelen
;
1752 gcc_assert (2 * len
== ssize
);
1753 split_double (src
, &first
, &second
);
1760 else if (REG_P (src
) && GET_MODE (src
) == mode
)
1763 tmps
[i
] = extract_bit_field (src
, bytelen
* BITS_PER_UNIT
,
1764 bytepos
* BITS_PER_UNIT
, 1, false, NULL_RTX
,
1768 tmps
[i
] = expand_shift (LSHIFT_EXPR
, mode
, tmps
[i
],
1773 /* Emit code to move a block SRC of type TYPE to a block DST,
1774 where DST is non-consecutive registers represented by a PARALLEL.
1775 SSIZE represents the total size of block ORIG_SRC in bytes, or -1
1779 emit_group_load (rtx dst
, rtx src
, tree type
, int ssize
)
1784 tmps
= XALLOCAVEC (rtx
, XVECLEN (dst
, 0));
1785 emit_group_load_1 (tmps
, dst
, src
, type
, ssize
);
1787 /* Copy the extracted pieces into the proper (probable) hard regs. */
1788 for (i
= 0; i
< XVECLEN (dst
, 0); i
++)
1790 rtx d
= XEXP (XVECEXP (dst
, 0, i
), 0);
1793 emit_move_insn (d
, tmps
[i
]);
1797 /* Similar, but load SRC into new pseudos in a format that looks like
1798 PARALLEL. This can later be fed to emit_group_move to get things
1799 in the right place. */
1802 emit_group_load_into_temps (rtx parallel
, rtx src
, tree type
, int ssize
)
1807 vec
= rtvec_alloc (XVECLEN (parallel
, 0));
1808 emit_group_load_1 (&RTVEC_ELT (vec
, 0), parallel
, src
, type
, ssize
);
1810 /* Convert the vector to look just like the original PARALLEL, except
1811 with the computed values. */
1812 for (i
= 0; i
< XVECLEN (parallel
, 0); i
++)
1814 rtx e
= XVECEXP (parallel
, 0, i
);
1815 rtx d
= XEXP (e
, 0);
1819 d
= force_reg (GET_MODE (d
), RTVEC_ELT (vec
, i
));
1820 e
= alloc_EXPR_LIST (REG_NOTE_KIND (e
), d
, XEXP (e
, 1));
1822 RTVEC_ELT (vec
, i
) = e
;
1825 return gen_rtx_PARALLEL (GET_MODE (parallel
), vec
);
1828 /* Emit code to move a block SRC to block DST, where SRC and DST are
1829 non-consecutive groups of registers, each represented by a PARALLEL. */
1832 emit_group_move (rtx dst
, rtx src
)
1836 gcc_assert (GET_CODE (src
) == PARALLEL
1837 && GET_CODE (dst
) == PARALLEL
1838 && XVECLEN (src
, 0) == XVECLEN (dst
, 0));
1840 /* Skip first entry if NULL. */
1841 for (i
= XEXP (XVECEXP (src
, 0, 0), 0) ? 0 : 1; i
< XVECLEN (src
, 0); i
++)
1842 emit_move_insn (XEXP (XVECEXP (dst
, 0, i
), 0),
1843 XEXP (XVECEXP (src
, 0, i
), 0));
1846 /* Move a group of registers represented by a PARALLEL into pseudos. */
1849 emit_group_move_into_temps (rtx src
)
1851 rtvec vec
= rtvec_alloc (XVECLEN (src
, 0));
1854 for (i
= 0; i
< XVECLEN (src
, 0); i
++)
1856 rtx e
= XVECEXP (src
, 0, i
);
1857 rtx d
= XEXP (e
, 0);
1860 e
= alloc_EXPR_LIST (REG_NOTE_KIND (e
), copy_to_reg (d
), XEXP (e
, 1));
1861 RTVEC_ELT (vec
, i
) = e
;
1864 return gen_rtx_PARALLEL (GET_MODE (src
), vec
);
1867 /* Emit code to move a block SRC to a block ORIG_DST of type TYPE,
1868 where SRC is non-consecutive registers represented by a PARALLEL.
1869 SSIZE represents the total size of block ORIG_DST, or -1 if not
1873 emit_group_store (rtx orig_dst
, rtx src
, tree type ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED
, int ssize
)
1876 int start
, finish
, i
;
1877 enum machine_mode m
= GET_MODE (orig_dst
);
1879 gcc_assert (GET_CODE (src
) == PARALLEL
);
1881 if (!SCALAR_INT_MODE_P (m
)
1882 && !MEM_P (orig_dst
) && GET_CODE (orig_dst
) != CONCAT
)
1884 enum machine_mode imode
= int_mode_for_mode (GET_MODE (orig_dst
));
1885 if (imode
== BLKmode
)
1886 dst
= assign_stack_temp (GET_MODE (orig_dst
), ssize
, 0);
1888 dst
= gen_reg_rtx (imode
);
1889 emit_group_store (dst
, src
, type
, ssize
);
1890 if (imode
!= BLKmode
)
1891 dst
= gen_lowpart (GET_MODE (orig_dst
), dst
);
1892 emit_move_insn (orig_dst
, dst
);
1896 /* Check for a NULL entry, used to indicate that the parameter goes
1897 both on the stack and in registers. */
1898 if (XEXP (XVECEXP (src
, 0, 0), 0))
1902 finish
= XVECLEN (src
, 0);
1904 tmps
= XALLOCAVEC (rtx
, finish
);
1906 /* Copy the (probable) hard regs into pseudos. */
1907 for (i
= start
; i
< finish
; i
++)
1909 rtx reg
= XEXP (XVECEXP (src
, 0, i
), 0);
1910 if (!REG_P (reg
) || REGNO (reg
) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
)
1912 tmps
[i
] = gen_reg_rtx (GET_MODE (reg
));
1913 emit_move_insn (tmps
[i
], reg
);
1919 /* If we won't be storing directly into memory, protect the real destination
1920 from strange tricks we might play. */
1922 if (GET_CODE (dst
) == PARALLEL
)
1926 /* We can get a PARALLEL dst if there is a conditional expression in
1927 a return statement. In that case, the dst and src are the same,
1928 so no action is necessary. */
1929 if (rtx_equal_p (dst
, src
))
1932 /* It is unclear if we can ever reach here, but we may as well handle
1933 it. Allocate a temporary, and split this into a store/load to/from
1936 temp
= assign_stack_temp (GET_MODE (dst
), ssize
, 0);
1937 emit_group_store (temp
, src
, type
, ssize
);
1938 emit_group_load (dst
, temp
, type
, ssize
);
1941 else if (!MEM_P (dst
) && GET_CODE (dst
) != CONCAT
)
1943 enum machine_mode outer
= GET_MODE (dst
);
1944 enum machine_mode inner
;
1945 HOST_WIDE_INT bytepos
;
1949 if (!REG_P (dst
) || REGNO (dst
) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
)
1950 dst
= gen_reg_rtx (outer
);
1952 /* Make life a bit easier for combine. */
1953 /* If the first element of the vector is the low part
1954 of the destination mode, use a paradoxical subreg to
1955 initialize the destination. */
1958 inner
= GET_MODE (tmps
[start
]);
1959 bytepos
= subreg_lowpart_offset (inner
, outer
);
1960 if (INTVAL (XEXP (XVECEXP (src
, 0, start
), 1)) == bytepos
)
1962 temp
= simplify_gen_subreg (outer
, tmps
[start
],
1966 emit_move_insn (dst
, temp
);
1973 /* If the first element wasn't the low part, try the last. */
1975 && start
< finish
- 1)
1977 inner
= GET_MODE (tmps
[finish
- 1]);
1978 bytepos
= subreg_lowpart_offset (inner
, outer
);
1979 if (INTVAL (XEXP (XVECEXP (src
, 0, finish
- 1), 1)) == bytepos
)
1981 temp
= simplify_gen_subreg (outer
, tmps
[finish
- 1],
1985 emit_move_insn (dst
, temp
);
1992 /* Otherwise, simply initialize the result to zero. */
1994 emit_move_insn (dst
, CONST0_RTX (outer
));
1997 /* Process the pieces. */
1998 for (i
= start
; i
< finish
; i
++)
2000 HOST_WIDE_INT bytepos
= INTVAL (XEXP (XVECEXP (src
, 0, i
), 1));
2001 enum machine_mode mode
= GET_MODE (tmps
[i
]);
2002 unsigned int bytelen
= GET_MODE_SIZE (mode
);
2003 unsigned int adj_bytelen
= bytelen
;
2006 /* Handle trailing fragments that run over the size of the struct. */
2007 if (ssize
>= 0 && bytepos
+ (HOST_WIDE_INT
) bytelen
> ssize
)
2008 adj_bytelen
= ssize
- bytepos
;
2010 if (GET_CODE (dst
) == CONCAT
)
2012 if (bytepos
+ adj_bytelen
2013 <= GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (XEXP (dst
, 0))))
2014 dest
= XEXP (dst
, 0);
2015 else if (bytepos
>= GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (XEXP (dst
, 0))))
2017 bytepos
-= GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (XEXP (dst
, 0)));
2018 dest
= XEXP (dst
, 1);
2022 enum machine_mode dest_mode
= GET_MODE (dest
);
2023 enum machine_mode tmp_mode
= GET_MODE (tmps
[i
]);
2025 gcc_assert (bytepos
== 0 && XVECLEN (src
, 0));
2027 if (GET_MODE_ALIGNMENT (dest_mode
)
2028 >= GET_MODE_ALIGNMENT (tmp_mode
))
2030 dest
= assign_stack_temp (dest_mode
,
2031 GET_MODE_SIZE (dest_mode
),
2033 emit_move_insn (adjust_address (dest
,
2041 dest
= assign_stack_temp (tmp_mode
,
2042 GET_MODE_SIZE (tmp_mode
),
2044 emit_move_insn (dest
, tmps
[i
]);
2045 dst
= adjust_address (dest
, dest_mode
, bytepos
);
2051 if (ssize
>= 0 && bytepos
+ (HOST_WIDE_INT
) bytelen
> ssize
)
2053 /* store_bit_field always takes its value from the lsb.
2054 Move the fragment to the lsb if it's not already there. */
2056 #ifdef BLOCK_REG_PADDING
2057 BLOCK_REG_PADDING (GET_MODE (orig_dst
), type
, i
== start
)
2058 == (BYTES_BIG_ENDIAN
? upward
: downward
)
2064 int shift
= (bytelen
- (ssize
- bytepos
)) * BITS_PER_UNIT
;
2065 tmps
[i
] = expand_shift (RSHIFT_EXPR
, mode
, tmps
[i
],
2068 bytelen
= adj_bytelen
;
2071 /* Optimize the access just a bit. */
2073 && (! SLOW_UNALIGNED_ACCESS (mode
, MEM_ALIGN (dest
))
2074 || MEM_ALIGN (dest
) >= GET_MODE_ALIGNMENT (mode
))
2075 && bytepos
* BITS_PER_UNIT
% GET_MODE_ALIGNMENT (mode
) == 0
2076 && bytelen
== GET_MODE_SIZE (mode
))
2077 emit_move_insn (adjust_address (dest
, mode
, bytepos
), tmps
[i
]);
2079 store_bit_field (dest
, bytelen
* BITS_PER_UNIT
, bytepos
* BITS_PER_UNIT
,
2080 0, 0, mode
, tmps
[i
]);
2083 /* Copy from the pseudo into the (probable) hard reg. */
2084 if (orig_dst
!= dst
)
2085 emit_move_insn (orig_dst
, dst
);
2088 /* Generate code to copy a BLKmode object of TYPE out of a
2089 set of registers starting with SRCREG into TGTBLK. If TGTBLK
2090 is null, a stack temporary is created. TGTBLK is returned.
2092 The purpose of this routine is to handle functions that return
2093 BLKmode structures in registers. Some machines (the PA for example)
2094 want to return all small structures in registers regardless of the
2095 structure's alignment. */
2098 copy_blkmode_from_reg (rtx tgtblk
, rtx srcreg
, tree type
)
2100 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT bytes
= int_size_in_bytes (type
);
2101 rtx src
= NULL
, dst
= NULL
;
2102 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT bitsize
= MIN (TYPE_ALIGN (type
), BITS_PER_WORD
);
2103 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT bitpos
, xbitpos
, padding_correction
= 0;
2104 enum machine_mode copy_mode
;
2108 tgtblk
= assign_temp (build_qualified_type (type
,
2110 | TYPE_QUAL_CONST
)),
2112 preserve_temp_slots (tgtblk
);
2115 /* This code assumes srcreg is at least a full word. If it isn't, copy it
2116 into a new pseudo which is a full word. */
2118 if (GET_MODE (srcreg
) != BLKmode
2119 && GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (srcreg
)) < UNITS_PER_WORD
)
2120 srcreg
= convert_to_mode (word_mode
, srcreg
, TYPE_UNSIGNED (type
));
2122 /* If the structure doesn't take up a whole number of words, see whether
2123 SRCREG is padded on the left or on the right. If it's on the left,
2124 set PADDING_CORRECTION to the number of bits to skip.
2126 In most ABIs, the structure will be returned at the least end of
2127 the register, which translates to right padding on little-endian
2128 targets and left padding on big-endian targets. The opposite
2129 holds if the structure is returned at the most significant
2130 end of the register. */
2131 if (bytes
% UNITS_PER_WORD
!= 0
2132 && (targetm
.calls
.return_in_msb (type
)
2134 : BYTES_BIG_ENDIAN
))
2136 = (BITS_PER_WORD
- ((bytes
% UNITS_PER_WORD
) * BITS_PER_UNIT
));
2138 /* Copy the structure BITSIZE bits at a time. If the target lives in
2139 memory, take care of not reading/writing past its end by selecting
2140 a copy mode suited to BITSIZE. This should always be possible given
2143 We could probably emit more efficient code for machines which do not use
2144 strict alignment, but it doesn't seem worth the effort at the current
2147 copy_mode
= word_mode
;
2150 enum machine_mode mem_mode
= mode_for_size (bitsize
, MODE_INT
, 1);
2151 if (mem_mode
!= BLKmode
)
2152 copy_mode
= mem_mode
;
2155 for (bitpos
= 0, xbitpos
= padding_correction
;
2156 bitpos
< bytes
* BITS_PER_UNIT
;
2157 bitpos
+= bitsize
, xbitpos
+= bitsize
)
2159 /* We need a new source operand each time xbitpos is on a
2160 word boundary and when xbitpos == padding_correction
2161 (the first time through). */
2162 if (xbitpos
% BITS_PER_WORD
== 0
2163 || xbitpos
== padding_correction
)
2164 src
= operand_subword_force (srcreg
, xbitpos
/ BITS_PER_WORD
,
2167 /* We need a new destination operand each time bitpos is on
2169 if (bitpos
% BITS_PER_WORD
== 0)
2170 dst
= operand_subword (tgtblk
, bitpos
/ BITS_PER_WORD
, 1, BLKmode
);
2172 /* Use xbitpos for the source extraction (right justified) and
2173 bitpos for the destination store (left justified). */
2174 store_bit_field (dst
, bitsize
, bitpos
% BITS_PER_WORD
, 0, 0, copy_mode
,
2175 extract_bit_field (src
, bitsize
,
2176 xbitpos
% BITS_PER_WORD
, 1, false,
2177 NULL_RTX
, copy_mode
, copy_mode
));
2183 /* Add a USE expression for REG to the (possibly empty) list pointed
2184 to by CALL_FUSAGE. REG must denote a hard register. */
2187 use_reg (rtx
*call_fusage
, rtx reg
)
2189 gcc_assert (REG_P (reg
) && REGNO (reg
) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
);
2192 = gen_rtx_EXPR_LIST (VOIDmode
,
2193 gen_rtx_USE (VOIDmode
, reg
), *call_fusage
);
2196 /* Add USE expressions to *CALL_FUSAGE for each of NREGS consecutive regs,
2197 starting at REGNO. All of these registers must be hard registers. */
2200 use_regs (rtx
*call_fusage
, int regno
, int nregs
)
2204 gcc_assert (regno
+ nregs
<= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
);
2206 for (i
= 0; i
< nregs
; i
++)
2207 use_reg (call_fusage
, regno_reg_rtx
[regno
+ i
]);
2210 /* Add USE expressions to *CALL_FUSAGE for each REG contained in the
2211 PARALLEL REGS. This is for calls that pass values in multiple
2212 non-contiguous locations. The Irix 6 ABI has examples of this. */
2215 use_group_regs (rtx
*call_fusage
, rtx regs
)
2219 for (i
= 0; i
< XVECLEN (regs
, 0); i
++)
2221 rtx reg
= XEXP (XVECEXP (regs
, 0, i
), 0);
2223 /* A NULL entry means the parameter goes both on the stack and in
2224 registers. This can also be a MEM for targets that pass values
2225 partially on the stack and partially in registers. */
2226 if (reg
!= 0 && REG_P (reg
))
2227 use_reg (call_fusage
, reg
);
2231 /* Return the defining gimple statement for SSA_NAME NAME if it is an
2232 assigment and the code of the expresion on the RHS is CODE. Return
2236 get_def_for_expr (tree name
, enum tree_code code
)
2240 if (TREE_CODE (name
) != SSA_NAME
)
2243 def_stmt
= get_gimple_for_ssa_name (name
);
2245 || gimple_assign_rhs_code (def_stmt
) != code
)
2252 /* Determine whether the LEN bytes generated by CONSTFUN can be
2253 stored to memory using several move instructions. CONSTFUNDATA is
2254 a pointer which will be passed as argument in every CONSTFUN call.
2255 ALIGN is maximum alignment we can assume. MEMSETP is true if this is
2256 a memset operation and false if it's a copy of a constant string.
2257 Return nonzero if a call to store_by_pieces should succeed. */
2260 can_store_by_pieces (unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT len
,
2261 rtx (*constfun
) (void *, HOST_WIDE_INT
, enum machine_mode
),
2262 void *constfundata
, unsigned int align
, bool memsetp
)
2264 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT l
;
2265 unsigned int max_size
;
2266 HOST_WIDE_INT offset
= 0;
2267 enum machine_mode mode
;
2268 enum insn_code icode
;
2270 /* cst is set but not used if LEGITIMATE_CONSTANT doesn't use it. */
2271 rtx cst ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED
;
2277 ? SET_BY_PIECES_P (len
, align
)
2278 : STORE_BY_PIECES_P (len
, align
)))
2281 align
= alignment_for_piecewise_move (STORE_MAX_PIECES
, align
);
2283 /* We would first store what we can in the largest integer mode, then go to
2284 successively smaller modes. */
2287 reverse
<= (HAVE_PRE_DECREMENT
|| HAVE_POST_DECREMENT
);
2291 max_size
= STORE_MAX_PIECES
+ 1;
2292 while (max_size
> 1)
2294 mode
= widest_int_mode_for_size (max_size
);
2296 if (mode
== VOIDmode
)
2299 icode
= optab_handler (mov_optab
, mode
);
2300 if (icode
!= CODE_FOR_nothing
2301 && align
>= GET_MODE_ALIGNMENT (mode
))
2303 unsigned int size
= GET_MODE_SIZE (mode
);
2310 cst
= (*constfun
) (constfundata
, offset
, mode
);
2311 if (!targetm
.legitimate_constant_p (mode
, cst
))
2321 max_size
= GET_MODE_SIZE (mode
);
2324 /* The code above should have handled everything. */
2331 /* Generate several move instructions to store LEN bytes generated by
2332 CONSTFUN to block TO. (A MEM rtx with BLKmode). CONSTFUNDATA is a
2333 pointer which will be passed as argument in every CONSTFUN call.
2334 ALIGN is maximum alignment we can assume. MEMSETP is true if this is
2335 a memset operation and false if it's a copy of a constant string.
2336 If ENDP is 0 return to, if ENDP is 1 return memory at the end ala
2337 mempcpy, and if ENDP is 2 return memory the end minus one byte ala
2341 store_by_pieces (rtx to
, unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT len
,
2342 rtx (*constfun
) (void *, HOST_WIDE_INT
, enum machine_mode
),
2343 void *constfundata
, unsigned int align
, bool memsetp
, int endp
)
2345 enum machine_mode to_addr_mode
2346 = targetm
.addr_space
.address_mode (MEM_ADDR_SPACE (to
));
2347 struct store_by_pieces_d data
;
2351 gcc_assert (endp
!= 2);
2356 ? SET_BY_PIECES_P (len
, align
)
2357 : STORE_BY_PIECES_P (len
, align
));
2358 data
.constfun
= constfun
;
2359 data
.constfundata
= constfundata
;
2362 store_by_pieces_1 (&data
, align
);
2367 gcc_assert (!data
.reverse
);
2372 if (HAVE_POST_INCREMENT
&& data
.explicit_inc_to
> 0)
2373 emit_insn (gen_add2_insn (data
.to_addr
, constm1_rtx
));
2375 data
.to_addr
= copy_to_mode_reg (to_addr_mode
,
2376 plus_constant (data
.to_addr
,
2379 to1
= adjust_automodify_address (data
.to
, QImode
, data
.to_addr
,
2386 to1
= adjust_address (data
.to
, QImode
, data
.offset
);
2394 /* Generate several move instructions to clear LEN bytes of block TO. (A MEM
2395 rtx with BLKmode). ALIGN is maximum alignment we can assume. */
2398 clear_by_pieces (rtx to
, unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT len
, unsigned int align
)
2400 struct store_by_pieces_d data
;
2405 data
.constfun
= clear_by_pieces_1
;
2406 data
.constfundata
= NULL
;
2409 store_by_pieces_1 (&data
, align
);
2412 /* Callback routine for clear_by_pieces.
2413 Return const0_rtx unconditionally. */
2416 clear_by_pieces_1 (void *data ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED
,
2417 HOST_WIDE_INT offset ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED
,
2418 enum machine_mode mode ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED
)
2423 /* Subroutine of clear_by_pieces and store_by_pieces.
2424 Generate several move instructions to store LEN bytes of block TO. (A MEM
2425 rtx with BLKmode). ALIGN is maximum alignment we can assume. */
2428 store_by_pieces_1 (struct store_by_pieces_d
*data ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED
,
2429 unsigned int align ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED
)
2431 enum machine_mode to_addr_mode
2432 = targetm
.addr_space
.address_mode (MEM_ADDR_SPACE (data
->to
));
2433 rtx to_addr
= XEXP (data
->to
, 0);
2434 unsigned int max_size
= STORE_MAX_PIECES
+ 1;
2435 enum insn_code icode
;
2438 data
->to_addr
= to_addr
;
2440 = (GET_CODE (to_addr
) == PRE_INC
|| GET_CODE (to_addr
) == PRE_DEC
2441 || GET_CODE (to_addr
) == POST_INC
|| GET_CODE (to_addr
) == POST_DEC
);
2443 data
->explicit_inc_to
= 0;
2445 = (GET_CODE (to_addr
) == PRE_DEC
|| GET_CODE (to_addr
) == POST_DEC
);
2447 data
->offset
= data
->len
;
2449 /* If storing requires more than two move insns,
2450 copy addresses to registers (to make displacements shorter)
2451 and use post-increment if available. */
2452 if (!data
->autinc_to
2453 && move_by_pieces_ninsns (data
->len
, align
, max_size
) > 2)
2455 /* Determine the main mode we'll be using.
2456 MODE might not be used depending on the definitions of the
2457 USE_* macros below. */
2458 enum machine_mode mode ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED
2459 = widest_int_mode_for_size (max_size
);
2461 if (USE_STORE_PRE_DECREMENT (mode
) && data
->reverse
&& ! data
->autinc_to
)
2463 data
->to_addr
= copy_to_mode_reg (to_addr_mode
,
2464 plus_constant (to_addr
, data
->len
));
2465 data
->autinc_to
= 1;
2466 data
->explicit_inc_to
= -1;
2469 if (USE_STORE_POST_INCREMENT (mode
) && ! data
->reverse
2470 && ! data
->autinc_to
)
2472 data
->to_addr
= copy_to_mode_reg (to_addr_mode
, to_addr
);
2473 data
->autinc_to
= 1;
2474 data
->explicit_inc_to
= 1;
2477 if ( !data
->autinc_to
&& CONSTANT_P (to_addr
))
2478 data
->to_addr
= copy_to_mode_reg (to_addr_mode
, to_addr
);
2481 align
= alignment_for_piecewise_move (STORE_MAX_PIECES
, align
);
2483 /* First store what we can in the largest integer mode, then go to
2484 successively smaller modes. */
2486 while (max_size
> 1)
2488 enum machine_mode mode
= widest_int_mode_for_size (max_size
);
2490 if (mode
== VOIDmode
)
2493 icode
= optab_handler (mov_optab
, mode
);
2494 if (icode
!= CODE_FOR_nothing
&& align
>= GET_MODE_ALIGNMENT (mode
))
2495 store_by_pieces_2 (GEN_FCN (icode
), mode
, data
);
2497 max_size
= GET_MODE_SIZE (mode
);
2500 /* The code above should have handled everything. */
2501 gcc_assert (!data
->len
);
2504 /* Subroutine of store_by_pieces_1. Store as many bytes as appropriate
2505 with move instructions for mode MODE. GENFUN is the gen_... function
2506 to make a move insn for that mode. DATA has all the other info. */
2509 store_by_pieces_2 (rtx (*genfun
) (rtx
, ...), enum machine_mode mode
,
2510 struct store_by_pieces_d
*data
)
2512 unsigned int size
= GET_MODE_SIZE (mode
);
2515 while (data
->len
>= size
)
2518 data
->offset
-= size
;
2520 if (data
->autinc_to
)
2521 to1
= adjust_automodify_address (data
->to
, mode
, data
->to_addr
,
2524 to1
= adjust_address (data
->to
, mode
, data
->offset
);
2526 if (HAVE_PRE_DECREMENT
&& data
->explicit_inc_to
< 0)
2527 emit_insn (gen_add2_insn (data
->to_addr
,
2528 GEN_INT (-(HOST_WIDE_INT
) size
)));
2530 cst
= (*data
->constfun
) (data
->constfundata
, data
->offset
, mode
);
2531 emit_insn ((*genfun
) (to1
, cst
));
2533 if (HAVE_POST_INCREMENT
&& data
->explicit_inc_to
> 0)
2534 emit_insn (gen_add2_insn (data
->to_addr
, GEN_INT (size
)));
2536 if (! data
->reverse
)
2537 data
->offset
+= size
;
2543 /* Write zeros through the storage of OBJECT. If OBJECT has BLKmode, SIZE is
2544 its length in bytes. */
2547 clear_storage_hints (rtx object
, rtx size
, enum block_op_methods method
,
2548 unsigned int expected_align
, HOST_WIDE_INT expected_size
)
2550 enum machine_mode mode
= GET_MODE (object
);
2553 gcc_assert (method
== BLOCK_OP_NORMAL
|| method
== BLOCK_OP_TAILCALL
);
2555 /* If OBJECT is not BLKmode and SIZE is the same size as its mode,
2556 just move a zero. Otherwise, do this a piece at a time. */
2558 && CONST_INT_P (size
)
2559 && INTVAL (size
) == (HOST_WIDE_INT
) GET_MODE_SIZE (mode
))
2561 rtx zero
= CONST0_RTX (mode
);
2564 emit_move_insn (object
, zero
);
2568 if (COMPLEX_MODE_P (mode
))
2570 zero
= CONST0_RTX (GET_MODE_INNER (mode
));
2573 write_complex_part (object
, zero
, 0);
2574 write_complex_part (object
, zero
, 1);
2580 if (size
== const0_rtx
)
2583 align
= MEM_ALIGN (object
);
2585 if (CONST_INT_P (size
)
2586 && CLEAR_BY_PIECES_P (INTVAL (size
), align
))
2587 clear_by_pieces (object
, INTVAL (size
), align
);
2588 else if (set_storage_via_setmem (object
, size
, const0_rtx
, align
,
2589 expected_align
, expected_size
))
2591 else if (ADDR_SPACE_GENERIC_P (MEM_ADDR_SPACE (object
)))
2592 return set_storage_via_libcall (object
, size
, const0_rtx
,
2593 method
== BLOCK_OP_TAILCALL
);
2601 clear_storage (rtx object
, rtx size
, enum block_op_methods method
)
2603 return clear_storage_hints (object
, size
, method
, 0, -1);
2607 /* A subroutine of clear_storage. Expand a call to memset.
2608 Return the return value of memset, 0 otherwise. */
2611 set_storage_via_libcall (rtx object
, rtx size
, rtx val
, bool tailcall
)
2613 tree call_expr
, fn
, object_tree
, size_tree
, val_tree
;
2614 enum machine_mode size_mode
;
2617 /* Emit code to copy OBJECT and SIZE into new pseudos. We can then
2618 place those into new pseudos into a VAR_DECL and use them later. */
2620 object
= copy_to_mode_reg (Pmode
, XEXP (object
, 0));
2622 size_mode
= TYPE_MODE (sizetype
);
2623 size
= convert_to_mode (size_mode
, size
, 1);
2624 size
= copy_to_mode_reg (size_mode
, size
);
2626 /* It is incorrect to use the libcall calling conventions to call
2627 memset in this context. This could be a user call to memset and
2628 the user may wish to examine the return value from memset. For
2629 targets where libcalls and normal calls have different conventions
2630 for returning pointers, we could end up generating incorrect code. */
2632 object_tree
= make_tree (ptr_type_node
, object
);
2633 if (!CONST_INT_P (val
))
2634 val
= convert_to_mode (TYPE_MODE (integer_type_node
), val
, 1);
2635 size_tree
= make_tree (sizetype
, size
);
2636 val_tree
= make_tree (integer_type_node
, val
);
2638 fn
= clear_storage_libcall_fn (true);
2639 call_expr
= build_call_expr (fn
, 3, object_tree
, val_tree
, size_tree
);
2640 CALL_EXPR_TAILCALL (call_expr
) = tailcall
;
2642 retval
= expand_normal (call_expr
);
2647 /* A subroutine of set_storage_via_libcall. Create the tree node
2648 for the function we use for block clears. The first time FOR_CALL
2649 is true, we call assemble_external. */
2651 tree block_clear_fn
;
2654 init_block_clear_fn (const char *asmspec
)
2656 if (!block_clear_fn
)
2660 fn
= get_identifier ("memset");
2661 args
= build_function_type_list (ptr_type_node
, ptr_type_node
,
2662 integer_type_node
, sizetype
,
2665 fn
= build_decl (UNKNOWN_LOCATION
, FUNCTION_DECL
, fn
, args
);
2666 DECL_EXTERNAL (fn
) = 1;
2667 TREE_PUBLIC (fn
) = 1;
2668 DECL_ARTIFICIAL (fn
) = 1;
2669 TREE_NOTHROW (fn
) = 1;
2670 DECL_VISIBILITY (fn
) = VISIBILITY_DEFAULT
;
2671 DECL_VISIBILITY_SPECIFIED (fn
) = 1;
2673 block_clear_fn
= fn
;
2677 set_user_assembler_name (block_clear_fn
, asmspec
);
2681 clear_storage_libcall_fn (int for_call
)
2683 static bool emitted_extern
;
2685 if (!block_clear_fn
)
2686 init_block_clear_fn (NULL
);
2688 if (for_call
&& !emitted_extern
)
2690 emitted_extern
= true;
2691 make_decl_rtl (block_clear_fn
);
2692 assemble_external (block_clear_fn
);
2695 return block_clear_fn
;
2698 /* Expand a setmem pattern; return true if successful. */
2701 set_storage_via_setmem (rtx object
, rtx size
, rtx val
, unsigned int align
,
2702 unsigned int expected_align
, HOST_WIDE_INT expected_size
)
2704 /* Try the most limited insn first, because there's no point
2705 including more than one in the machine description unless
2706 the more limited one has some advantage. */
2708 enum machine_mode mode
;
2710 if (expected_align
< align
)
2711 expected_align
= align
;
2713 for (mode
= GET_CLASS_NARROWEST_MODE (MODE_INT
); mode
!= VOIDmode
;
2714 mode
= GET_MODE_WIDER_MODE (mode
))
2716 enum insn_code code
= direct_optab_handler (setmem_optab
, mode
);
2718 if (code
!= CODE_FOR_nothing
2719 /* We don't need MODE to be narrower than
2720 BITS_PER_HOST_WIDE_INT here because if SIZE is less than
2721 the mode mask, as it is returned by the macro, it will
2722 definitely be less than the actual mode mask. */
2723 && ((CONST_INT_P (size
)
2724 && ((unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT
) INTVAL (size
)
2725 <= (GET_MODE_MASK (mode
) >> 1)))
2726 || GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode
) >= BITS_PER_WORD
))
2728 struct expand_operand ops
[6];
2731 nops
= insn_data
[(int) code
].n_generator_args
;
2732 gcc_assert (nops
== 4 || nops
== 6);
2734 create_fixed_operand (&ops
[0], object
);
2735 /* The check above guarantees that this size conversion is valid. */
2736 create_convert_operand_to (&ops
[1], size
, mode
, true);
2737 create_convert_operand_from (&ops
[2], val
, byte_mode
, true);
2738 create_integer_operand (&ops
[3], align
/ BITS_PER_UNIT
);
2741 create_integer_operand (&ops
[4], expected_align
/ BITS_PER_UNIT
);
2742 create_integer_operand (&ops
[5], expected_size
);
2744 if (maybe_expand_insn (code
, nops
, ops
))
2753 /* Write to one of the components of the complex value CPLX. Write VAL to
2754 the real part if IMAG_P is false, and the imaginary part if its true. */
2757 write_complex_part (rtx cplx
, rtx val
, bool imag_p
)
2759 enum machine_mode cmode
;
2760 enum machine_mode imode
;
2763 if (GET_CODE (cplx
) == CONCAT
)
2765 emit_move_insn (XEXP (cplx
, imag_p
), val
);
2769 cmode
= GET_MODE (cplx
);
2770 imode
= GET_MODE_INNER (cmode
);
2771 ibitsize
= GET_MODE_BITSIZE (imode
);
2773 /* For MEMs simplify_gen_subreg may generate an invalid new address
2774 because, e.g., the original address is considered mode-dependent
2775 by the target, which restricts simplify_subreg from invoking
2776 adjust_address_nv. Instead of preparing fallback support for an
2777 invalid address, we call adjust_address_nv directly. */
2780 emit_move_insn (adjust_address_nv (cplx
, imode
,
2781 imag_p
? GET_MODE_SIZE (imode
) : 0),
2786 /* If the sub-object is at least word sized, then we know that subregging
2787 will work. This special case is important, since store_bit_field
2788 wants to operate on integer modes, and there's rarely an OImode to
2789 correspond to TCmode. */
2790 if (ibitsize
>= BITS_PER_WORD
2791 /* For hard regs we have exact predicates. Assume we can split
2792 the original object if it spans an even number of hard regs.
2793 This special case is important for SCmode on 64-bit platforms
2794 where the natural size of floating-point regs is 32-bit. */
2796 && REGNO (cplx
) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
2797 && hard_regno_nregs
[REGNO (cplx
)][cmode
] % 2 == 0))
2799 rtx part
= simplify_gen_subreg (imode
, cplx
, cmode
,
2800 imag_p
? GET_MODE_SIZE (imode
) : 0);
2803 emit_move_insn (part
, val
);
2807 /* simplify_gen_subreg may fail for sub-word MEMs. */
2808 gcc_assert (MEM_P (cplx
) && ibitsize
< BITS_PER_WORD
);
2811 store_bit_field (cplx
, ibitsize
, imag_p
? ibitsize
: 0, 0, 0, imode
, val
);
2814 /* Extract one of the components of the complex value CPLX. Extract the
2815 real part if IMAG_P is false, and the imaginary part if it's true. */
2818 read_complex_part (rtx cplx
, bool imag_p
)
2820 enum machine_mode cmode
, imode
;
2823 if (GET_CODE (cplx
) == CONCAT
)
2824 return XEXP (cplx
, imag_p
);
2826 cmode
= GET_MODE (cplx
);
2827 imode
= GET_MODE_INNER (cmode
);
2828 ibitsize
= GET_MODE_BITSIZE (imode
);
2830 /* Special case reads from complex constants that got spilled to memory. */
2831 if (MEM_P (cplx
) && GET_CODE (XEXP (cplx
, 0)) == SYMBOL_REF
)
2833 tree decl
= SYMBOL_REF_DECL (XEXP (cplx
, 0));
2834 if (decl
&& TREE_CODE (decl
) == COMPLEX_CST
)
2836 tree part
= imag_p
? TREE_IMAGPART (decl
) : TREE_REALPART (decl
);
2837 if (CONSTANT_CLASS_P (part
))
2838 return expand_expr (part
, NULL_RTX
, imode
, EXPAND_NORMAL
);
2842 /* For MEMs simplify_gen_subreg may generate an invalid new address
2843 because, e.g., the original address is considered mode-dependent
2844 by the target, which restricts simplify_subreg from invoking
2845 adjust_address_nv. Instead of preparing fallback support for an
2846 invalid address, we call adjust_address_nv directly. */
2848 return adjust_address_nv (cplx
, imode
,
2849 imag_p
? GET_MODE_SIZE (imode
) : 0);
2851 /* If the sub-object is at least word sized, then we know that subregging
2852 will work. This special case is important, since extract_bit_field
2853 wants to operate on integer modes, and there's rarely an OImode to
2854 correspond to TCmode. */
2855 if (ibitsize
>= BITS_PER_WORD
2856 /* For hard regs we have exact predicates. Assume we can split
2857 the original object if it spans an even number of hard regs.
2858 This special case is important for SCmode on 64-bit platforms
2859 where the natural size of floating-point regs is 32-bit. */
2861 && REGNO (cplx
) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
2862 && hard_regno_nregs
[REGNO (cplx
)][cmode
] % 2 == 0))
2864 rtx ret
= simplify_gen_subreg (imode
, cplx
, cmode
,
2865 imag_p
? GET_MODE_SIZE (imode
) : 0);
2869 /* simplify_gen_subreg may fail for sub-word MEMs. */
2870 gcc_assert (MEM_P (cplx
) && ibitsize
< BITS_PER_WORD
);
2873 return extract_bit_field (cplx
, ibitsize
, imag_p
? ibitsize
: 0,
2874 true, false, NULL_RTX
, imode
, imode
);
2877 /* A subroutine of emit_move_insn_1. Yet another lowpart generator.
2878 NEW_MODE and OLD_MODE are the same size. Return NULL if X cannot be
2879 represented in NEW_MODE. If FORCE is true, this will never happen, as
2880 we'll force-create a SUBREG if needed. */
2883 emit_move_change_mode (enum machine_mode new_mode
,
2884 enum machine_mode old_mode
, rtx x
, bool force
)
2888 if (push_operand (x
, GET_MODE (x
)))
2890 ret
= gen_rtx_MEM (new_mode
, XEXP (x
, 0));
2891 MEM_COPY_ATTRIBUTES (ret
, x
);
2895 /* We don't have to worry about changing the address since the
2896 size in bytes is supposed to be the same. */
2897 if (reload_in_progress
)
2899 /* Copy the MEM to change the mode and move any
2900 substitutions from the old MEM to the new one. */
2901 ret
= adjust_address_nv (x
, new_mode
, 0);
2902 copy_replacements (x
, ret
);
2905 ret
= adjust_address (x
, new_mode
, 0);
2909 /* Note that we do want simplify_subreg's behavior of validating
2910 that the new mode is ok for a hard register. If we were to use
2911 simplify_gen_subreg, we would create the subreg, but would
2912 probably run into the target not being able to implement it. */
2913 /* Except, of course, when FORCE is true, when this is exactly what
2914 we want. Which is needed for CCmodes on some targets. */
2916 ret
= simplify_gen_subreg (new_mode
, x
, old_mode
, 0);
2918 ret
= simplify_subreg (new_mode
, x
, old_mode
, 0);
2924 /* A subroutine of emit_move_insn_1. Generate a move from Y into X using
2925 an integer mode of the same size as MODE. Returns the instruction
2926 emitted, or NULL if such a move could not be generated. */
2929 emit_move_via_integer (enum machine_mode mode
, rtx x
, rtx y
, bool force
)
2931 enum machine_mode imode
;
2932 enum insn_code code
;
2934 /* There must exist a mode of the exact size we require. */
2935 imode
= int_mode_for_mode (mode
);
2936 if (imode
== BLKmode
)
2939 /* The target must support moves in this mode. */
2940 code
= optab_handler (mov_optab
, imode
);
2941 if (code
== CODE_FOR_nothing
)
2944 x
= emit_move_change_mode (imode
, mode
, x
, force
);
2947 y
= emit_move_change_mode (imode
, mode
, y
, force
);
2950 return emit_insn (GEN_FCN (code
) (x
, y
));
2953 /* A subroutine of emit_move_insn_1. X is a push_operand in MODE.
2954 Return an equivalent MEM that does not use an auto-increment. */
2957 emit_move_resolve_push (enum machine_mode mode
, rtx x
)
2959 enum rtx_code code
= GET_CODE (XEXP (x
, 0));
2960 HOST_WIDE_INT adjust
;
2963 adjust
= GET_MODE_SIZE (mode
);
2964 #ifdef PUSH_ROUNDING
2965 adjust
= PUSH_ROUNDING (adjust
);
2967 if (code
== PRE_DEC
|| code
== POST_DEC
)
2969 else if (code
== PRE_MODIFY
|| code
== POST_MODIFY
)
2971 rtx expr
= XEXP (XEXP (x
, 0), 1);
2974 gcc_assert (GET_CODE (expr
) == PLUS
|| GET_CODE (expr
) == MINUS
);
2975 gcc_assert (CONST_INT_P (XEXP (expr
, 1)));
2976 val
= INTVAL (XEXP (expr
, 1));
2977 if (GET_CODE (expr
) == MINUS
)
2979 gcc_assert (adjust
== val
|| adjust
== -val
);
2983 /* Do not use anti_adjust_stack, since we don't want to update
2984 stack_pointer_delta. */
2985 temp
= expand_simple_binop (Pmode
, PLUS
, stack_pointer_rtx
,
2986 GEN_INT (adjust
), stack_pointer_rtx
,
2987 0, OPTAB_LIB_WIDEN
);
2988 if (temp
!= stack_pointer_rtx
)
2989 emit_move_insn (stack_pointer_rtx
, temp
);
2996 temp
= stack_pointer_rtx
;
3001 temp
= plus_constant (stack_pointer_rtx
, -adjust
);
3007 return replace_equiv_address (x
, temp
);
3010 /* A subroutine of emit_move_complex. Generate a move from Y into X.
3011 X is known to satisfy push_operand, and MODE is known to be complex.
3012 Returns the last instruction emitted. */
3015 emit_move_complex_push (enum machine_mode mode
, rtx x
, rtx y
)
3017 enum machine_mode submode
= GET_MODE_INNER (mode
);
3020 #ifdef PUSH_ROUNDING
3021 unsigned int submodesize
= GET_MODE_SIZE (submode
);
3023 /* In case we output to the stack, but the size is smaller than the
3024 machine can push exactly, we need to use move instructions. */
3025 if (PUSH_ROUNDING (submodesize
) != submodesize
)
3027 x
= emit_move_resolve_push (mode
, x
);
3028 return emit_move_insn (x
, y
);
3032 /* Note that the real part always precedes the imag part in memory
3033 regardless of machine's endianness. */
3034 switch (GET_CODE (XEXP (x
, 0)))
3048 emit_move_insn (gen_rtx_MEM (submode
, XEXP (x
, 0)),
3049 read_complex_part (y
, imag_first
));
3050 return emit_move_insn (gen_rtx_MEM (submode
, XEXP (x
, 0)),
3051 read_complex_part (y
, !imag_first
));
3054 /* A subroutine of emit_move_complex. Perform the move from Y to X
3055 via two moves of the parts. Returns the last instruction emitted. */
3058 emit_move_complex_parts (rtx x
, rtx y
)
3060 /* Show the output dies here. This is necessary for SUBREGs
3061 of pseudos since we cannot track their lifetimes correctly;
3062 hard regs shouldn't appear here except as return values. */
3063 if (!reload_completed
&& !reload_in_progress
3064 && REG_P (x
) && !reg_overlap_mentioned_p (x
, y
))
3067 write_complex_part (x
, read_complex_part (y
, false), false);
3068 write_complex_part (x
, read_complex_part (y
, true), true);
3070 return get_last_insn ();
3073 /* A subroutine of emit_move_insn_1. Generate a move from Y into X.
3074 MODE is known to be complex. Returns the last instruction emitted. */
3077 emit_move_complex (enum machine_mode mode
, rtx x
, rtx y
)
3081 /* Need to take special care for pushes, to maintain proper ordering
3082 of the data, and possibly extra padding. */
3083 if (push_operand (x
, mode
))
3084 return emit_move_complex_push (mode
, x
, y
);
3086 /* See if we can coerce the target into moving both values at once. */
3088 /* Move floating point as parts. */
3089 if (GET_MODE_CLASS (mode
) == MODE_COMPLEX_FLOAT
3090 && optab_handler (mov_optab
, GET_MODE_INNER (mode
)) != CODE_FOR_nothing
)
3092 /* Not possible if the values are inherently not adjacent. */
3093 else if (GET_CODE (x
) == CONCAT
|| GET_CODE (y
) == CONCAT
)
3095 /* Is possible if both are registers (or subregs of registers). */
3096 else if (register_operand (x
, mode
) && register_operand (y
, mode
))
3098 /* If one of the operands is a memory, and alignment constraints
3099 are friendly enough, we may be able to do combined memory operations.
3100 We do not attempt this if Y is a constant because that combination is
3101 usually better with the by-parts thing below. */
3102 else if ((MEM_P (x
) ? !CONSTANT_P (y
) : MEM_P (y
))
3103 && (!STRICT_ALIGNMENT
3104 || get_mode_alignment (mode
) == BIGGEST_ALIGNMENT
))
3113 /* For memory to memory moves, optimal behavior can be had with the
3114 existing block move logic. */
3115 if (MEM_P (x
) && MEM_P (y
))
3117 emit_block_move (x
, y
, GEN_INT (GET_MODE_SIZE (mode
)),
3118 BLOCK_OP_NO_LIBCALL
);
3119 return get_last_insn ();
3122 ret
= emit_move_via_integer (mode
, x
, y
, true);
3127 return emit_move_complex_parts (x
, y
);
3130 /* A subroutine of emit_move_insn_1. Generate a move from Y into X.
3131 MODE is known to be MODE_CC. Returns the last instruction emitted. */
3134 emit_move_ccmode (enum machine_mode mode
, rtx x
, rtx y
)
3138 /* Assume all MODE_CC modes are equivalent; if we have movcc, use it. */
3141 enum insn_code code
= optab_handler (mov_optab
, CCmode
);
3142 if (code
!= CODE_FOR_nothing
)
3144 x
= emit_move_change_mode (CCmode
, mode
, x
, true);
3145 y
= emit_move_change_mode (CCmode
, mode
, y
, true);
3146 return emit_insn (GEN_FCN (code
) (x
, y
));
3150 /* Otherwise, find the MODE_INT mode of the same width. */
3151 ret
= emit_move_via_integer (mode
, x
, y
, false);
3152 gcc_assert (ret
!= NULL
);
3156 /* Return true if word I of OP lies entirely in the
3157 undefined bits of a paradoxical subreg. */
3160 undefined_operand_subword_p (const_rtx op
, int i
)
3162 enum machine_mode innermode
, innermostmode
;
3164 if (GET_CODE (op
) != SUBREG
)
3166 innermode
= GET_MODE (op
);
3167 innermostmode
= GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (op
));
3168 offset
= i
* UNITS_PER_WORD
+ SUBREG_BYTE (op
);
3169 /* The SUBREG_BYTE represents offset, as if the value were stored in
3170 memory, except for a paradoxical subreg where we define
3171 SUBREG_BYTE to be 0; undo this exception as in
3173 if (SUBREG_BYTE (op
) == 0
3174 && GET_MODE_SIZE (innermostmode
) < GET_MODE_SIZE (innermode
))
3176 int difference
= (GET_MODE_SIZE (innermostmode
) - GET_MODE_SIZE (innermode
));
3177 if (WORDS_BIG_ENDIAN
)
3178 offset
+= (difference
/ UNITS_PER_WORD
) * UNITS_PER_WORD
;
3179 if (BYTES_BIG_ENDIAN
)
3180 offset
+= difference
% UNITS_PER_WORD
;
3182 if (offset
>= GET_MODE_SIZE (innermostmode
)
3183 || offset
<= -GET_MODE_SIZE (word_mode
))
3188 /* A subroutine of emit_move_insn_1. Generate a move from Y into X.
3189 MODE is any multi-word or full-word mode that lacks a move_insn
3190 pattern. Note that you will get better code if you define such
3191 patterns, even if they must turn into multiple assembler instructions. */
3194 emit_move_multi_word (enum machine_mode mode
, rtx x
, rtx y
)
3201 gcc_assert (GET_MODE_SIZE (mode
) >= UNITS_PER_WORD
);
3203 /* If X is a push on the stack, do the push now and replace
3204 X with a reference to the stack pointer. */
3205 if (push_operand (x
, mode
))
3206 x
= emit_move_resolve_push (mode
, x
);
3208 /* If we are in reload, see if either operand is a MEM whose address
3209 is scheduled for replacement. */
3210 if (reload_in_progress
&& MEM_P (x
)
3211 && (inner
= find_replacement (&XEXP (x
, 0))) != XEXP (x
, 0))
3212 x
= replace_equiv_address_nv (x
, inner
);
3213 if (reload_in_progress
&& MEM_P (y
)
3214 && (inner
= find_replacement (&XEXP (y
, 0))) != XEXP (y
, 0))
3215 y
= replace_equiv_address_nv (y
, inner
);
3219 need_clobber
= false;
3221 i
< (GET_MODE_SIZE (mode
) + (UNITS_PER_WORD
- 1)) / UNITS_PER_WORD
;
3224 rtx xpart
= operand_subword (x
, i
, 1, mode
);
3227 /* Do not generate code for a move if it would come entirely
3228 from the undefined bits of a paradoxical subreg. */
3229 if (undefined_operand_subword_p (y
, i
))
3232 ypart
= operand_subword (y
, i
, 1, mode
);
3234 /* If we can't get a part of Y, put Y into memory if it is a
3235 constant. Otherwise, force it into a register. Then we must
3236 be able to get a part of Y. */
3237 if (ypart
== 0 && CONSTANT_P (y
))
3239 y
= use_anchored_address (force_const_mem (mode
, y
));
3240 ypart
= operand_subword (y
, i
, 1, mode
);
3242 else if (ypart
== 0)
3243 ypart
= operand_subword_force (y
, i
, mode
);
3245 gcc_assert (xpart
&& ypart
);
3247 need_clobber
|= (GET_CODE (xpart
) == SUBREG
);
3249 last_insn
= emit_move_insn (xpart
, ypart
);
3255 /* Show the output dies here. This is necessary for SUBREGs
3256 of pseudos since we cannot track their lifetimes correctly;
3257 hard regs shouldn't appear here except as return values.
3258 We never want to emit such a clobber after reload. */
3260 && ! (reload_in_progress
|| reload_completed
)
3261 && need_clobber
!= 0)
3269 /* Low level part of emit_move_insn.
3270 Called just like emit_move_insn, but assumes X and Y
3271 are basically valid. */
3274 emit_move_insn_1 (rtx x
, rtx y
)
3276 enum machine_mode mode
= GET_MODE (x
);
3277 enum insn_code code
;
3279 gcc_assert ((unsigned int) mode
< (unsigned int) MAX_MACHINE_MODE
);
3281 code
= optab_handler (mov_optab
, mode
);
3282 if (code
!= CODE_FOR_nothing
)
3283 return emit_insn (GEN_FCN (code
) (x
, y
));
3285 /* Expand complex moves by moving real part and imag part. */
3286 if (COMPLEX_MODE_P (mode
))
3287 return emit_move_complex (mode
, x
, y
);
3289 if (GET_MODE_CLASS (mode
) == MODE_DECIMAL_FLOAT
3290 || ALL_FIXED_POINT_MODE_P (mode
))
3292 rtx result
= emit_move_via_integer (mode
, x
, y
, true);
3294 /* If we can't find an integer mode, use multi words. */
3298 return emit_move_multi_word (mode
, x
, y
);
3301 if (GET_MODE_CLASS (mode
) == MODE_CC
)
3302 return emit_move_ccmode (mode
, x
, y
);
3304 /* Try using a move pattern for the corresponding integer mode. This is
3305 only safe when simplify_subreg can convert MODE constants into integer
3306 constants. At present, it can only do this reliably if the value
3307 fits within a HOST_WIDE_INT. */
3308 if (!CONSTANT_P (y
) || GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode
) <= HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT
)
3310 rtx ret
= emit_move_via_integer (mode
, x
, y
, false);
3315 return emit_move_multi_word (mode
, x
, y
);
3318 /* Generate code to copy Y into X.
3319 Both Y and X must have the same mode, except that
3320 Y can be a constant with VOIDmode.
3321 This mode cannot be BLKmode; use emit_block_move for that.
3323 Return the last instruction emitted. */
3326 emit_move_insn (rtx x
, rtx y
)
3328 enum machine_mode mode
= GET_MODE (x
);
3329 rtx y_cst
= NULL_RTX
;
3332 gcc_assert (mode
!= BLKmode
3333 && (GET_MODE (y
) == mode
|| GET_MODE (y
) == VOIDmode
));
3338 && SCALAR_FLOAT_MODE_P (GET_MODE (x
))
3339 && (last_insn
= compress_float_constant (x
, y
)))
3344 if (!targetm
.legitimate_constant_p (mode
, y
))
3346 y
= force_const_mem (mode
, y
);
3348 /* If the target's cannot_force_const_mem prevented the spill,
3349 assume that the target's move expanders will also take care
3350 of the non-legitimate constant. */
3354 y
= use_anchored_address (y
);
3358 /* If X or Y are memory references, verify that their addresses are valid
3361 && (! memory_address_addr_space_p (GET_MODE (x
), XEXP (x
, 0),
3363 && ! push_operand (x
, GET_MODE (x
))))
3364 x
= validize_mem (x
);
3367 && ! memory_address_addr_space_p (GET_MODE (y
), XEXP (y
, 0),
3368 MEM_ADDR_SPACE (y
)))
3369 y
= validize_mem (y
);
3371 gcc_assert (mode
!= BLKmode
);
3373 last_insn
= emit_move_insn_1 (x
, y
);
3375 if (y_cst
&& REG_P (x
)
3376 && (set
= single_set (last_insn
)) != NULL_RTX
3377 && SET_DEST (set
) == x
3378 && ! rtx_equal_p (y_cst
, SET_SRC (set
)))
3379 set_unique_reg_note (last_insn
, REG_EQUAL
, copy_rtx (y_cst
));
3384 /* If Y is representable exactly in a narrower mode, and the target can
3385 perform the extension directly from constant or memory, then emit the
3386 move as an extension. */
3389 compress_float_constant (rtx x
, rtx y
)
3391 enum machine_mode dstmode
= GET_MODE (x
);
3392 enum machine_mode orig_srcmode
= GET_MODE (y
);
3393 enum machine_mode srcmode
;
3395 int oldcost
, newcost
;
3396 bool speed
= optimize_insn_for_speed_p ();
3398 REAL_VALUE_FROM_CONST_DOUBLE (r
, y
);
3400 if (targetm
.legitimate_constant_p (dstmode
, y
))
3401 oldcost
= rtx_cost (y
, SET
, speed
);
3403 oldcost
= rtx_cost (force_const_mem (dstmode
, y
), SET
, speed
);
3405 for (srcmode
= GET_CLASS_NARROWEST_MODE (GET_MODE_CLASS (orig_srcmode
));
3406 srcmode
!= orig_srcmode
;
3407 srcmode
= GET_MODE_WIDER_MODE (srcmode
))
3410 rtx trunc_y
, last_insn
;
3412 /* Skip if the target can't extend this way. */
3413 ic
= can_extend_p (dstmode
, srcmode
, 0);
3414 if (ic
== CODE_FOR_nothing
)
3417 /* Skip if the narrowed value isn't exact. */
3418 if (! exact_real_truncate (srcmode
, &r
))
3421 trunc_y
= CONST_DOUBLE_FROM_REAL_VALUE (r
, srcmode
);
3423 if (targetm
.legitimate_constant_p (srcmode
, trunc_y
))
3425 /* Skip if the target needs extra instructions to perform
3427 if (!insn_operand_matches (ic
, 1, trunc_y
))
3429 /* This is valid, but may not be cheaper than the original. */
3430 newcost
= rtx_cost (gen_rtx_FLOAT_EXTEND (dstmode
, trunc_y
), SET
, speed
);
3431 if (oldcost
< newcost
)
3434 else if (float_extend_from_mem
[dstmode
][srcmode
])
3436 trunc_y
= force_const_mem (srcmode
, trunc_y
);
3437 /* This is valid, but may not be cheaper than the original. */
3438 newcost
= rtx_cost (gen_rtx_FLOAT_EXTEND (dstmode
, trunc_y
), SET
, speed
);
3439 if (oldcost
< newcost
)
3441 trunc_y
= validize_mem (trunc_y
);
3446 /* For CSE's benefit, force the compressed constant pool entry
3447 into a new pseudo. This constant may be used in different modes,
3448 and if not, combine will put things back together for us. */
3449 trunc_y
= force_reg (srcmode
, trunc_y
);
3450 emit_unop_insn (ic
, x
, trunc_y
, UNKNOWN
);
3451 last_insn
= get_last_insn ();
3454 set_unique_reg_note (last_insn
, REG_EQUAL
, y
);
3462 /* Pushing data onto the stack. */
3464 /* Push a block of length SIZE (perhaps variable)
3465 and return an rtx to address the beginning of the block.
3466 The value may be virtual_outgoing_args_rtx.
3468 EXTRA is the number of bytes of padding to push in addition to SIZE.
3469 BELOW nonzero means this padding comes at low addresses;
3470 otherwise, the padding comes at high addresses. */
3473 push_block (rtx size
, int extra
, int below
)
3477 size
= convert_modes (Pmode
, ptr_mode
, size
, 1);
3478 if (CONSTANT_P (size
))
3479 anti_adjust_stack (plus_constant (size
, extra
));
3480 else if (REG_P (size
) && extra
== 0)
3481 anti_adjust_stack (size
);
3484 temp
= copy_to_mode_reg (Pmode
, size
);
3486 temp
= expand_binop (Pmode
, add_optab
, temp
, GEN_INT (extra
),
3487 temp
, 0, OPTAB_LIB_WIDEN
);
3488 anti_adjust_stack (temp
);
3491 #ifndef STACK_GROWS_DOWNWARD
3497 temp
= virtual_outgoing_args_rtx
;
3498 if (extra
!= 0 && below
)
3499 temp
= plus_constant (temp
, extra
);
3503 if (CONST_INT_P (size
))
3504 temp
= plus_constant (virtual_outgoing_args_rtx
,
3505 -INTVAL (size
) - (below
? 0 : extra
));
3506 else if (extra
!= 0 && !below
)
3507 temp
= gen_rtx_PLUS (Pmode
, virtual_outgoing_args_rtx
,
3508 negate_rtx (Pmode
, plus_constant (size
, extra
)));
3510 temp
= gen_rtx_PLUS (Pmode
, virtual_outgoing_args_rtx
,
3511 negate_rtx (Pmode
, size
));
3514 return memory_address (GET_CLASS_NARROWEST_MODE (MODE_INT
), temp
);
3517 /* A utility routine that returns the base of an auto-inc memory, or NULL. */
3520 mem_autoinc_base (rtx mem
)
3524 rtx addr
= XEXP (mem
, 0);
3525 if (GET_RTX_CLASS (GET_CODE (addr
)) == RTX_AUTOINC
)
3526 return XEXP (addr
, 0);
3531 /* A utility routine used here, in reload, and in try_split. The insns
3532 after PREV up to and including LAST are known to adjust the stack,
3533 with a final value of END_ARGS_SIZE. Iterate backward from LAST
3534 placing notes as appropriate. PREV may be NULL, indicating the
3535 entire insn sequence prior to LAST should be scanned.
3537 The set of allowed stack pointer modifications is small:
3538 (1) One or more auto-inc style memory references (aka pushes),
3539 (2) One or more addition/subtraction with the SP as destination,
3540 (3) A single move insn with the SP as destination,
3541 (4) A call_pop insn.
3543 Insns in the sequence that do not modify the SP are ignored.
3545 The return value is the amount of adjustment that can be trivially
3546 verified, via immediate operand or auto-inc. If the adjustment
3547 cannot be trivially extracted, the return value is INT_MIN. */
3550 fixup_args_size_notes (rtx prev
, rtx last
, int end_args_size
)
3552 int args_size
= end_args_size
;
3553 bool saw_unknown
= false;
3556 for (insn
= last
; insn
!= prev
; insn
= PREV_INSN (insn
))
3559 HOST_WIDE_INT this_delta
= 0;
3562 if (!NONDEBUG_INSN_P (insn
))
3564 pat
= PATTERN (insn
);
3567 /* Look for a call_pop pattern. */
3570 /* We have to allow non-call_pop patterns for the case
3571 of emit_single_push_insn of a TLS address. */
3572 if (GET_CODE (pat
) != PARALLEL
)
3575 /* All call_pop have a stack pointer adjust in the parallel.
3576 The call itself is always first, and the stack adjust is
3577 usually last, so search from the end. */
3578 for (i
= XVECLEN (pat
, 0) - 1; i
> 0; --i
)
3580 set
= XVECEXP (pat
, 0, i
);
3581 if (GET_CODE (set
) != SET
)
3583 dest
= SET_DEST (set
);
3584 if (dest
== stack_pointer_rtx
)
3587 /* We'd better have found the stack pointer adjust. */
3590 /* Fall through to process the extracted SET and DEST
3591 as if it was a standalone insn. */
3593 else if (GET_CODE (pat
) == SET
)
3595 else if ((set
= single_set (insn
)) != NULL
)
3597 else if (GET_CODE (pat
) == PARALLEL
)
3599 /* ??? Some older ports use a parallel with a stack adjust
3600 and a store for a PUSH_ROUNDING pattern, rather than a
3601 PRE/POST_MODIFY rtx. Don't force them to update yet... */
3602 /* ??? See h8300 and m68k, pushqi1. */
3603 for (i
= XVECLEN (pat
, 0) - 1; i
>= 0; --i
)
3605 set
= XVECEXP (pat
, 0, i
);
3606 if (GET_CODE (set
) != SET
)
3608 dest
= SET_DEST (set
);
3609 if (dest
== stack_pointer_rtx
)
3612 /* We do not expect an auto-inc of the sp in the parallel. */
3613 gcc_checking_assert (mem_autoinc_base (dest
)
3614 != stack_pointer_rtx
);
3615 gcc_checking_assert (mem_autoinc_base (SET_SRC (set
))
3616 != stack_pointer_rtx
);
3623 dest
= SET_DEST (set
);
3625 /* Look for direct modifications of the stack pointer. */
3626 if (REG_P (dest
) && REGNO (dest
) == STACK_POINTER_REGNUM
)
3628 gcc_assert (!saw_unknown
);
3629 /* Look for a trivial adjustment, otherwise assume nothing. */
3630 /* Note that the SPU restore_stack_block pattern refers to
3631 the stack pointer in V4SImode. Consider that non-trivial. */
3632 if (SCALAR_INT_MODE_P (GET_MODE (dest
))
3633 && GET_CODE (SET_SRC (set
)) == PLUS
3634 && XEXP (SET_SRC (set
), 0) == stack_pointer_rtx
3635 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (SET_SRC (set
), 1)))
3636 this_delta
= INTVAL (XEXP (SET_SRC (set
), 1));
3637 /* ??? Reload can generate no-op moves, which will be cleaned
3638 up later. Recognize it and continue searching. */
3639 else if (rtx_equal_p (dest
, SET_SRC (set
)))
3644 /* Otherwise only think about autoinc patterns. */
3645 else if (mem_autoinc_base (dest
) == stack_pointer_rtx
)
3647 rtx addr
= XEXP (dest
, 0);
3648 gcc_assert (!saw_unknown
);
3649 switch (GET_CODE (addr
))
3653 this_delta
= GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (dest
));
3657 this_delta
= -GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (dest
));
3661 addr
= XEXP (addr
, 1);
3662 gcc_assert (GET_CODE (addr
) == PLUS
);
3663 gcc_assert (XEXP (addr
, 0) == stack_pointer_rtx
);
3664 gcc_assert (CONST_INT_P (XEXP (addr
, 1)));
3665 this_delta
= INTVAL (XEXP (addr
, 1));
3674 add_reg_note (insn
, REG_ARGS_SIZE
, GEN_INT (args_size
));
3675 #ifdef STACK_GROWS_DOWNWARD
3676 this_delta
= -this_delta
;
3678 args_size
-= this_delta
;
3681 return saw_unknown
? INT_MIN
: args_size
;
3684 #ifdef PUSH_ROUNDING
3685 /* Emit single push insn. */
3688 emit_single_push_insn_1 (enum machine_mode mode
, rtx x
, tree type
)
3691 unsigned rounded_size
= PUSH_ROUNDING (GET_MODE_SIZE (mode
));
3693 enum insn_code icode
;
3695 stack_pointer_delta
+= PUSH_ROUNDING (GET_MODE_SIZE (mode
));
3696 /* If there is push pattern, use it. Otherwise try old way of throwing
3697 MEM representing push operation to move expander. */
3698 icode
= optab_handler (push_optab
, mode
);
3699 if (icode
!= CODE_FOR_nothing
)
3701 struct expand_operand ops
[1];
3703 create_input_operand (&ops
[0], x
, mode
);
3704 if (maybe_expand_insn (icode
, 1, ops
))
3707 if (GET_MODE_SIZE (mode
) == rounded_size
)
3708 dest_addr
= gen_rtx_fmt_e (STACK_PUSH_CODE
, Pmode
, stack_pointer_rtx
);
3709 /* If we are to pad downward, adjust the stack pointer first and
3710 then store X into the stack location using an offset. This is
3711 because emit_move_insn does not know how to pad; it does not have
3713 else if (FUNCTION_ARG_PADDING (mode
, type
) == downward
)
3715 unsigned padding_size
= rounded_size
- GET_MODE_SIZE (mode
);
3716 HOST_WIDE_INT offset
;
3718 emit_move_insn (stack_pointer_rtx
,
3719 expand_binop (Pmode
,
3720 #ifdef STACK_GROWS_DOWNWARD
3726 GEN_INT (rounded_size
),
3727 NULL_RTX
, 0, OPTAB_LIB_WIDEN
));
3729 offset
= (HOST_WIDE_INT
) padding_size
;
3730 #ifdef STACK_GROWS_DOWNWARD
3731 if (STACK_PUSH_CODE
== POST_DEC
)
3732 /* We have already decremented the stack pointer, so get the
3734 offset
+= (HOST_WIDE_INT
) rounded_size
;
3736 if (STACK_PUSH_CODE
== POST_INC
)
3737 /* We have already incremented the stack pointer, so get the
3739 offset
-= (HOST_WIDE_INT
) rounded_size
;
3741 dest_addr
= gen_rtx_PLUS (Pmode
, stack_pointer_rtx
, GEN_INT (offset
));
3745 #ifdef STACK_GROWS_DOWNWARD
3746 /* ??? This seems wrong if STACK_PUSH_CODE == POST_DEC. */
3747 dest_addr
= gen_rtx_PLUS (Pmode
, stack_pointer_rtx
,
3748 GEN_INT (-(HOST_WIDE_INT
) rounded_size
));
3750 /* ??? This seems wrong if STACK_PUSH_CODE == POST_INC. */
3751 dest_addr
= gen_rtx_PLUS (Pmode
, stack_pointer_rtx
,
3752 GEN_INT (rounded_size
));
3754 dest_addr
= gen_rtx_PRE_MODIFY (Pmode
, stack_pointer_rtx
, dest_addr
);
3757 dest
= gen_rtx_MEM (mode
, dest_addr
);
3761 set_mem_attributes (dest
, type
, 1);
3763 if (flag_optimize_sibling_calls
)
3764 /* Function incoming arguments may overlap with sibling call
3765 outgoing arguments and we cannot allow reordering of reads
3766 from function arguments with stores to outgoing arguments
3767 of sibling calls. */
3768 set_mem_alias_set (dest
, 0);
3770 emit_move_insn (dest
, x
);
3773 /* Emit and annotate a single push insn. */
3776 emit_single_push_insn (enum machine_mode mode
, rtx x
, tree type
)
3778 int delta
, old_delta
= stack_pointer_delta
;
3779 rtx prev
= get_last_insn ();
3782 emit_single_push_insn_1 (mode
, x
, type
);
3784 last
= get_last_insn ();
3786 /* Notice the common case where we emitted exactly one insn. */
3787 if (PREV_INSN (last
) == prev
)
3789 add_reg_note (last
, REG_ARGS_SIZE
, GEN_INT (stack_pointer_delta
));
3793 delta
= fixup_args_size_notes (prev
, last
, stack_pointer_delta
);
3794 gcc_assert (delta
== INT_MIN
|| delta
== old_delta
);
3798 /* Generate code to push X onto the stack, assuming it has mode MODE and
3800 MODE is redundant except when X is a CONST_INT (since they don't
3802 SIZE is an rtx for the size of data to be copied (in bytes),
3803 needed only if X is BLKmode.
3805 ALIGN (in bits) is maximum alignment we can assume.
3807 If PARTIAL and REG are both nonzero, then copy that many of the first
3808 bytes of X into registers starting with REG, and push the rest of X.
3809 The amount of space pushed is decreased by PARTIAL bytes.
3810 REG must be a hard register in this case.
3811 If REG is zero but PARTIAL is not, take any all others actions for an
3812 argument partially in registers, but do not actually load any
3815 EXTRA is the amount in bytes of extra space to leave next to this arg.
3816 This is ignored if an argument block has already been allocated.
3818 On a machine that lacks real push insns, ARGS_ADDR is the address of
3819 the bottom of the argument block for this call. We use indexing off there
3820 to store the arg. On machines with push insns, ARGS_ADDR is 0 when a
3821 argument block has not been preallocated.
3823 ARGS_SO_FAR is the size of args previously pushed for this call.
3825 REG_PARM_STACK_SPACE is nonzero if functions require stack space
3826 for arguments passed in registers. If nonzero, it will be the number
3827 of bytes required. */
3830 emit_push_insn (rtx x
, enum machine_mode mode
, tree type
, rtx size
,
3831 unsigned int align
, int partial
, rtx reg
, int extra
,
3832 rtx args_addr
, rtx args_so_far
, int reg_parm_stack_space
,
3836 enum direction stack_direction
3837 #ifdef STACK_GROWS_DOWNWARD
3843 /* Decide where to pad the argument: `downward' for below,
3844 `upward' for above, or `none' for don't pad it.
3845 Default is below for small data on big-endian machines; else above. */
3846 enum direction where_pad
= FUNCTION_ARG_PADDING (mode
, type
);
3848 /* Invert direction if stack is post-decrement.
3850 if (STACK_PUSH_CODE
== POST_DEC
)
3851 if (where_pad
!= none
)
3852 where_pad
= (where_pad
== downward
? upward
: downward
);
3857 || (STRICT_ALIGNMENT
&& align
< GET_MODE_ALIGNMENT (mode
)))
3859 /* Copy a block into the stack, entirely or partially. */
3866 offset
= partial
% (PARM_BOUNDARY
/ BITS_PER_UNIT
);
3867 used
= partial
- offset
;
3869 if (mode
!= BLKmode
)
3871 /* A value is to be stored in an insufficiently aligned
3872 stack slot; copy via a suitably aligned slot if
3874 size
= GEN_INT (GET_MODE_SIZE (mode
));
3875 if (!MEM_P (xinner
))
3877 temp
= assign_temp (type
, 0, 1, 1);
3878 emit_move_insn (temp
, xinner
);
3885 /* USED is now the # of bytes we need not copy to the stack
3886 because registers will take care of them. */
3889 xinner
= adjust_address (xinner
, BLKmode
, used
);
3891 /* If the partial register-part of the arg counts in its stack size,
3892 skip the part of stack space corresponding to the registers.
3893 Otherwise, start copying to the beginning of the stack space,
3894 by setting SKIP to 0. */
3895 skip
= (reg_parm_stack_space
== 0) ? 0 : used
;
3897 #ifdef PUSH_ROUNDING
3898 /* Do it with several push insns if that doesn't take lots of insns
3899 and if there is no difficulty with push insns that skip bytes
3900 on the stack for alignment purposes. */
3903 && CONST_INT_P (size
)
3905 && MEM_ALIGN (xinner
) >= align
3906 && (MOVE_BY_PIECES_P ((unsigned) INTVAL (size
) - used
, align
))
3907 /* Here we avoid the case of a structure whose weak alignment
3908 forces many pushes of a small amount of data,
3909 and such small pushes do rounding that causes trouble. */
3910 && ((! SLOW_UNALIGNED_ACCESS (word_mode
, align
))
3911 || align
>= BIGGEST_ALIGNMENT
3912 || (PUSH_ROUNDING (align
/ BITS_PER_UNIT
)
3913 == (align
/ BITS_PER_UNIT
)))
3914 && (HOST_WIDE_INT
) PUSH_ROUNDING (INTVAL (size
)) == INTVAL (size
))
3916 /* Push padding now if padding above and stack grows down,
3917 or if padding below and stack grows up.
3918 But if space already allocated, this has already been done. */
3919 if (extra
&& args_addr
== 0
3920 && where_pad
!= none
&& where_pad
!= stack_direction
)
3921 anti_adjust_stack (GEN_INT (extra
));
3923 move_by_pieces (NULL
, xinner
, INTVAL (size
) - used
, align
, 0);
3926 #endif /* PUSH_ROUNDING */
3930 /* Otherwise make space on the stack and copy the data
3931 to the address of that space. */
3933 /* Deduct words put into registers from the size we must copy. */
3936 if (CONST_INT_P (size
))
3937 size
= GEN_INT (INTVAL (size
) - used
);
3939 size
= expand_binop (GET_MODE (size
), sub_optab
, size
,
3940 GEN_INT (used
), NULL_RTX
, 0,
3944 /* Get the address of the stack space.
3945 In this case, we do not deal with EXTRA separately.
3946 A single stack adjust will do. */
3949 temp
= push_block (size
, extra
, where_pad
== downward
);
3952 else if (CONST_INT_P (args_so_far
))
3953 temp
= memory_address (BLKmode
,
3954 plus_constant (args_addr
,
3955 skip
+ INTVAL (args_so_far
)));
3957 temp
= memory_address (BLKmode
,
3958 plus_constant (gen_rtx_PLUS (Pmode
,
3963 if (!ACCUMULATE_OUTGOING_ARGS
)
3965 /* If the source is referenced relative to the stack pointer,
3966 copy it to another register to stabilize it. We do not need
3967 to do this if we know that we won't be changing sp. */
3969 if (reg_mentioned_p (virtual_stack_dynamic_rtx
, temp
)
3970 || reg_mentioned_p (virtual_outgoing_args_rtx
, temp
))
3971 temp
= copy_to_reg (temp
);
3974 target
= gen_rtx_MEM (BLKmode
, temp
);
3976 /* We do *not* set_mem_attributes here, because incoming arguments
3977 may overlap with sibling call outgoing arguments and we cannot
3978 allow reordering of reads from function arguments with stores
3979 to outgoing arguments of sibling calls. We do, however, want
3980 to record the alignment of the stack slot. */
3981 /* ALIGN may well be better aligned than TYPE, e.g. due to
3982 PARM_BOUNDARY. Assume the caller isn't lying. */
3983 set_mem_align (target
, align
);
3985 emit_block_move (target
, xinner
, size
, BLOCK_OP_CALL_PARM
);
3988 else if (partial
> 0)
3990 /* Scalar partly in registers. */
3992 int size
= GET_MODE_SIZE (mode
) / UNITS_PER_WORD
;
3995 /* # bytes of start of argument
3996 that we must make space for but need not store. */
3997 int offset
= partial
% (PARM_BOUNDARY
/ BITS_PER_UNIT
);
3998 int args_offset
= INTVAL (args_so_far
);
4001 /* Push padding now if padding above and stack grows down,
4002 or if padding below and stack grows up.
4003 But if space already allocated, this has already been done. */
4004 if (extra
&& args_addr
== 0
4005 && where_pad
!= none
&& where_pad
!= stack_direction
)
4006 anti_adjust_stack (GEN_INT (extra
));
4008 /* If we make space by pushing it, we might as well push
4009 the real data. Otherwise, we can leave OFFSET nonzero
4010 and leave the space uninitialized. */
4014 /* Now NOT_STACK gets the number of words that we don't need to
4015 allocate on the stack. Convert OFFSET to words too. */
4016 not_stack
= (partial
- offset
) / UNITS_PER_WORD
;
4017 offset
/= UNITS_PER_WORD
;
4019 /* If the partial register-part of the arg counts in its stack size,
4020 skip the part of stack space corresponding to the registers.
4021 Otherwise, start copying to the beginning of the stack space,
4022 by setting SKIP to 0. */
4023 skip
= (reg_parm_stack_space
== 0) ? 0 : not_stack
;
4025 if (CONSTANT_P (x
) && !targetm
.legitimate_constant_p (mode
, x
))
4026 x
= validize_mem (force_const_mem (mode
, x
));
4028 /* If X is a hard register in a non-integer mode, copy it into a pseudo;
4029 SUBREGs of such registers are not allowed. */
4030 if ((REG_P (x
) && REGNO (x
) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
4031 && GET_MODE_CLASS (GET_MODE (x
)) != MODE_INT
))
4032 x
= copy_to_reg (x
);
4034 /* Loop over all the words allocated on the stack for this arg. */
4035 /* We can do it by words, because any scalar bigger than a word
4036 has a size a multiple of a word. */
4037 #ifndef PUSH_ARGS_REVERSED
4038 for (i
= not_stack
; i
< size
; i
++)
4040 for (i
= size
- 1; i
>= not_stack
; i
--)
4042 if (i
>= not_stack
+ offset
)
4043 emit_push_insn (operand_subword_force (x
, i
, mode
),
4044 word_mode
, NULL_TREE
, NULL_RTX
, align
, 0, NULL_RTX
,
4046 GEN_INT (args_offset
+ ((i
- not_stack
+ skip
)
4048 reg_parm_stack_space
, alignment_pad
);
4055 /* Push padding now if padding above and stack grows down,
4056 or if padding below and stack grows up.
4057 But if space already allocated, this has already been done. */
4058 if (extra
&& args_addr
== 0
4059 && where_pad
!= none
&& where_pad
!= stack_direction
)
4060 anti_adjust_stack (GEN_INT (extra
));
4062 #ifdef PUSH_ROUNDING
4063 if (args_addr
== 0 && PUSH_ARGS
)
4064 emit_single_push_insn (mode
, x
, type
);
4068 if (CONST_INT_P (args_so_far
))
4070 = memory_address (mode
,
4071 plus_constant (args_addr
,
4072 INTVAL (args_so_far
)));
4074 addr
= memory_address (mode
, gen_rtx_PLUS (Pmode
, args_addr
,
4076 dest
= gen_rtx_MEM (mode
, addr
);
4078 /* We do *not* set_mem_attributes here, because incoming arguments
4079 may overlap with sibling call outgoing arguments and we cannot
4080 allow reordering of reads from function arguments with stores
4081 to outgoing arguments of sibling calls. We do, however, want
4082 to record the alignment of the stack slot. */
4083 /* ALIGN may well be better aligned than TYPE, e.g. due to
4084 PARM_BOUNDARY. Assume the caller isn't lying. */
4085 set_mem_align (dest
, align
);
4087 emit_move_insn (dest
, x
);
4091 /* If part should go in registers, copy that part
4092 into the appropriate registers. Do this now, at the end,
4093 since mem-to-mem copies above may do function calls. */
4094 if (partial
> 0 && reg
!= 0)
4096 /* Handle calls that pass values in multiple non-contiguous locations.
4097 The Irix 6 ABI has examples of this. */
4098 if (GET_CODE (reg
) == PARALLEL
)
4099 emit_group_load (reg
, x
, type
, -1);
4102 gcc_assert (partial
% UNITS_PER_WORD
== 0);
4103 move_block_to_reg (REGNO (reg
), x
, partial
/ UNITS_PER_WORD
, mode
);
4107 if (extra
&& args_addr
== 0 && where_pad
== stack_direction
)
4108 anti_adjust_stack (GEN_INT (extra
));
4110 if (alignment_pad
&& args_addr
== 0)
4111 anti_adjust_stack (alignment_pad
);
4114 /* Return X if X can be used as a subtarget in a sequence of arithmetic
4118 get_subtarget (rtx x
)
4122 /* Only registers can be subtargets. */
4124 /* Don't use hard regs to avoid extending their life. */
4125 || REGNO (x
) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
4129 /* A subroutine of expand_assignment. Optimize FIELD op= VAL, where
4130 FIELD is a bitfield. Returns true if the optimization was successful,
4131 and there's nothing else to do. */
4134 optimize_bitfield_assignment_op (unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT bitsize
,
4135 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT bitpos
,
4136 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT bitregion_start
,
4137 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT bitregion_end
,
4138 enum machine_mode mode1
, rtx str_rtx
,
4141 enum machine_mode str_mode
= GET_MODE (str_rtx
);
4142 unsigned int str_bitsize
= GET_MODE_BITSIZE (str_mode
);
4147 enum tree_code code
;
4149 if (mode1
!= VOIDmode
4150 || bitsize
>= BITS_PER_WORD
4151 || str_bitsize
> BITS_PER_WORD
4152 || TREE_SIDE_EFFECTS (to
)
4153 || TREE_THIS_VOLATILE (to
))
4157 if (TREE_CODE (src
) != SSA_NAME
)
4159 if (TREE_CODE (TREE_TYPE (src
)) != INTEGER_TYPE
)
4162 srcstmt
= get_gimple_for_ssa_name (src
);
4164 || TREE_CODE_CLASS (gimple_assign_rhs_code (srcstmt
)) != tcc_binary
)
4167 code
= gimple_assign_rhs_code (srcstmt
);
4169 op0
= gimple_assign_rhs1 (srcstmt
);
4171 /* If OP0 is an SSA_NAME, then we want to walk the use-def chain
4172 to find its initialization. Hopefully the initialization will
4173 be from a bitfield load. */
4174 if (TREE_CODE (op0
) == SSA_NAME
)
4176 gimple op0stmt
= get_gimple_for_ssa_name (op0
);
4178 /* We want to eventually have OP0 be the same as TO, which
4179 should be a bitfield. */
4181 || !is_gimple_assign (op0stmt
)
4182 || gimple_assign_rhs_code (op0stmt
) != TREE_CODE (to
))
4184 op0
= gimple_assign_rhs1 (op0stmt
);
4187 op1
= gimple_assign_rhs2 (srcstmt
);
4189 if (!operand_equal_p (to
, op0
, 0))
4192 if (MEM_P (str_rtx
))
4194 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT offset1
;
4196 if (str_bitsize
== 0 || str_bitsize
> BITS_PER_WORD
)
4197 str_mode
= word_mode
;
4198 str_mode
= get_best_mode (bitsize
, bitpos
,
4199 bitregion_start
, bitregion_end
,
4200 MEM_ALIGN (str_rtx
), str_mode
, 0);
4201 if (str_mode
== VOIDmode
)
4203 str_bitsize
= GET_MODE_BITSIZE (str_mode
);
4206 bitpos
%= str_bitsize
;
4207 offset1
= (offset1
- bitpos
) / BITS_PER_UNIT
;
4208 str_rtx
= adjust_address (str_rtx
, str_mode
, offset1
);
4210 else if (!REG_P (str_rtx
) && GET_CODE (str_rtx
) != SUBREG
)
4213 /* If the bit field covers the whole REG/MEM, store_field
4214 will likely generate better code. */
4215 if (bitsize
>= str_bitsize
)
4218 /* We can't handle fields split across multiple entities. */
4219 if (bitpos
+ bitsize
> str_bitsize
)
4222 if (BYTES_BIG_ENDIAN
)
4223 bitpos
= str_bitsize
- bitpos
- bitsize
;
4229 /* For now, just optimize the case of the topmost bitfield
4230 where we don't need to do any masking and also
4231 1 bit bitfields where xor can be used.
4232 We might win by one instruction for the other bitfields
4233 too if insv/extv instructions aren't used, so that
4234 can be added later. */
4235 if (bitpos
+ bitsize
!= str_bitsize
4236 && (bitsize
!= 1 || TREE_CODE (op1
) != INTEGER_CST
))
4239 value
= expand_expr (op1
, NULL_RTX
, str_mode
, EXPAND_NORMAL
);
4240 value
= convert_modes (str_mode
,
4241 TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (op1
)), value
,
4242 TYPE_UNSIGNED (TREE_TYPE (op1
)));
4244 /* We may be accessing data outside the field, which means
4245 we can alias adjacent data. */
4246 if (MEM_P (str_rtx
))
4248 str_rtx
= shallow_copy_rtx (str_rtx
);
4249 set_mem_alias_set (str_rtx
, 0);
4250 set_mem_expr (str_rtx
, 0);
4253 binop
= code
== PLUS_EXPR
? add_optab
: sub_optab
;
4254 if (bitsize
== 1 && bitpos
+ bitsize
!= str_bitsize
)
4256 value
= expand_and (str_mode
, value
, const1_rtx
, NULL
);
4259 value
= expand_shift (LSHIFT_EXPR
, str_mode
, value
,
4260 bitpos
, NULL_RTX
, 1);
4261 result
= expand_binop (str_mode
, binop
, str_rtx
,
4262 value
, str_rtx
, 1, OPTAB_WIDEN
);
4263 if (result
!= str_rtx
)
4264 emit_move_insn (str_rtx
, result
);
4269 if (TREE_CODE (op1
) != INTEGER_CST
)
4271 value
= expand_expr (op1
, NULL_RTX
, GET_MODE (str_rtx
), EXPAND_NORMAL
);
4272 value
= convert_modes (GET_MODE (str_rtx
),
4273 TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (op1
)), value
,
4274 TYPE_UNSIGNED (TREE_TYPE (op1
)));
4276 /* We may be accessing data outside the field, which means
4277 we can alias adjacent data. */
4278 if (MEM_P (str_rtx
))
4280 str_rtx
= shallow_copy_rtx (str_rtx
);
4281 set_mem_alias_set (str_rtx
, 0);
4282 set_mem_expr (str_rtx
, 0);
4285 binop
= code
== BIT_IOR_EXPR
? ior_optab
: xor_optab
;
4286 if (bitpos
+ bitsize
!= GET_MODE_BITSIZE (GET_MODE (str_rtx
)))
4288 rtx mask
= GEN_INT (((unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT
) 1 << bitsize
)
4290 value
= expand_and (GET_MODE (str_rtx
), value
, mask
,
4293 value
= expand_shift (LSHIFT_EXPR
, GET_MODE (str_rtx
), value
,
4294 bitpos
, NULL_RTX
, 1);
4295 result
= expand_binop (GET_MODE (str_rtx
), binop
, str_rtx
,
4296 value
, str_rtx
, 1, OPTAB_WIDEN
);
4297 if (result
!= str_rtx
)
4298 emit_move_insn (str_rtx
, result
);
4308 /* In the C++ memory model, consecutive bit fields in a structure are
4309 considered one memory location.
4311 Given a COMPONENT_REF, this function returns the bit range of
4312 consecutive bits in which this COMPONENT_REF belongs in. The
4313 values are returned in *BITSTART and *BITEND. If either the C++
4314 memory model is not activated, or this memory access is not thread
4315 visible, 0 is returned in *BITSTART and *BITEND.
4317 EXP is the COMPONENT_REF.
4318 INNERDECL is the actual object being referenced.
4319 BITPOS is the position in bits where the bit starts within the structure.
4320 BITSIZE is size in bits of the field being referenced in EXP.
4322 For example, while storing into FOO.A here...
4333 ...we are not allowed to store past <b>, so for the layout above, a
4334 range of 0..7 (because no one cares if we store into the
4338 get_bit_range (unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT
*bitstart
,
4339 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT
*bitend
,
4340 tree exp
, tree innerdecl
,
4341 HOST_WIDE_INT bitpos
, HOST_WIDE_INT bitsize
)
4343 tree field
, record_type
, fld
;
4344 bool found_field
= false;
4345 bool prev_field_is_bitfield
;
4347 gcc_assert (TREE_CODE (exp
) == COMPONENT_REF
);
4349 /* If other threads can't see this value, no need to restrict stores. */
4350 if (ALLOW_STORE_DATA_RACES
4351 || ((TREE_CODE (innerdecl
) == MEM_REF
4352 || TREE_CODE (innerdecl
) == TARGET_MEM_REF
)
4353 && !ptr_deref_may_alias_global_p (TREE_OPERAND (innerdecl
, 0)))
4354 || (DECL_P (innerdecl
)
4355 && (DECL_THREAD_LOCAL_P (innerdecl
)
4356 || !TREE_STATIC (innerdecl
))))
4358 *bitstart
= *bitend
= 0;
4362 /* Bit field we're storing into. */
4363 field
= TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 1);
4364 record_type
= DECL_FIELD_CONTEXT (field
);
4366 /* Count the contiguous bitfields for the memory location that
4369 prev_field_is_bitfield
= true;
4370 for (fld
= TYPE_FIELDS (record_type
); fld
; fld
= DECL_CHAIN (fld
))
4373 enum machine_mode mode
;
4374 int unsignedp
, volatilep
;
4376 if (TREE_CODE (fld
) != FIELD_DECL
)
4379 t
= build3 (COMPONENT_REF
, TREE_TYPE (exp
),
4380 unshare_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0)),
4382 get_inner_reference (t
, &bitsize
, &bitpos
, &offset
,
4383 &mode
, &unsignedp
, &volatilep
, true);
4388 if (DECL_BIT_FIELD_TYPE (fld
) && bitsize
> 0)
4390 if (prev_field_is_bitfield
== false)
4393 prev_field_is_bitfield
= true;
4398 prev_field_is_bitfield
= false;
4403 gcc_assert (found_field
);
4407 /* We found the end of the bit field sequence. Include the
4408 padding up to the next field and be done. */
4409 *bitend
= bitpos
- 1;
4413 /* If this is the last element in the structure, include the padding
4414 at the end of structure. */
4415 *bitend
= TREE_INT_CST_LOW (TYPE_SIZE (record_type
)) - 1;
4419 /* Expand an assignment that stores the value of FROM into TO. If NONTEMPORAL
4420 is true, try generating a nontemporal store. */
4423 expand_assignment (tree to
, tree from
, bool nontemporal
)
4427 enum machine_mode mode
;
4429 enum insn_code icode
;
4431 /* Don't crash if the lhs of the assignment was erroneous. */
4432 if (TREE_CODE (to
) == ERROR_MARK
)
4434 expand_normal (from
);
4438 /* Optimize away no-op moves without side-effects. */
4439 if (operand_equal_p (to
, from
, 0))
4442 mode
= TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (to
));
4443 if ((TREE_CODE (to
) == MEM_REF
4444 || TREE_CODE (to
) == TARGET_MEM_REF
)
4446 && ((align
= MAX (TYPE_ALIGN (TREE_TYPE (to
)), get_object_alignment (to
)))
4447 < (signed) GET_MODE_ALIGNMENT (mode
))
4448 && ((icode
= optab_handler (movmisalign_optab
, mode
))
4449 != CODE_FOR_nothing
))
4451 struct expand_operand ops
[2];
4452 enum machine_mode address_mode
;
4455 reg
= expand_expr (from
, NULL_RTX
, VOIDmode
, EXPAND_NORMAL
);
4456 reg
= force_not_mem (reg
);
4458 if (TREE_CODE (to
) == MEM_REF
)
4461 = TYPE_ADDR_SPACE (TREE_TYPE (TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (to
, 1))));
4462 tree base
= TREE_OPERAND (to
, 0);
4463 address_mode
= targetm
.addr_space
.address_mode (as
);
4464 op0
= expand_expr (base
, NULL_RTX
, VOIDmode
, EXPAND_NORMAL
);
4465 op0
= convert_memory_address_addr_space (address_mode
, op0
, as
);
4466 if (!integer_zerop (TREE_OPERAND (to
, 1)))
4469 = immed_double_int_const (mem_ref_offset (to
), address_mode
);
4470 op0
= simplify_gen_binary (PLUS
, address_mode
, op0
, off
);
4472 op0
= memory_address_addr_space (mode
, op0
, as
);
4473 mem
= gen_rtx_MEM (mode
, op0
);
4474 set_mem_attributes (mem
, to
, 0);
4475 set_mem_addr_space (mem
, as
);
4477 else if (TREE_CODE (to
) == TARGET_MEM_REF
)
4479 addr_space_t as
= TYPE_ADDR_SPACE (TREE_TYPE (to
));
4480 struct mem_address addr
;
4482 get_address_description (to
, &addr
);
4483 op0
= addr_for_mem_ref (&addr
, as
, true);
4484 op0
= memory_address_addr_space (mode
, op0
, as
);
4485 mem
= gen_rtx_MEM (mode
, op0
);
4486 set_mem_attributes (mem
, to
, 0);
4487 set_mem_addr_space (mem
, as
);
4491 if (TREE_THIS_VOLATILE (to
))
4492 MEM_VOLATILE_P (mem
) = 1;
4494 create_fixed_operand (&ops
[0], mem
);
4495 create_input_operand (&ops
[1], reg
, mode
);
4496 /* The movmisalign<mode> pattern cannot fail, else the assignment would
4497 silently be omitted. */
4498 expand_insn (icode
, 2, ops
);
4502 /* Assignment of a structure component needs special treatment
4503 if the structure component's rtx is not simply a MEM.
4504 Assignment of an array element at a constant index, and assignment of
4505 an array element in an unaligned packed structure field, has the same
4507 if (handled_component_p (to
)
4508 /* ??? We only need to handle MEM_REF here if the access is not
4509 a full access of the base object. */
4510 || (TREE_CODE (to
) == MEM_REF
4511 && TREE_CODE (TREE_OPERAND (to
, 0)) == ADDR_EXPR
)
4512 || TREE_CODE (TREE_TYPE (to
)) == ARRAY_TYPE
)
4514 enum machine_mode mode1
;
4515 HOST_WIDE_INT bitsize
, bitpos
;
4516 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT bitregion_start
= 0;
4517 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT bitregion_end
= 0;
4524 tem
= get_inner_reference (to
, &bitsize
, &bitpos
, &offset
, &mode1
,
4525 &unsignedp
, &volatilep
, true);
4527 if (TREE_CODE (to
) == COMPONENT_REF
4528 && DECL_BIT_FIELD_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (to
, 1)))
4529 get_bit_range (&bitregion_start
, &bitregion_end
,
4530 to
, tem
, bitpos
, bitsize
);
4532 /* If we are going to use store_bit_field and extract_bit_field,
4533 make sure to_rtx will be safe for multiple use. */
4535 to_rtx
= expand_normal (tem
);
4537 /* If the bitfield is volatile, we want to access it in the
4538 field's mode, not the computed mode.
4539 If a MEM has VOIDmode (external with incomplete type),
4540 use BLKmode for it instead. */
4543 if (volatilep
&& flag_strict_volatile_bitfields
> 0)
4544 to_rtx
= adjust_address (to_rtx
, mode1
, 0);
4545 else if (GET_MODE (to_rtx
) == VOIDmode
)
4546 to_rtx
= adjust_address (to_rtx
, BLKmode
, 0);
4551 enum machine_mode address_mode
;
4554 if (!MEM_P (to_rtx
))
4556 /* We can get constant negative offsets into arrays with broken
4557 user code. Translate this to a trap instead of ICEing. */
4558 gcc_assert (TREE_CODE (offset
) == INTEGER_CST
);
4559 expand_builtin_trap ();
4560 to_rtx
= gen_rtx_MEM (BLKmode
, const0_rtx
);
4563 offset_rtx
= expand_expr (offset
, NULL_RTX
, VOIDmode
, EXPAND_SUM
);
4565 = targetm
.addr_space
.address_mode (MEM_ADDR_SPACE (to_rtx
));
4566 if (GET_MODE (offset_rtx
) != address_mode
)
4567 offset_rtx
= convert_to_mode (address_mode
, offset_rtx
, 0);
4569 /* A constant address in TO_RTX can have VOIDmode, we must not try
4570 to call force_reg for that case. Avoid that case. */
4572 && GET_MODE (to_rtx
) == BLKmode
4573 && GET_MODE (XEXP (to_rtx
, 0)) != VOIDmode
4575 && (bitpos
% bitsize
) == 0
4576 && (bitsize
% GET_MODE_ALIGNMENT (mode1
)) == 0
4577 && MEM_ALIGN (to_rtx
) == GET_MODE_ALIGNMENT (mode1
))
4579 to_rtx
= adjust_address (to_rtx
, mode1
, bitpos
/ BITS_PER_UNIT
);
4583 to_rtx
= offset_address (to_rtx
, offset_rtx
,
4584 highest_pow2_factor_for_target (to
,
4588 /* No action is needed if the target is not a memory and the field
4589 lies completely outside that target. This can occur if the source
4590 code contains an out-of-bounds access to a small array. */
4592 && GET_MODE (to_rtx
) != BLKmode
4593 && (unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT
) bitpos
4594 >= GET_MODE_PRECISION (GET_MODE (to_rtx
)))
4596 expand_normal (from
);
4599 /* Handle expand_expr of a complex value returning a CONCAT. */
4600 else if (GET_CODE (to_rtx
) == CONCAT
)
4602 unsigned short mode_bitsize
= GET_MODE_BITSIZE (GET_MODE (to_rtx
));
4603 if (COMPLEX_MODE_P (TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (from
)))
4605 && bitsize
== mode_bitsize
)
4606 result
= store_expr (from
, to_rtx
, false, nontemporal
);
4607 else if (bitsize
== mode_bitsize
/ 2
4608 && (bitpos
== 0 || bitpos
== mode_bitsize
/ 2))
4609 result
= store_expr (from
, XEXP (to_rtx
, bitpos
!= 0), false,
4611 else if (bitpos
+ bitsize
<= mode_bitsize
/ 2)
4612 result
= store_field (XEXP (to_rtx
, 0), bitsize
, bitpos
,
4613 bitregion_start
, bitregion_end
,
4614 mode1
, from
, TREE_TYPE (tem
),
4615 get_alias_set (to
), nontemporal
);
4616 else if (bitpos
>= mode_bitsize
/ 2)
4617 result
= store_field (XEXP (to_rtx
, 1), bitsize
,
4618 bitpos
- mode_bitsize
/ 2,
4619 bitregion_start
, bitregion_end
,
4621 TREE_TYPE (tem
), get_alias_set (to
),
4623 else if (bitpos
== 0 && bitsize
== mode_bitsize
)
4626 result
= expand_normal (from
);
4627 from_rtx
= simplify_gen_subreg (GET_MODE (to_rtx
), result
,
4628 TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (from
)), 0);
4629 emit_move_insn (XEXP (to_rtx
, 0),
4630 read_complex_part (from_rtx
, false));
4631 emit_move_insn (XEXP (to_rtx
, 1),
4632 read_complex_part (from_rtx
, true));
4636 rtx temp
= assign_stack_temp (GET_MODE (to_rtx
),
4637 GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (to_rtx
)),
4639 write_complex_part (temp
, XEXP (to_rtx
, 0), false);
4640 write_complex_part (temp
, XEXP (to_rtx
, 1), true);
4641 result
= store_field (temp
, bitsize
, bitpos
,
4642 bitregion_start
, bitregion_end
,
4644 TREE_TYPE (tem
), get_alias_set (to
),
4646 emit_move_insn (XEXP (to_rtx
, 0), read_complex_part (temp
, false));
4647 emit_move_insn (XEXP (to_rtx
, 1), read_complex_part (temp
, true));
4654 /* If the field is at offset zero, we could have been given the
4655 DECL_RTX of the parent struct. Don't munge it. */
4656 to_rtx
= shallow_copy_rtx (to_rtx
);
4658 set_mem_attributes_minus_bitpos (to_rtx
, to
, 0, bitpos
);
4660 /* Deal with volatile and readonly fields. The former is only
4661 done for MEM. Also set MEM_KEEP_ALIAS_SET_P if needed. */
4663 MEM_VOLATILE_P (to_rtx
) = 1;
4664 if (component_uses_parent_alias_set (to
))
4665 MEM_KEEP_ALIAS_SET_P (to_rtx
) = 1;
4668 if (optimize_bitfield_assignment_op (bitsize
, bitpos
,
4669 bitregion_start
, bitregion_end
,
4674 result
= store_field (to_rtx
, bitsize
, bitpos
,
4675 bitregion_start
, bitregion_end
,
4677 TREE_TYPE (tem
), get_alias_set (to
),
4682 preserve_temp_slots (result
);
4688 /* If the rhs is a function call and its value is not an aggregate,
4689 call the function before we start to compute the lhs.
4690 This is needed for correct code for cases such as
4691 val = setjmp (buf) on machines where reference to val
4692 requires loading up part of an address in a separate insn.
4694 Don't do this if TO is a VAR_DECL or PARM_DECL whose DECL_RTL is REG
4695 since it might be a promoted variable where the zero- or sign- extension
4696 needs to be done. Handling this in the normal way is safe because no
4697 computation is done before the call. The same is true for SSA names. */
4698 if (TREE_CODE (from
) == CALL_EXPR
&& ! aggregate_value_p (from
, from
)
4699 && COMPLETE_TYPE_P (TREE_TYPE (from
))
4700 && TREE_CODE (TYPE_SIZE (TREE_TYPE (from
))) == INTEGER_CST
4701 && ! (((TREE_CODE (to
) == VAR_DECL
|| TREE_CODE (to
) == PARM_DECL
)
4702 && REG_P (DECL_RTL (to
)))
4703 || TREE_CODE (to
) == SSA_NAME
))
4708 value
= expand_normal (from
);
4710 to_rtx
= expand_expr (to
, NULL_RTX
, VOIDmode
, EXPAND_WRITE
);
4712 /* Handle calls that return values in multiple non-contiguous locations.
4713 The Irix 6 ABI has examples of this. */
4714 if (GET_CODE (to_rtx
) == PARALLEL
)
4715 emit_group_load (to_rtx
, value
, TREE_TYPE (from
),
4716 int_size_in_bytes (TREE_TYPE (from
)));
4717 else if (GET_MODE (to_rtx
) == BLKmode
)
4718 emit_block_move (to_rtx
, value
, expr_size (from
), BLOCK_OP_NORMAL
);
4721 if (POINTER_TYPE_P (TREE_TYPE (to
)))
4722 value
= convert_memory_address_addr_space
4723 (GET_MODE (to_rtx
), value
,
4724 TYPE_ADDR_SPACE (TREE_TYPE (TREE_TYPE (to
))));
4726 emit_move_insn (to_rtx
, value
);
4728 preserve_temp_slots (to_rtx
);
4734 /* Ordinary treatment. Expand TO to get a REG or MEM rtx.
4735 Don't re-expand if it was expanded already (in COMPONENT_REF case). */
4738 to_rtx
= expand_expr (to
, NULL_RTX
, VOIDmode
, EXPAND_WRITE
);
4740 /* Don't move directly into a return register. */
4741 if (TREE_CODE (to
) == RESULT_DECL
4742 && (REG_P (to_rtx
) || GET_CODE (to_rtx
) == PARALLEL
))
4747 temp
= expand_expr (from
, NULL_RTX
, GET_MODE (to_rtx
), EXPAND_NORMAL
);
4749 if (GET_CODE (to_rtx
) == PARALLEL
)
4750 emit_group_load (to_rtx
, temp
, TREE_TYPE (from
),
4751 int_size_in_bytes (TREE_TYPE (from
)));
4753 emit_move_insn (to_rtx
, temp
);
4755 preserve_temp_slots (to_rtx
);
4761 /* In case we are returning the contents of an object which overlaps
4762 the place the value is being stored, use a safe function when copying
4763 a value through a pointer into a structure value return block. */
4764 if (TREE_CODE (to
) == RESULT_DECL
4765 && TREE_CODE (from
) == INDIRECT_REF
4766 && ADDR_SPACE_GENERIC_P
4767 (TYPE_ADDR_SPACE (TREE_TYPE (TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (from
, 0)))))
4768 && refs_may_alias_p (to
, from
)
4769 && cfun
->returns_struct
4770 && !cfun
->returns_pcc_struct
)
4775 size
= expr_size (from
);
4776 from_rtx
= expand_normal (from
);
4778 emit_library_call (memmove_libfunc
, LCT_NORMAL
,
4779 VOIDmode
, 3, XEXP (to_rtx
, 0), Pmode
,
4780 XEXP (from_rtx
, 0), Pmode
,
4781 convert_to_mode (TYPE_MODE (sizetype
),
4782 size
, TYPE_UNSIGNED (sizetype
)),
4783 TYPE_MODE (sizetype
));
4785 preserve_temp_slots (to_rtx
);
4791 /* Compute FROM and store the value in the rtx we got. */
4794 result
= store_expr (from
, to_rtx
, 0, nontemporal
);
4795 preserve_temp_slots (result
);
4801 /* Emits nontemporal store insn that moves FROM to TO. Returns true if this
4802 succeeded, false otherwise. */
4805 emit_storent_insn (rtx to
, rtx from
)
4807 struct expand_operand ops
[2];
4808 enum machine_mode mode
= GET_MODE (to
);
4809 enum insn_code code
= optab_handler (storent_optab
, mode
);
4811 if (code
== CODE_FOR_nothing
)
4814 create_fixed_operand (&ops
[0], to
);
4815 create_input_operand (&ops
[1], from
, mode
);
4816 return maybe_expand_insn (code
, 2, ops
);
4819 /* Generate code for computing expression EXP,
4820 and storing the value into TARGET.
4822 If the mode is BLKmode then we may return TARGET itself.
4823 It turns out that in BLKmode it doesn't cause a problem.
4824 because C has no operators that could combine two different
4825 assignments into the same BLKmode object with different values
4826 with no sequence point. Will other languages need this to
4829 If CALL_PARAM_P is nonzero, this is a store into a call param on the
4830 stack, and block moves may need to be treated specially.
4832 If NONTEMPORAL is true, try using a nontemporal store instruction. */
4835 store_expr (tree exp
, rtx target
, int call_param_p
, bool nontemporal
)
4838 rtx alt_rtl
= NULL_RTX
;
4839 location_t loc
= EXPR_LOCATION (exp
);
4841 if (VOID_TYPE_P (TREE_TYPE (exp
)))
4843 /* C++ can generate ?: expressions with a throw expression in one
4844 branch and an rvalue in the other. Here, we resolve attempts to
4845 store the throw expression's nonexistent result. */
4846 gcc_assert (!call_param_p
);
4847 expand_expr (exp
, const0_rtx
, VOIDmode
, EXPAND_NORMAL
);
4850 if (TREE_CODE (exp
) == COMPOUND_EXPR
)
4852 /* Perform first part of compound expression, then assign from second
4854 expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0), const0_rtx
, VOIDmode
,
4855 call_param_p
? EXPAND_STACK_PARM
: EXPAND_NORMAL
);
4856 return store_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 1), target
, call_param_p
,
4859 else if (TREE_CODE (exp
) == COND_EXPR
&& GET_MODE (target
) == BLKmode
)
4861 /* For conditional expression, get safe form of the target. Then
4862 test the condition, doing the appropriate assignment on either
4863 side. This avoids the creation of unnecessary temporaries.
4864 For non-BLKmode, it is more efficient not to do this. */
4866 rtx lab1
= gen_label_rtx (), lab2
= gen_label_rtx ();
4868 do_pending_stack_adjust ();
4870 jumpifnot (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0), lab1
, -1);
4871 store_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 1), target
, call_param_p
,
4873 emit_jump_insn (gen_jump (lab2
));
4876 store_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 2), target
, call_param_p
,
4883 else if (GET_CODE (target
) == SUBREG
&& SUBREG_PROMOTED_VAR_P (target
))
4884 /* If this is a scalar in a register that is stored in a wider mode
4885 than the declared mode, compute the result into its declared mode
4886 and then convert to the wider mode. Our value is the computed
4889 rtx inner_target
= 0;
4891 /* We can do the conversion inside EXP, which will often result
4892 in some optimizations. Do the conversion in two steps: first
4893 change the signedness, if needed, then the extend. But don't
4894 do this if the type of EXP is a subtype of something else
4895 since then the conversion might involve more than just
4896 converting modes. */
4897 if (INTEGRAL_TYPE_P (TREE_TYPE (exp
))
4898 && TREE_TYPE (TREE_TYPE (exp
)) == 0
4899 && GET_MODE_PRECISION (GET_MODE (target
))
4900 == TYPE_PRECISION (TREE_TYPE (exp
)))
4902 if (TYPE_UNSIGNED (TREE_TYPE (exp
))
4903 != SUBREG_PROMOTED_UNSIGNED_P (target
))
4905 /* Some types, e.g. Fortran's logical*4, won't have a signed
4906 version, so use the mode instead. */
4908 = (signed_or_unsigned_type_for
4909 (SUBREG_PROMOTED_UNSIGNED_P (target
), TREE_TYPE (exp
)));
4911 ntype
= lang_hooks
.types
.type_for_mode
4912 (TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (exp
)),
4913 SUBREG_PROMOTED_UNSIGNED_P (target
));
4915 exp
= fold_convert_loc (loc
, ntype
, exp
);
4918 exp
= fold_convert_loc (loc
, lang_hooks
.types
.type_for_mode
4919 (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (target
)),
4920 SUBREG_PROMOTED_UNSIGNED_P (target
)),
4923 inner_target
= SUBREG_REG (target
);
4926 temp
= expand_expr (exp
, inner_target
, VOIDmode
,
4927 call_param_p
? EXPAND_STACK_PARM
: EXPAND_NORMAL
);
4929 /* If TEMP is a VOIDmode constant, use convert_modes to make
4930 sure that we properly convert it. */
4931 if (CONSTANT_P (temp
) && GET_MODE (temp
) == VOIDmode
)
4933 temp
= convert_modes (GET_MODE (target
), TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (exp
)),
4934 temp
, SUBREG_PROMOTED_UNSIGNED_P (target
));
4935 temp
= convert_modes (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (target
)),
4936 GET_MODE (target
), temp
,
4937 SUBREG_PROMOTED_UNSIGNED_P (target
));
4940 convert_move (SUBREG_REG (target
), temp
,
4941 SUBREG_PROMOTED_UNSIGNED_P (target
));
4945 else if ((TREE_CODE (exp
) == STRING_CST
4946 || (TREE_CODE (exp
) == MEM_REF
4947 && TREE_CODE (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0)) == ADDR_EXPR
4948 && TREE_CODE (TREE_OPERAND (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0), 0))
4950 && integer_zerop (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 1))))
4951 && !nontemporal
&& !call_param_p
4954 /* Optimize initialization of an array with a STRING_CST. */
4955 HOST_WIDE_INT exp_len
, str_copy_len
;
4957 tree str
= TREE_CODE (exp
) == STRING_CST
4958 ? exp
: TREE_OPERAND (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0), 0);
4960 exp_len
= int_expr_size (exp
);
4964 if (TREE_STRING_LENGTH (str
) <= 0)
4967 str_copy_len
= strlen (TREE_STRING_POINTER (str
));
4968 if (str_copy_len
< TREE_STRING_LENGTH (str
) - 1)
4971 str_copy_len
= TREE_STRING_LENGTH (str
);
4972 if ((STORE_MAX_PIECES
& (STORE_MAX_PIECES
- 1)) == 0
4973 && TREE_STRING_POINTER (str
)[TREE_STRING_LENGTH (str
) - 1] == '\0')
4975 str_copy_len
+= STORE_MAX_PIECES
- 1;
4976 str_copy_len
&= ~(STORE_MAX_PIECES
- 1);
4978 str_copy_len
= MIN (str_copy_len
, exp_len
);
4979 if (!can_store_by_pieces (str_copy_len
, builtin_strncpy_read_str
,
4980 CONST_CAST (char *, TREE_STRING_POINTER (str
)),
4981 MEM_ALIGN (target
), false))
4986 dest_mem
= store_by_pieces (dest_mem
,
4987 str_copy_len
, builtin_strncpy_read_str
,
4989 TREE_STRING_POINTER (str
)),
4990 MEM_ALIGN (target
), false,
4991 exp_len
> str_copy_len
? 1 : 0);
4992 if (exp_len
> str_copy_len
)
4993 clear_storage (adjust_address (dest_mem
, BLKmode
, 0),
4994 GEN_INT (exp_len
- str_copy_len
),
5003 /* If we want to use a nontemporal store, force the value to
5005 tmp_target
= nontemporal
? NULL_RTX
: target
;
5006 temp
= expand_expr_real (exp
, tmp_target
, GET_MODE (target
),
5008 ? EXPAND_STACK_PARM
: EXPAND_NORMAL
),
5012 /* If TEMP is a VOIDmode constant and the mode of the type of EXP is not
5013 the same as that of TARGET, adjust the constant. This is needed, for
5014 example, in case it is a CONST_DOUBLE and we want only a word-sized
5016 if (CONSTANT_P (temp
) && GET_MODE (temp
) == VOIDmode
5017 && TREE_CODE (exp
) != ERROR_MARK
5018 && GET_MODE (target
) != TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (exp
)))
5019 temp
= convert_modes (GET_MODE (target
), TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (exp
)),
5020 temp
, TYPE_UNSIGNED (TREE_TYPE (exp
)));
5022 /* If value was not generated in the target, store it there.
5023 Convert the value to TARGET's type first if necessary and emit the
5024 pending incrementations that have been queued when expanding EXP.
5025 Note that we cannot emit the whole queue blindly because this will
5026 effectively disable the POST_INC optimization later.
5028 If TEMP and TARGET compare equal according to rtx_equal_p, but
5029 one or both of them are volatile memory refs, we have to distinguish
5031 - expand_expr has used TARGET. In this case, we must not generate
5032 another copy. This can be detected by TARGET being equal according
5034 - expand_expr has not used TARGET - that means that the source just
5035 happens to have the same RTX form. Since temp will have been created
5036 by expand_expr, it will compare unequal according to == .
5037 We must generate a copy in this case, to reach the correct number
5038 of volatile memory references. */
5040 if ((! rtx_equal_p (temp
, target
)
5041 || (temp
!= target
&& (side_effects_p (temp
)
5042 || side_effects_p (target
))))
5043 && TREE_CODE (exp
) != ERROR_MARK
5044 /* If store_expr stores a DECL whose DECL_RTL(exp) == TARGET,
5045 but TARGET is not valid memory reference, TEMP will differ
5046 from TARGET although it is really the same location. */
5048 && rtx_equal_p (alt_rtl
, target
)
5049 && !side_effects_p (alt_rtl
)
5050 && !side_effects_p (target
))
5051 /* If there's nothing to copy, don't bother. Don't call
5052 expr_size unless necessary, because some front-ends (C++)
5053 expr_size-hook must not be given objects that are not
5054 supposed to be bit-copied or bit-initialized. */
5055 && expr_size (exp
) != const0_rtx
)
5057 if (GET_MODE (temp
) != GET_MODE (target
)
5058 && GET_MODE (temp
) != VOIDmode
)
5060 int unsignedp
= TYPE_UNSIGNED (TREE_TYPE (exp
));
5061 if (GET_MODE (target
) == BLKmode
5062 && GET_MODE (temp
) == BLKmode
)
5063 emit_block_move (target
, temp
, expr_size (exp
),
5065 ? BLOCK_OP_CALL_PARM
5066 : BLOCK_OP_NORMAL
));
5067 else if (GET_MODE (target
) == BLKmode
)
5068 store_bit_field (target
, INTVAL (expr_size (exp
)) * BITS_PER_UNIT
,
5069 0, 0, 0, GET_MODE (temp
), temp
);
5071 convert_move (target
, temp
, unsignedp
);
5074 else if (GET_MODE (temp
) == BLKmode
&& TREE_CODE (exp
) == STRING_CST
)
5076 /* Handle copying a string constant into an array. The string
5077 constant may be shorter than the array. So copy just the string's
5078 actual length, and clear the rest. First get the size of the data
5079 type of the string, which is actually the size of the target. */
5080 rtx size
= expr_size (exp
);
5082 if (CONST_INT_P (size
)
5083 && INTVAL (size
) < TREE_STRING_LENGTH (exp
))
5084 emit_block_move (target
, temp
, size
,
5086 ? BLOCK_OP_CALL_PARM
: BLOCK_OP_NORMAL
));
5089 enum machine_mode pointer_mode
5090 = targetm
.addr_space
.pointer_mode (MEM_ADDR_SPACE (target
));
5091 enum machine_mode address_mode
5092 = targetm
.addr_space
.address_mode (MEM_ADDR_SPACE (target
));
5094 /* Compute the size of the data to copy from the string. */
5096 = size_binop_loc (loc
, MIN_EXPR
,
5097 make_tree (sizetype
, size
),
5098 size_int (TREE_STRING_LENGTH (exp
)));
5100 = expand_expr (copy_size
, NULL_RTX
, VOIDmode
,
5102 ? EXPAND_STACK_PARM
: EXPAND_NORMAL
));
5105 /* Copy that much. */
5106 copy_size_rtx
= convert_to_mode (pointer_mode
, copy_size_rtx
,
5107 TYPE_UNSIGNED (sizetype
));
5108 emit_block_move (target
, temp
, copy_size_rtx
,
5110 ? BLOCK_OP_CALL_PARM
: BLOCK_OP_NORMAL
));
5112 /* Figure out how much is left in TARGET that we have to clear.
5113 Do all calculations in pointer_mode. */
5114 if (CONST_INT_P (copy_size_rtx
))
5116 size
= plus_constant (size
, -INTVAL (copy_size_rtx
));
5117 target
= adjust_address (target
, BLKmode
,
5118 INTVAL (copy_size_rtx
));
5122 size
= expand_binop (TYPE_MODE (sizetype
), sub_optab
, size
,
5123 copy_size_rtx
, NULL_RTX
, 0,
5126 if (GET_MODE (copy_size_rtx
) != address_mode
)
5127 copy_size_rtx
= convert_to_mode (address_mode
,
5129 TYPE_UNSIGNED (sizetype
));
5131 target
= offset_address (target
, copy_size_rtx
,
5132 highest_pow2_factor (copy_size
));
5133 label
= gen_label_rtx ();
5134 emit_cmp_and_jump_insns (size
, const0_rtx
, LT
, NULL_RTX
,
5135 GET_MODE (size
), 0, label
);
5138 if (size
!= const0_rtx
)
5139 clear_storage (target
, size
, BLOCK_OP_NORMAL
);
5145 /* Handle calls that return values in multiple non-contiguous locations.
5146 The Irix 6 ABI has examples of this. */
5147 else if (GET_CODE (target
) == PARALLEL
)
5148 emit_group_load (target
, temp
, TREE_TYPE (exp
),
5149 int_size_in_bytes (TREE_TYPE (exp
)));
5150 else if (GET_MODE (temp
) == BLKmode
)
5151 emit_block_move (target
, temp
, expr_size (exp
),
5153 ? BLOCK_OP_CALL_PARM
: BLOCK_OP_NORMAL
));
5154 else if (nontemporal
5155 && emit_storent_insn (target
, temp
))
5156 /* If we managed to emit a nontemporal store, there is nothing else to
5161 temp
= force_operand (temp
, target
);
5163 emit_move_insn (target
, temp
);
5170 /* Return true if field F of structure TYPE is a flexible array. */
5173 flexible_array_member_p (const_tree f
, const_tree type
)
5178 return (DECL_CHAIN (f
) == NULL
5179 && TREE_CODE (tf
) == ARRAY_TYPE
5181 && TYPE_MIN_VALUE (TYPE_DOMAIN (tf
))
5182 && integer_zerop (TYPE_MIN_VALUE (TYPE_DOMAIN (tf
)))
5183 && !TYPE_MAX_VALUE (TYPE_DOMAIN (tf
))
5184 && int_size_in_bytes (type
) >= 0);
5187 /* If FOR_CTOR_P, return the number of top-level elements that a constructor
5188 must have in order for it to completely initialize a value of type TYPE.
5189 Return -1 if the number isn't known.
5191 If !FOR_CTOR_P, return an estimate of the number of scalars in TYPE. */
5193 static HOST_WIDE_INT
5194 count_type_elements (const_tree type
, bool for_ctor_p
)
5196 switch (TREE_CODE (type
))
5202 nelts
= array_type_nelts (type
);
5203 if (nelts
&& host_integerp (nelts
, 1))
5205 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT n
;
5207 n
= tree_low_cst (nelts
, 1) + 1;
5208 if (n
== 0 || for_ctor_p
)
5211 return n
* count_type_elements (TREE_TYPE (type
), false);
5213 return for_ctor_p
? -1 : 1;
5218 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT n
;
5222 for (f
= TYPE_FIELDS (type
); f
; f
= DECL_CHAIN (f
))
5223 if (TREE_CODE (f
) == FIELD_DECL
)
5226 n
+= count_type_elements (TREE_TYPE (f
), false);
5227 else if (!flexible_array_member_p (f
, type
))
5228 /* Don't count flexible arrays, which are not supposed
5229 to be initialized. */
5237 case QUAL_UNION_TYPE
:
5242 gcc_assert (!for_ctor_p
);
5243 /* Estimate the number of scalars in each field and pick the
5244 maximum. Other estimates would do instead; the idea is simply
5245 to make sure that the estimate is not sensitive to the ordering
5248 for (f
= TYPE_FIELDS (type
); f
; f
= DECL_CHAIN (f
))
5249 if (TREE_CODE (f
) == FIELD_DECL
)
5251 m
= count_type_elements (TREE_TYPE (f
), false);
5252 /* If the field doesn't span the whole union, add an extra
5253 scalar for the rest. */
5254 if (simple_cst_equal (TYPE_SIZE (TREE_TYPE (f
)),
5255 TYPE_SIZE (type
)) != 1)
5267 return TYPE_VECTOR_SUBPARTS (type
);
5271 case FIXED_POINT_TYPE
:
5276 case REFERENCE_TYPE
:
5291 /* Helper for categorize_ctor_elements. Identical interface. */
5294 categorize_ctor_elements_1 (const_tree ctor
, HOST_WIDE_INT
*p_nz_elts
,
5295 HOST_WIDE_INT
*p_init_elts
, bool *p_complete
)
5297 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT idx
;
5298 HOST_WIDE_INT nz_elts
, init_elts
, num_fields
;
5299 tree value
, purpose
, elt_type
;
5301 /* Whether CTOR is a valid constant initializer, in accordance with what
5302 initializer_constant_valid_p does. If inferred from the constructor
5303 elements, true until proven otherwise. */
5304 bool const_from_elts_p
= constructor_static_from_elts_p (ctor
);
5305 bool const_p
= const_from_elts_p
? true : TREE_STATIC (ctor
);
5310 elt_type
= NULL_TREE
;
5312 FOR_EACH_CONSTRUCTOR_ELT (CONSTRUCTOR_ELTS (ctor
), idx
, purpose
, value
)
5314 HOST_WIDE_INT mult
= 1;
5316 if (TREE_CODE (purpose
) == RANGE_EXPR
)
5318 tree lo_index
= TREE_OPERAND (purpose
, 0);
5319 tree hi_index
= TREE_OPERAND (purpose
, 1);
5321 if (host_integerp (lo_index
, 1) && host_integerp (hi_index
, 1))
5322 mult
= (tree_low_cst (hi_index
, 1)
5323 - tree_low_cst (lo_index
, 1) + 1);
5326 elt_type
= TREE_TYPE (value
);
5328 switch (TREE_CODE (value
))
5332 HOST_WIDE_INT nz
= 0, ic
= 0;
5334 bool const_elt_p
= categorize_ctor_elements_1 (value
, &nz
, &ic
,
5337 nz_elts
+= mult
* nz
;
5338 init_elts
+= mult
* ic
;
5340 if (const_from_elts_p
&& const_p
)
5341 const_p
= const_elt_p
;
5348 if (!initializer_zerop (value
))
5354 nz_elts
+= mult
* TREE_STRING_LENGTH (value
);
5355 init_elts
+= mult
* TREE_STRING_LENGTH (value
);
5359 if (!initializer_zerop (TREE_REALPART (value
)))
5361 if (!initializer_zerop (TREE_IMAGPART (value
)))
5369 for (v
= TREE_VECTOR_CST_ELTS (value
); v
; v
= TREE_CHAIN (v
))
5371 if (!initializer_zerop (TREE_VALUE (v
)))
5380 HOST_WIDE_INT tc
= count_type_elements (elt_type
, false);
5381 nz_elts
+= mult
* tc
;
5382 init_elts
+= mult
* tc
;
5384 if (const_from_elts_p
&& const_p
)
5385 const_p
= initializer_constant_valid_p (value
, elt_type
)
5392 if (*p_complete
&& !complete_ctor_at_level_p (TREE_TYPE (ctor
),
5393 num_fields
, elt_type
))
5394 *p_complete
= false;
5396 *p_nz_elts
+= nz_elts
;
5397 *p_init_elts
+= init_elts
;
5402 /* Examine CTOR to discover:
5403 * how many scalar fields are set to nonzero values,
5404 and place it in *P_NZ_ELTS;
5405 * how many scalar fields in total are in CTOR,
5406 and place it in *P_ELT_COUNT.
5407 * whether the constructor is complete -- in the sense that every
5408 meaningful byte is explicitly given a value --
5409 and place it in *P_COMPLETE.
5411 Return whether or not CTOR is a valid static constant initializer, the same
5412 as "initializer_constant_valid_p (CTOR, TREE_TYPE (CTOR)) != 0". */
5415 categorize_ctor_elements (const_tree ctor
, HOST_WIDE_INT
*p_nz_elts
,
5416 HOST_WIDE_INT
*p_init_elts
, bool *p_complete
)
5422 return categorize_ctor_elements_1 (ctor
, p_nz_elts
, p_init_elts
, p_complete
);
5425 /* TYPE is initialized by a constructor with NUM_ELTS elements, the last
5426 of which had type LAST_TYPE. Each element was itself a complete
5427 initializer, in the sense that every meaningful byte was explicitly
5428 given a value. Return true if the same is true for the constructor
5432 complete_ctor_at_level_p (const_tree type
, HOST_WIDE_INT num_elts
,
5433 const_tree last_type
)
5435 if (TREE_CODE (type
) == UNION_TYPE
5436 || TREE_CODE (type
) == QUAL_UNION_TYPE
)
5441 gcc_assert (num_elts
== 1 && last_type
);
5443 /* ??? We could look at each element of the union, and find the
5444 largest element. Which would avoid comparing the size of the
5445 initialized element against any tail padding in the union.
5446 Doesn't seem worth the effort... */
5447 return simple_cst_equal (TYPE_SIZE (type
), TYPE_SIZE (last_type
)) == 1;
5450 return count_type_elements (type
, true) == num_elts
;
5453 /* Return 1 if EXP contains mostly (3/4) zeros. */
5456 mostly_zeros_p (const_tree exp
)
5458 if (TREE_CODE (exp
) == CONSTRUCTOR
)
5460 HOST_WIDE_INT nz_elts
, init_elts
;
5463 categorize_ctor_elements (exp
, &nz_elts
, &init_elts
, &complete_p
);
5464 return !complete_p
|| nz_elts
< init_elts
/ 4;
5467 return initializer_zerop (exp
);
5470 /* Return 1 if EXP contains all zeros. */
5473 all_zeros_p (const_tree exp
)
5475 if (TREE_CODE (exp
) == CONSTRUCTOR
)
5477 HOST_WIDE_INT nz_elts
, init_elts
;
5480 categorize_ctor_elements (exp
, &nz_elts
, &init_elts
, &complete_p
);
5481 return nz_elts
== 0;
5484 return initializer_zerop (exp
);
5487 /* Helper function for store_constructor.
5488 TARGET, BITSIZE, BITPOS, MODE, EXP are as for store_field.
5489 TYPE is the type of the CONSTRUCTOR, not the element type.
5490 CLEARED is as for store_constructor.
5491 ALIAS_SET is the alias set to use for any stores.
5493 This provides a recursive shortcut back to store_constructor when it isn't
5494 necessary to go through store_field. This is so that we can pass through
5495 the cleared field to let store_constructor know that we may not have to
5496 clear a substructure if the outer structure has already been cleared. */
5499 store_constructor_field (rtx target
, unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT bitsize
,
5500 HOST_WIDE_INT bitpos
, enum machine_mode mode
,
5501 tree exp
, tree type
, int cleared
,
5502 alias_set_type alias_set
)
5504 if (TREE_CODE (exp
) == CONSTRUCTOR
5505 /* We can only call store_constructor recursively if the size and
5506 bit position are on a byte boundary. */
5507 && bitpos
% BITS_PER_UNIT
== 0
5508 && (bitsize
> 0 && bitsize
% BITS_PER_UNIT
== 0)
5509 /* If we have a nonzero bitpos for a register target, then we just
5510 let store_field do the bitfield handling. This is unlikely to
5511 generate unnecessary clear instructions anyways. */
5512 && (bitpos
== 0 || MEM_P (target
)))
5516 = adjust_address (target
,
5517 GET_MODE (target
) == BLKmode
5519 % GET_MODE_ALIGNMENT (GET_MODE (target
)))
5520 ? BLKmode
: VOIDmode
, bitpos
/ BITS_PER_UNIT
);
5523 /* Update the alias set, if required. */
5524 if (MEM_P (target
) && ! MEM_KEEP_ALIAS_SET_P (target
)
5525 && MEM_ALIAS_SET (target
) != 0)
5527 target
= copy_rtx (target
);
5528 set_mem_alias_set (target
, alias_set
);
5531 store_constructor (exp
, target
, cleared
, bitsize
/ BITS_PER_UNIT
);
5534 store_field (target
, bitsize
, bitpos
, 0, 0, mode
, exp
, type
, alias_set
,
5538 /* Store the value of constructor EXP into the rtx TARGET.
5539 TARGET is either a REG or a MEM; we know it cannot conflict, since
5540 safe_from_p has been called.
5541 CLEARED is true if TARGET is known to have been zero'd.
5542 SIZE is the number of bytes of TARGET we are allowed to modify: this
5543 may not be the same as the size of EXP if we are assigning to a field
5544 which has been packed to exclude padding bits. */
5547 store_constructor (tree exp
, rtx target
, int cleared
, HOST_WIDE_INT size
)
5549 tree type
= TREE_TYPE (exp
);
5550 #ifdef WORD_REGISTER_OPERATIONS
5551 HOST_WIDE_INT exp_size
= int_size_in_bytes (type
);
5554 switch (TREE_CODE (type
))
5558 case QUAL_UNION_TYPE
:
5560 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT idx
;
5563 /* If size is zero or the target is already cleared, do nothing. */
5564 if (size
== 0 || cleared
)
5566 /* We either clear the aggregate or indicate the value is dead. */
5567 else if ((TREE_CODE (type
) == UNION_TYPE
5568 || TREE_CODE (type
) == QUAL_UNION_TYPE
)
5569 && ! CONSTRUCTOR_ELTS (exp
))
5570 /* If the constructor is empty, clear the union. */
5572 clear_storage (target
, expr_size (exp
), BLOCK_OP_NORMAL
);
5576 /* If we are building a static constructor into a register,
5577 set the initial value as zero so we can fold the value into
5578 a constant. But if more than one register is involved,
5579 this probably loses. */
5580 else if (REG_P (target
) && TREE_STATIC (exp
)
5581 && GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (target
)) <= UNITS_PER_WORD
)
5583 emit_move_insn (target
, CONST0_RTX (GET_MODE (target
)));
5587 /* If the constructor has fewer fields than the structure or
5588 if we are initializing the structure to mostly zeros, clear
5589 the whole structure first. Don't do this if TARGET is a
5590 register whose mode size isn't equal to SIZE since
5591 clear_storage can't handle this case. */
5593 && (((int)VEC_length (constructor_elt
, CONSTRUCTOR_ELTS (exp
))
5594 != fields_length (type
))
5595 || mostly_zeros_p (exp
))
5597 || ((HOST_WIDE_INT
) GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (target
))
5600 clear_storage (target
, GEN_INT (size
), BLOCK_OP_NORMAL
);
5604 if (REG_P (target
) && !cleared
)
5605 emit_clobber (target
);
5607 /* Store each element of the constructor into the
5608 corresponding field of TARGET. */
5609 FOR_EACH_CONSTRUCTOR_ELT (CONSTRUCTOR_ELTS (exp
), idx
, field
, value
)
5611 enum machine_mode mode
;
5612 HOST_WIDE_INT bitsize
;
5613 HOST_WIDE_INT bitpos
= 0;
5615 rtx to_rtx
= target
;
5617 /* Just ignore missing fields. We cleared the whole
5618 structure, above, if any fields are missing. */
5622 if (cleared
&& initializer_zerop (value
))
5625 if (host_integerp (DECL_SIZE (field
), 1))
5626 bitsize
= tree_low_cst (DECL_SIZE (field
), 1);
5630 mode
= DECL_MODE (field
);
5631 if (DECL_BIT_FIELD (field
))
5634 offset
= DECL_FIELD_OFFSET (field
);
5635 if (host_integerp (offset
, 0)
5636 && host_integerp (bit_position (field
), 0))
5638 bitpos
= int_bit_position (field
);
5642 bitpos
= tree_low_cst (DECL_FIELD_BIT_OFFSET (field
), 0);
5646 enum machine_mode address_mode
;
5650 = SUBSTITUTE_PLACEHOLDER_IN_EXPR (offset
,
5651 make_tree (TREE_TYPE (exp
),
5654 offset_rtx
= expand_normal (offset
);
5655 gcc_assert (MEM_P (to_rtx
));
5658 = targetm
.addr_space
.address_mode (MEM_ADDR_SPACE (to_rtx
));
5659 if (GET_MODE (offset_rtx
) != address_mode
)
5660 offset_rtx
= convert_to_mode (address_mode
, offset_rtx
, 0);
5662 to_rtx
= offset_address (to_rtx
, offset_rtx
,
5663 highest_pow2_factor (offset
));
5666 #ifdef WORD_REGISTER_OPERATIONS
5667 /* If this initializes a field that is smaller than a
5668 word, at the start of a word, try to widen it to a full
5669 word. This special case allows us to output C++ member
5670 function initializations in a form that the optimizers
5673 && bitsize
< BITS_PER_WORD
5674 && bitpos
% BITS_PER_WORD
== 0
5675 && GET_MODE_CLASS (mode
) == MODE_INT
5676 && TREE_CODE (value
) == INTEGER_CST
5678 && bitpos
+ BITS_PER_WORD
<= exp_size
* BITS_PER_UNIT
)
5680 tree type
= TREE_TYPE (value
);
5682 if (TYPE_PRECISION (type
) < BITS_PER_WORD
)
5684 type
= lang_hooks
.types
.type_for_size
5685 (BITS_PER_WORD
, TYPE_UNSIGNED (type
));
5686 value
= fold_convert (type
, value
);
5689 if (BYTES_BIG_ENDIAN
)
5691 = fold_build2 (LSHIFT_EXPR
, type
, value
,
5692 build_int_cst (type
,
5693 BITS_PER_WORD
- bitsize
));
5694 bitsize
= BITS_PER_WORD
;
5699 if (MEM_P (to_rtx
) && !MEM_KEEP_ALIAS_SET_P (to_rtx
)
5700 && DECL_NONADDRESSABLE_P (field
))
5702 to_rtx
= copy_rtx (to_rtx
);
5703 MEM_KEEP_ALIAS_SET_P (to_rtx
) = 1;
5706 store_constructor_field (to_rtx
, bitsize
, bitpos
, mode
,
5707 value
, type
, cleared
,
5708 get_alias_set (TREE_TYPE (field
)));
5715 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT i
;
5718 tree elttype
= TREE_TYPE (type
);
5720 HOST_WIDE_INT minelt
= 0;
5721 HOST_WIDE_INT maxelt
= 0;
5723 domain
= TYPE_DOMAIN (type
);
5724 const_bounds_p
= (TYPE_MIN_VALUE (domain
)
5725 && TYPE_MAX_VALUE (domain
)
5726 && host_integerp (TYPE_MIN_VALUE (domain
), 0)
5727 && host_integerp (TYPE_MAX_VALUE (domain
), 0));
5729 /* If we have constant bounds for the range of the type, get them. */
5732 minelt
= tree_low_cst (TYPE_MIN_VALUE (domain
), 0);
5733 maxelt
= tree_low_cst (TYPE_MAX_VALUE (domain
), 0);
5736 /* If the constructor has fewer elements than the array, clear
5737 the whole array first. Similarly if this is static
5738 constructor of a non-BLKmode object. */
5741 else if (REG_P (target
) && TREE_STATIC (exp
))
5745 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT idx
;
5747 HOST_WIDE_INT count
= 0, zero_count
= 0;
5748 need_to_clear
= ! const_bounds_p
;
5750 /* This loop is a more accurate version of the loop in
5751 mostly_zeros_p (it handles RANGE_EXPR in an index). It
5752 is also needed to check for missing elements. */
5753 FOR_EACH_CONSTRUCTOR_ELT (CONSTRUCTOR_ELTS (exp
), idx
, index
, value
)
5755 HOST_WIDE_INT this_node_count
;
5760 if (index
!= NULL_TREE
&& TREE_CODE (index
) == RANGE_EXPR
)
5762 tree lo_index
= TREE_OPERAND (index
, 0);
5763 tree hi_index
= TREE_OPERAND (index
, 1);
5765 if (! host_integerp (lo_index
, 1)
5766 || ! host_integerp (hi_index
, 1))
5772 this_node_count
= (tree_low_cst (hi_index
, 1)
5773 - tree_low_cst (lo_index
, 1) + 1);
5776 this_node_count
= 1;
5778 count
+= this_node_count
;
5779 if (mostly_zeros_p (value
))
5780 zero_count
+= this_node_count
;
5783 /* Clear the entire array first if there are any missing
5784 elements, or if the incidence of zero elements is >=
5787 && (count
< maxelt
- minelt
+ 1
5788 || 4 * zero_count
>= 3 * count
))
5792 if (need_to_clear
&& size
> 0)
5795 emit_move_insn (target
, CONST0_RTX (GET_MODE (target
)));
5797 clear_storage (target
, GEN_INT (size
), BLOCK_OP_NORMAL
);
5801 if (!cleared
&& REG_P (target
))
5802 /* Inform later passes that the old value is dead. */
5803 emit_clobber (target
);
5805 /* Store each element of the constructor into the
5806 corresponding element of TARGET, determined by counting the
5808 FOR_EACH_CONSTRUCTOR_ELT (CONSTRUCTOR_ELTS (exp
), i
, index
, value
)
5810 enum machine_mode mode
;
5811 HOST_WIDE_INT bitsize
;
5812 HOST_WIDE_INT bitpos
;
5813 rtx xtarget
= target
;
5815 if (cleared
&& initializer_zerop (value
))
5818 mode
= TYPE_MODE (elttype
);
5819 if (mode
== BLKmode
)
5820 bitsize
= (host_integerp (TYPE_SIZE (elttype
), 1)
5821 ? tree_low_cst (TYPE_SIZE (elttype
), 1)
5824 bitsize
= GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode
);
5826 if (index
!= NULL_TREE
&& TREE_CODE (index
) == RANGE_EXPR
)
5828 tree lo_index
= TREE_OPERAND (index
, 0);
5829 tree hi_index
= TREE_OPERAND (index
, 1);
5830 rtx index_r
, pos_rtx
;
5831 HOST_WIDE_INT lo
, hi
, count
;
5834 /* If the range is constant and "small", unroll the loop. */
5836 && host_integerp (lo_index
, 0)
5837 && host_integerp (hi_index
, 0)
5838 && (lo
= tree_low_cst (lo_index
, 0),
5839 hi
= tree_low_cst (hi_index
, 0),
5840 count
= hi
- lo
+ 1,
5843 || (host_integerp (TYPE_SIZE (elttype
), 1)
5844 && (tree_low_cst (TYPE_SIZE (elttype
), 1) * count
5847 lo
-= minelt
; hi
-= minelt
;
5848 for (; lo
<= hi
; lo
++)
5850 bitpos
= lo
* tree_low_cst (TYPE_SIZE (elttype
), 0);
5853 && !MEM_KEEP_ALIAS_SET_P (target
)
5854 && TREE_CODE (type
) == ARRAY_TYPE
5855 && TYPE_NONALIASED_COMPONENT (type
))
5857 target
= copy_rtx (target
);
5858 MEM_KEEP_ALIAS_SET_P (target
) = 1;
5861 store_constructor_field
5862 (target
, bitsize
, bitpos
, mode
, value
, type
, cleared
,
5863 get_alias_set (elttype
));
5868 rtx loop_start
= gen_label_rtx ();
5869 rtx loop_end
= gen_label_rtx ();
5872 expand_normal (hi_index
);
5874 index
= build_decl (EXPR_LOCATION (exp
),
5875 VAR_DECL
, NULL_TREE
, domain
);
5876 index_r
= gen_reg_rtx (promote_decl_mode (index
, NULL
));
5877 SET_DECL_RTL (index
, index_r
);
5878 store_expr (lo_index
, index_r
, 0, false);
5880 /* Build the head of the loop. */
5881 do_pending_stack_adjust ();
5882 emit_label (loop_start
);
5884 /* Assign value to element index. */
5886 fold_convert (ssizetype
,
5887 fold_build2 (MINUS_EXPR
,
5890 TYPE_MIN_VALUE (domain
)));
5893 size_binop (MULT_EXPR
, position
,
5894 fold_convert (ssizetype
,
5895 TYPE_SIZE_UNIT (elttype
)));
5897 pos_rtx
= expand_normal (position
);
5898 xtarget
= offset_address (target
, pos_rtx
,
5899 highest_pow2_factor (position
));
5900 xtarget
= adjust_address (xtarget
, mode
, 0);
5901 if (TREE_CODE (value
) == CONSTRUCTOR
)
5902 store_constructor (value
, xtarget
, cleared
,
5903 bitsize
/ BITS_PER_UNIT
);
5905 store_expr (value
, xtarget
, 0, false);
5907 /* Generate a conditional jump to exit the loop. */
5908 exit_cond
= build2 (LT_EXPR
, integer_type_node
,
5910 jumpif (exit_cond
, loop_end
, -1);
5912 /* Update the loop counter, and jump to the head of
5914 expand_assignment (index
,
5915 build2 (PLUS_EXPR
, TREE_TYPE (index
),
5916 index
, integer_one_node
),
5919 emit_jump (loop_start
);
5921 /* Build the end of the loop. */
5922 emit_label (loop_end
);
5925 else if ((index
!= 0 && ! host_integerp (index
, 0))
5926 || ! host_integerp (TYPE_SIZE (elttype
), 1))
5931 index
= ssize_int (1);
5934 index
= fold_convert (ssizetype
,
5935 fold_build2 (MINUS_EXPR
,
5938 TYPE_MIN_VALUE (domain
)));
5941 size_binop (MULT_EXPR
, index
,
5942 fold_convert (ssizetype
,
5943 TYPE_SIZE_UNIT (elttype
)));
5944 xtarget
= offset_address (target
,
5945 expand_normal (position
),
5946 highest_pow2_factor (position
));
5947 xtarget
= adjust_address (xtarget
, mode
, 0);
5948 store_expr (value
, xtarget
, 0, false);
5953 bitpos
= ((tree_low_cst (index
, 0) - minelt
)
5954 * tree_low_cst (TYPE_SIZE (elttype
), 1));
5956 bitpos
= (i
* tree_low_cst (TYPE_SIZE (elttype
), 1));
5958 if (MEM_P (target
) && !MEM_KEEP_ALIAS_SET_P (target
)
5959 && TREE_CODE (type
) == ARRAY_TYPE
5960 && TYPE_NONALIASED_COMPONENT (type
))
5962 target
= copy_rtx (target
);
5963 MEM_KEEP_ALIAS_SET_P (target
) = 1;
5965 store_constructor_field (target
, bitsize
, bitpos
, mode
, value
,
5966 type
, cleared
, get_alias_set (elttype
));
5974 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT idx
;
5975 constructor_elt
*ce
;
5979 tree elttype
= TREE_TYPE (type
);
5980 int elt_size
= tree_low_cst (TYPE_SIZE (elttype
), 1);
5981 enum machine_mode eltmode
= TYPE_MODE (elttype
);
5982 HOST_WIDE_INT bitsize
;
5983 HOST_WIDE_INT bitpos
;
5984 rtvec vector
= NULL
;
5986 alias_set_type alias
;
5988 gcc_assert (eltmode
!= BLKmode
);
5990 n_elts
= TYPE_VECTOR_SUBPARTS (type
);
5991 if (REG_P (target
) && VECTOR_MODE_P (GET_MODE (target
)))
5993 enum machine_mode mode
= GET_MODE (target
);
5995 icode
= (int) optab_handler (vec_init_optab
, mode
);
5996 if (icode
!= CODE_FOR_nothing
)
6000 vector
= rtvec_alloc (n_elts
);
6001 for (i
= 0; i
< n_elts
; i
++)
6002 RTVEC_ELT (vector
, i
) = CONST0_RTX (GET_MODE_INNER (mode
));
6006 /* If the constructor has fewer elements than the vector,
6007 clear the whole array first. Similarly if this is static
6008 constructor of a non-BLKmode object. */
6011 else if (REG_P (target
) && TREE_STATIC (exp
))
6015 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT count
= 0, zero_count
= 0;
6018 FOR_EACH_CONSTRUCTOR_VALUE (CONSTRUCTOR_ELTS (exp
), idx
, value
)
6020 int n_elts_here
= tree_low_cst
6021 (int_const_binop (TRUNC_DIV_EXPR
,
6022 TYPE_SIZE (TREE_TYPE (value
)),
6023 TYPE_SIZE (elttype
)), 1);
6025 count
+= n_elts_here
;
6026 if (mostly_zeros_p (value
))
6027 zero_count
+= n_elts_here
;
6030 /* Clear the entire vector first if there are any missing elements,
6031 or if the incidence of zero elements is >= 75%. */
6032 need_to_clear
= (count
< n_elts
|| 4 * zero_count
>= 3 * count
);
6035 if (need_to_clear
&& size
> 0 && !vector
)
6038 emit_move_insn (target
, CONST0_RTX (GET_MODE (target
)));
6040 clear_storage (target
, GEN_INT (size
), BLOCK_OP_NORMAL
);
6044 /* Inform later passes that the old value is dead. */
6045 if (!cleared
&& !vector
&& REG_P (target
))
6046 emit_move_insn (target
, CONST0_RTX (GET_MODE (target
)));
6049 alias
= MEM_ALIAS_SET (target
);
6051 alias
= get_alias_set (elttype
);
6053 /* Store each element of the constructor into the corresponding
6054 element of TARGET, determined by counting the elements. */
6055 for (idx
= 0, i
= 0;
6056 VEC_iterate (constructor_elt
, CONSTRUCTOR_ELTS (exp
), idx
, ce
);
6057 idx
++, i
+= bitsize
/ elt_size
)
6059 HOST_WIDE_INT eltpos
;
6060 tree value
= ce
->value
;
6062 bitsize
= tree_low_cst (TYPE_SIZE (TREE_TYPE (value
)), 1);
6063 if (cleared
&& initializer_zerop (value
))
6067 eltpos
= tree_low_cst (ce
->index
, 1);
6073 /* Vector CONSTRUCTORs should only be built from smaller
6074 vectors in the case of BLKmode vectors. */
6075 gcc_assert (TREE_CODE (TREE_TYPE (value
)) != VECTOR_TYPE
);
6076 RTVEC_ELT (vector
, eltpos
)
6077 = expand_normal (value
);
6081 enum machine_mode value_mode
=
6082 TREE_CODE (TREE_TYPE (value
)) == VECTOR_TYPE
6083 ? TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (value
))
6085 bitpos
= eltpos
* elt_size
;
6086 store_constructor_field (target
, bitsize
, bitpos
,
6087 value_mode
, value
, type
,
6093 emit_insn (GEN_FCN (icode
)
6095 gen_rtx_PARALLEL (GET_MODE (target
), vector
)));
6104 /* Store the value of EXP (an expression tree)
6105 into a subfield of TARGET which has mode MODE and occupies
6106 BITSIZE bits, starting BITPOS bits from the start of TARGET.
6107 If MODE is VOIDmode, it means that we are storing into a bit-field.
6109 BITREGION_START is bitpos of the first bitfield in this region.
6110 BITREGION_END is the bitpos of the ending bitfield in this region.
6111 These two fields are 0, if the C++ memory model does not apply,
6112 or we are not interested in keeping track of bitfield regions.
6114 Always return const0_rtx unless we have something particular to
6117 TYPE is the type of the underlying object,
6119 ALIAS_SET is the alias set for the destination. This value will
6120 (in general) be different from that for TARGET, since TARGET is a
6121 reference to the containing structure.
6123 If NONTEMPORAL is true, try generating a nontemporal store. */
6126 store_field (rtx target
, HOST_WIDE_INT bitsize
, HOST_WIDE_INT bitpos
,
6127 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT bitregion_start
,
6128 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT bitregion_end
,
6129 enum machine_mode mode
, tree exp
, tree type
,
6130 alias_set_type alias_set
, bool nontemporal
)
6132 if (TREE_CODE (exp
) == ERROR_MARK
)
6135 /* If we have nothing to store, do nothing unless the expression has
6138 return expand_expr (exp
, const0_rtx
, VOIDmode
, EXPAND_NORMAL
);
6140 /* If we are storing into an unaligned field of an aligned union that is
6141 in a register, we may have the mode of TARGET being an integer mode but
6142 MODE == BLKmode. In that case, get an aligned object whose size and
6143 alignment are the same as TARGET and store TARGET into it (we can avoid
6144 the store if the field being stored is the entire width of TARGET). Then
6145 call ourselves recursively to store the field into a BLKmode version of
6146 that object. Finally, load from the object into TARGET. This is not
6147 very efficient in general, but should only be slightly more expensive
6148 than the otherwise-required unaligned accesses. Perhaps this can be
6149 cleaned up later. It's tempting to make OBJECT readonly, but it's set
6150 twice, once with emit_move_insn and once via store_field. */
6153 && (REG_P (target
) || GET_CODE (target
) == SUBREG
))
6155 rtx object
= assign_temp (type
, 0, 1, 1);
6156 rtx blk_object
= adjust_address (object
, BLKmode
, 0);
6158 if (bitsize
!= (HOST_WIDE_INT
) GET_MODE_BITSIZE (GET_MODE (target
)))
6159 emit_move_insn (object
, target
);
6161 store_field (blk_object
, bitsize
, bitpos
,
6162 bitregion_start
, bitregion_end
,
6163 mode
, exp
, type
, alias_set
, nontemporal
);
6165 emit_move_insn (target
, object
);
6167 /* We want to return the BLKmode version of the data. */
6171 if (GET_CODE (target
) == CONCAT
)
6173 /* We're storing into a struct containing a single __complex. */
6175 gcc_assert (!bitpos
);
6176 return store_expr (exp
, target
, 0, nontemporal
);
6179 /* If the structure is in a register or if the component
6180 is a bit field, we cannot use addressing to access it.
6181 Use bit-field techniques or SUBREG to store in it. */
6183 if (mode
== VOIDmode
6184 || (mode
!= BLKmode
&& ! direct_store
[(int) mode
]
6185 && GET_MODE_CLASS (mode
) != MODE_COMPLEX_INT
6186 && GET_MODE_CLASS (mode
) != MODE_COMPLEX_FLOAT
)
6188 || GET_CODE (target
) == SUBREG
6189 /* If the field isn't aligned enough to store as an ordinary memref,
6190 store it as a bit field. */
6192 && ((((MEM_ALIGN (target
) < GET_MODE_ALIGNMENT (mode
))
6193 || bitpos
% GET_MODE_ALIGNMENT (mode
))
6194 && SLOW_UNALIGNED_ACCESS (mode
, MEM_ALIGN (target
)))
6195 || (bitpos
% BITS_PER_UNIT
!= 0)))
6196 /* If the RHS and field are a constant size and the size of the
6197 RHS isn't the same size as the bitfield, we must use bitfield
6200 && TREE_CODE (TYPE_SIZE (TREE_TYPE (exp
))) == INTEGER_CST
6201 && compare_tree_int (TYPE_SIZE (TREE_TYPE (exp
)), bitsize
) != 0)
6202 /* If we are expanding a MEM_REF of a non-BLKmode non-addressable
6203 decl we must use bitfield operations. */
6205 && TREE_CODE (exp
) == MEM_REF
6206 && TREE_CODE (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0)) == ADDR_EXPR
6207 && DECL_P (TREE_OPERAND (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0), 0))
6208 && !TREE_ADDRESSABLE (TREE_OPERAND (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0),0 ))
6209 && DECL_MODE (TREE_OPERAND (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0), 0)) != BLKmode
))
6214 /* If EXP is a NOP_EXPR of precision less than its mode, then that
6215 implies a mask operation. If the precision is the same size as
6216 the field we're storing into, that mask is redundant. This is
6217 particularly common with bit field assignments generated by the
6219 nop_def
= get_def_for_expr (exp
, NOP_EXPR
);
6222 tree type
= TREE_TYPE (exp
);
6223 if (INTEGRAL_TYPE_P (type
)
6224 && TYPE_PRECISION (type
) < GET_MODE_BITSIZE (TYPE_MODE (type
))
6225 && bitsize
== TYPE_PRECISION (type
))
6227 tree op
= gimple_assign_rhs1 (nop_def
);
6228 type
= TREE_TYPE (op
);
6229 if (INTEGRAL_TYPE_P (type
) && TYPE_PRECISION (type
) >= bitsize
)
6234 temp
= expand_normal (exp
);
6236 /* If BITSIZE is narrower than the size of the type of EXP
6237 we will be narrowing TEMP. Normally, what's wanted are the
6238 low-order bits. However, if EXP's type is a record and this is
6239 big-endian machine, we want the upper BITSIZE bits. */
6240 if (BYTES_BIG_ENDIAN
&& GET_MODE_CLASS (GET_MODE (temp
)) == MODE_INT
6241 && bitsize
< (HOST_WIDE_INT
) GET_MODE_BITSIZE (GET_MODE (temp
))
6242 && TREE_CODE (TREE_TYPE (exp
)) == RECORD_TYPE
)
6243 temp
= expand_shift (RSHIFT_EXPR
, GET_MODE (temp
), temp
,
6244 GET_MODE_BITSIZE (GET_MODE (temp
)) - bitsize
,
6247 /* Unless MODE is VOIDmode or BLKmode, convert TEMP to
6249 if (mode
!= VOIDmode
&& mode
!= BLKmode
6250 && mode
!= TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (exp
)))
6251 temp
= convert_modes (mode
, TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (exp
)), temp
, 1);
6253 /* If the modes of TEMP and TARGET are both BLKmode, both
6254 must be in memory and BITPOS must be aligned on a byte
6255 boundary. If so, we simply do a block copy. Likewise
6256 for a BLKmode-like TARGET. */
6257 if (GET_MODE (temp
) == BLKmode
6258 && (GET_MODE (target
) == BLKmode
6260 && GET_MODE_CLASS (GET_MODE (target
)) == MODE_INT
6261 && (bitpos
% BITS_PER_UNIT
) == 0
6262 && (bitsize
% BITS_PER_UNIT
) == 0)))
6264 gcc_assert (MEM_P (target
) && MEM_P (temp
)
6265 && (bitpos
% BITS_PER_UNIT
) == 0);
6267 target
= adjust_address (target
, VOIDmode
, bitpos
/ BITS_PER_UNIT
);
6268 emit_block_move (target
, temp
,
6269 GEN_INT ((bitsize
+ BITS_PER_UNIT
- 1)
6276 /* Store the value in the bitfield. */
6277 store_bit_field (target
, bitsize
, bitpos
,
6278 bitregion_start
, bitregion_end
,
6285 /* Now build a reference to just the desired component. */
6286 rtx to_rtx
= adjust_address (target
, mode
, bitpos
/ BITS_PER_UNIT
);
6288 if (to_rtx
== target
)
6289 to_rtx
= copy_rtx (to_rtx
);
6291 if (!MEM_SCALAR_P (to_rtx
))
6292 MEM_IN_STRUCT_P (to_rtx
) = 1;
6293 if (!MEM_KEEP_ALIAS_SET_P (to_rtx
) && MEM_ALIAS_SET (to_rtx
) != 0)
6294 set_mem_alias_set (to_rtx
, alias_set
);
6296 return store_expr (exp
, to_rtx
, 0, nontemporal
);
6300 /* Given an expression EXP that may be a COMPONENT_REF, a BIT_FIELD_REF,
6301 an ARRAY_REF, or an ARRAY_RANGE_REF, look for nested operations of these
6302 codes and find the ultimate containing object, which we return.
6304 We set *PBITSIZE to the size in bits that we want, *PBITPOS to the
6305 bit position, and *PUNSIGNEDP to the signedness of the field.
6306 If the position of the field is variable, we store a tree
6307 giving the variable offset (in units) in *POFFSET.
6308 This offset is in addition to the bit position.
6309 If the position is not variable, we store 0 in *POFFSET.
6311 If any of the extraction expressions is volatile,
6312 we store 1 in *PVOLATILEP. Otherwise we don't change that.
6314 If the field is a non-BLKmode bit-field, *PMODE is set to VOIDmode.
6315 Otherwise, it is a mode that can be used to access the field.
6317 If the field describes a variable-sized object, *PMODE is set to
6318 BLKmode and *PBITSIZE is set to -1. An access cannot be made in
6319 this case, but the address of the object can be found.
6321 If KEEP_ALIGNING is true and the target is STRICT_ALIGNMENT, we don't
6322 look through nodes that serve as markers of a greater alignment than
6323 the one that can be deduced from the expression. These nodes make it
6324 possible for front-ends to prevent temporaries from being created by
6325 the middle-end on alignment considerations. For that purpose, the
6326 normal operating mode at high-level is to always pass FALSE so that
6327 the ultimate containing object is really returned; moreover, the
6328 associated predicate handled_component_p will always return TRUE
6329 on these nodes, thus indicating that they are essentially handled
6330 by get_inner_reference. TRUE should only be passed when the caller
6331 is scanning the expression in order to build another representation
6332 and specifically knows how to handle these nodes; as such, this is
6333 the normal operating mode in the RTL expanders. */
6336 get_inner_reference (tree exp
, HOST_WIDE_INT
*pbitsize
,
6337 HOST_WIDE_INT
*pbitpos
, tree
*poffset
,
6338 enum machine_mode
*pmode
, int *punsignedp
,
6339 int *pvolatilep
, bool keep_aligning
)
6342 enum machine_mode mode
= VOIDmode
;
6343 bool blkmode_bitfield
= false;
6344 tree offset
= size_zero_node
;
6345 double_int bit_offset
= double_int_zero
;
6347 /* First get the mode, signedness, and size. We do this from just the
6348 outermost expression. */
6350 if (TREE_CODE (exp
) == COMPONENT_REF
)
6352 tree field
= TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 1);
6353 size_tree
= DECL_SIZE (field
);
6354 if (!DECL_BIT_FIELD (field
))
6355 mode
= DECL_MODE (field
);
6356 else if (DECL_MODE (field
) == BLKmode
)
6357 blkmode_bitfield
= true;
6358 else if (TREE_THIS_VOLATILE (exp
)
6359 && flag_strict_volatile_bitfields
> 0)
6360 /* Volatile bitfields should be accessed in the mode of the
6361 field's type, not the mode computed based on the bit
6363 mode
= TYPE_MODE (DECL_BIT_FIELD_TYPE (field
));
6365 *punsignedp
= DECL_UNSIGNED (field
);
6367 else if (TREE_CODE (exp
) == BIT_FIELD_REF
)
6369 size_tree
= TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 1);
6370 *punsignedp
= (! INTEGRAL_TYPE_P (TREE_TYPE (exp
))
6371 || TYPE_UNSIGNED (TREE_TYPE (exp
)));
6373 /* For vector types, with the correct size of access, use the mode of
6375 if (TREE_CODE (TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0))) == VECTOR_TYPE
6376 && TREE_TYPE (exp
) == TREE_TYPE (TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0)))
6377 && tree_int_cst_equal (size_tree
, TYPE_SIZE (TREE_TYPE (exp
))))
6378 mode
= TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (exp
));
6382 mode
= TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (exp
));
6383 *punsignedp
= TYPE_UNSIGNED (TREE_TYPE (exp
));
6385 if (mode
== BLKmode
)
6386 size_tree
= TYPE_SIZE (TREE_TYPE (exp
));
6388 *pbitsize
= GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode
);
6393 if (! host_integerp (size_tree
, 1))
6394 mode
= BLKmode
, *pbitsize
= -1;
6396 *pbitsize
= tree_low_cst (size_tree
, 1);
6399 /* Compute cumulative bit-offset for nested component-refs and array-refs,
6400 and find the ultimate containing object. */
6403 switch (TREE_CODE (exp
))
6407 = double_int_add (bit_offset
,
6408 tree_to_double_int (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 2)));
6413 tree field
= TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 1);
6414 tree this_offset
= component_ref_field_offset (exp
);
6416 /* If this field hasn't been filled in yet, don't go past it.
6417 This should only happen when folding expressions made during
6418 type construction. */
6419 if (this_offset
== 0)
6422 offset
= size_binop (PLUS_EXPR
, offset
, this_offset
);
6423 bit_offset
= double_int_add (bit_offset
,
6425 (DECL_FIELD_BIT_OFFSET (field
)));
6427 /* ??? Right now we don't do anything with DECL_OFFSET_ALIGN. */
6432 case ARRAY_RANGE_REF
:
6434 tree index
= TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 1);
6435 tree low_bound
= array_ref_low_bound (exp
);
6436 tree unit_size
= array_ref_element_size (exp
);
6438 /* We assume all arrays have sizes that are a multiple of a byte.
6439 First subtract the lower bound, if any, in the type of the
6440 index, then convert to sizetype and multiply by the size of
6441 the array element. */
6442 if (! integer_zerop (low_bound
))
6443 index
= fold_build2 (MINUS_EXPR
, TREE_TYPE (index
),
6446 offset
= size_binop (PLUS_EXPR
, offset
,
6447 size_binop (MULT_EXPR
,
6448 fold_convert (sizetype
, index
),
6457 bit_offset
= double_int_add (bit_offset
,
6458 uhwi_to_double_int (*pbitsize
));
6461 case VIEW_CONVERT_EXPR
:
6462 if (keep_aligning
&& STRICT_ALIGNMENT
6463 && (TYPE_ALIGN (TREE_TYPE (exp
))
6464 > TYPE_ALIGN (TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0))))
6465 && (TYPE_ALIGN (TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0)))
6466 < BIGGEST_ALIGNMENT
)
6467 && (TYPE_ALIGN_OK (TREE_TYPE (exp
))
6468 || TYPE_ALIGN_OK (TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0)))))
6473 /* Hand back the decl for MEM[&decl, off]. */
6474 if (TREE_CODE (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0)) == ADDR_EXPR
)
6476 tree off
= TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 1);
6477 if (!integer_zerop (off
))
6479 double_int boff
, coff
= mem_ref_offset (exp
);
6480 boff
= double_int_lshift (coff
,
6482 ? 3 : exact_log2 (BITS_PER_UNIT
),
6483 HOST_BITS_PER_DOUBLE_INT
, true);
6484 bit_offset
= double_int_add (bit_offset
, boff
);
6486 exp
= TREE_OPERAND (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0), 0);
6494 /* If any reference in the chain is volatile, the effect is volatile. */
6495 if (TREE_THIS_VOLATILE (exp
))
6498 exp
= TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0);
6502 /* If OFFSET is constant, see if we can return the whole thing as a
6503 constant bit position. Make sure to handle overflow during
6505 if (host_integerp (offset
, 0))
6507 double_int tem
= double_int_lshift (tree_to_double_int (offset
),
6509 ? 3 : exact_log2 (BITS_PER_UNIT
),
6510 HOST_BITS_PER_DOUBLE_INT
, true);
6511 tem
= double_int_add (tem
, bit_offset
);
6512 if (double_int_fits_in_shwi_p (tem
))
6514 *pbitpos
= double_int_to_shwi (tem
);
6515 *poffset
= offset
= NULL_TREE
;
6519 /* Otherwise, split it up. */
6522 *pbitpos
= double_int_to_shwi (bit_offset
);
6526 /* We can use BLKmode for a byte-aligned BLKmode bitfield. */
6527 if (mode
== VOIDmode
6529 && (*pbitpos
% BITS_PER_UNIT
) == 0
6530 && (*pbitsize
% BITS_PER_UNIT
) == 0)
6538 /* Given an expression EXP that may be a COMPONENT_REF, an ARRAY_REF or an
6539 ARRAY_RANGE_REF, look for whether EXP or any nested component-refs within
6540 EXP is marked as PACKED. */
6543 contains_packed_reference (const_tree exp
)
6545 bool packed_p
= false;
6549 switch (TREE_CODE (exp
))
6553 tree field
= TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 1);
6554 packed_p
= DECL_PACKED (field
)
6555 || TYPE_PACKED (TREE_TYPE (field
))
6556 || TYPE_PACKED (TREE_TYPE (exp
));
6564 case ARRAY_RANGE_REF
:
6567 case VIEW_CONVERT_EXPR
:
6573 exp
= TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0);
6579 /* Return a tree of sizetype representing the size, in bytes, of the element
6580 of EXP, an ARRAY_REF or an ARRAY_RANGE_REF. */
6583 array_ref_element_size (tree exp
)
6585 tree aligned_size
= TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 3);
6586 tree elmt_type
= TREE_TYPE (TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0)));
6587 location_t loc
= EXPR_LOCATION (exp
);
6589 /* If a size was specified in the ARRAY_REF, it's the size measured
6590 in alignment units of the element type. So multiply by that value. */
6593 /* ??? tree_ssa_useless_type_conversion will eliminate casts to
6594 sizetype from another type of the same width and signedness. */
6595 if (TREE_TYPE (aligned_size
) != sizetype
)
6596 aligned_size
= fold_convert_loc (loc
, sizetype
, aligned_size
);
6597 return size_binop_loc (loc
, MULT_EXPR
, aligned_size
,
6598 size_int (TYPE_ALIGN_UNIT (elmt_type
)));
6601 /* Otherwise, take the size from that of the element type. Substitute
6602 any PLACEHOLDER_EXPR that we have. */
6604 return SUBSTITUTE_PLACEHOLDER_IN_EXPR (TYPE_SIZE_UNIT (elmt_type
), exp
);
6607 /* Return a tree representing the lower bound of the array mentioned in
6608 EXP, an ARRAY_REF or an ARRAY_RANGE_REF. */
6611 array_ref_low_bound (tree exp
)
6613 tree domain_type
= TYPE_DOMAIN (TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0)));
6615 /* If a lower bound is specified in EXP, use it. */
6616 if (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 2))
6617 return TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 2);
6619 /* Otherwise, if there is a domain type and it has a lower bound, use it,
6620 substituting for a PLACEHOLDER_EXPR as needed. */
6621 if (domain_type
&& TYPE_MIN_VALUE (domain_type
))
6622 return SUBSTITUTE_PLACEHOLDER_IN_EXPR (TYPE_MIN_VALUE (domain_type
), exp
);
6624 /* Otherwise, return a zero of the appropriate type. */
6625 return build_int_cst (TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 1)), 0);
6628 /* Return a tree representing the upper bound of the array mentioned in
6629 EXP, an ARRAY_REF or an ARRAY_RANGE_REF. */
6632 array_ref_up_bound (tree exp
)
6634 tree domain_type
= TYPE_DOMAIN (TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0)));
6636 /* If there is a domain type and it has an upper bound, use it, substituting
6637 for a PLACEHOLDER_EXPR as needed. */
6638 if (domain_type
&& TYPE_MAX_VALUE (domain_type
))
6639 return SUBSTITUTE_PLACEHOLDER_IN_EXPR (TYPE_MAX_VALUE (domain_type
), exp
);
6641 /* Otherwise fail. */
6645 /* Return a tree representing the offset, in bytes, of the field referenced
6646 by EXP. This does not include any offset in DECL_FIELD_BIT_OFFSET. */
6649 component_ref_field_offset (tree exp
)
6651 tree aligned_offset
= TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 2);
6652 tree field
= TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 1);
6653 location_t loc
= EXPR_LOCATION (exp
);
6655 /* If an offset was specified in the COMPONENT_REF, it's the offset measured
6656 in units of DECL_OFFSET_ALIGN / BITS_PER_UNIT. So multiply by that
6660 /* ??? tree_ssa_useless_type_conversion will eliminate casts to
6661 sizetype from another type of the same width and signedness. */
6662 if (TREE_TYPE (aligned_offset
) != sizetype
)
6663 aligned_offset
= fold_convert_loc (loc
, sizetype
, aligned_offset
);
6664 return size_binop_loc (loc
, MULT_EXPR
, aligned_offset
,
6665 size_int (DECL_OFFSET_ALIGN (field
)
6669 /* Otherwise, take the offset from that of the field. Substitute
6670 any PLACEHOLDER_EXPR that we have. */
6672 return SUBSTITUTE_PLACEHOLDER_IN_EXPR (DECL_FIELD_OFFSET (field
), exp
);
6675 /* Alignment in bits the TARGET of an assignment may be assumed to have. */
6677 static unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT
6678 target_align (const_tree target
)
6680 /* We might have a chain of nested references with intermediate misaligning
6681 bitfields components, so need to recurse to find out. */
6683 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT this_align
, outer_align
;
6685 switch (TREE_CODE (target
))
6691 this_align
= DECL_ALIGN (TREE_OPERAND (target
, 1));
6692 outer_align
= target_align (TREE_OPERAND (target
, 0));
6693 return MIN (this_align
, outer_align
);
6696 case ARRAY_RANGE_REF
:
6697 this_align
= TYPE_ALIGN (TREE_TYPE (target
));
6698 outer_align
= target_align (TREE_OPERAND (target
, 0));
6699 return MIN (this_align
, outer_align
);
6702 case NON_LVALUE_EXPR
:
6703 case VIEW_CONVERT_EXPR
:
6704 this_align
= TYPE_ALIGN (TREE_TYPE (target
));
6705 outer_align
= target_align (TREE_OPERAND (target
, 0));
6706 return MAX (this_align
, outer_align
);
6709 return TYPE_ALIGN (TREE_TYPE (target
));
6714 /* Given an rtx VALUE that may contain additions and multiplications, return
6715 an equivalent value that just refers to a register, memory, or constant.
6716 This is done by generating instructions to perform the arithmetic and
6717 returning a pseudo-register containing the value.
6719 The returned value may be a REG, SUBREG, MEM or constant. */
6722 force_operand (rtx value
, rtx target
)
6725 /* Use subtarget as the target for operand 0 of a binary operation. */
6726 rtx subtarget
= get_subtarget (target
);
6727 enum rtx_code code
= GET_CODE (value
);
6729 /* Check for subreg applied to an expression produced by loop optimizer. */
6731 && !REG_P (SUBREG_REG (value
))
6732 && !MEM_P (SUBREG_REG (value
)))
6735 = simplify_gen_subreg (GET_MODE (value
),
6736 force_reg (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (value
)),
6737 force_operand (SUBREG_REG (value
),
6739 GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (value
)),
6740 SUBREG_BYTE (value
));
6741 code
= GET_CODE (value
);
6744 /* Check for a PIC address load. */
6745 if ((code
== PLUS
|| code
== MINUS
)
6746 && XEXP (value
, 0) == pic_offset_table_rtx
6747 && (GET_CODE (XEXP (value
, 1)) == SYMBOL_REF
6748 || GET_CODE (XEXP (value
, 1)) == LABEL_REF
6749 || GET_CODE (XEXP (value
, 1)) == CONST
))
6752 subtarget
= gen_reg_rtx (GET_MODE (value
));
6753 emit_move_insn (subtarget
, value
);
6757 if (ARITHMETIC_P (value
))
6759 op2
= XEXP (value
, 1);
6760 if (!CONSTANT_P (op2
) && !(REG_P (op2
) && op2
!= subtarget
))
6762 if (code
== MINUS
&& CONST_INT_P (op2
))
6765 op2
= negate_rtx (GET_MODE (value
), op2
);
6768 /* Check for an addition with OP2 a constant integer and our first
6769 operand a PLUS of a virtual register and something else. In that
6770 case, we want to emit the sum of the virtual register and the
6771 constant first and then add the other value. This allows virtual
6772 register instantiation to simply modify the constant rather than
6773 creating another one around this addition. */
6774 if (code
== PLUS
&& CONST_INT_P (op2
)
6775 && GET_CODE (XEXP (value
, 0)) == PLUS
6776 && REG_P (XEXP (XEXP (value
, 0), 0))
6777 && REGNO (XEXP (XEXP (value
, 0), 0)) >= FIRST_VIRTUAL_REGISTER
6778 && REGNO (XEXP (XEXP (value
, 0), 0)) <= LAST_VIRTUAL_REGISTER
)
6780 rtx temp
= expand_simple_binop (GET_MODE (value
), code
,
6781 XEXP (XEXP (value
, 0), 0), op2
,
6782 subtarget
, 0, OPTAB_LIB_WIDEN
);
6783 return expand_simple_binop (GET_MODE (value
), code
, temp
,
6784 force_operand (XEXP (XEXP (value
,
6786 target
, 0, OPTAB_LIB_WIDEN
);
6789 op1
= force_operand (XEXP (value
, 0), subtarget
);
6790 op2
= force_operand (op2
, NULL_RTX
);
6794 return expand_mult (GET_MODE (value
), op1
, op2
, target
, 1);
6796 if (!INTEGRAL_MODE_P (GET_MODE (value
)))
6797 return expand_simple_binop (GET_MODE (value
), code
, op1
, op2
,
6798 target
, 1, OPTAB_LIB_WIDEN
);
6800 return expand_divmod (0,
6801 FLOAT_MODE_P (GET_MODE (value
))
6802 ? RDIV_EXPR
: TRUNC_DIV_EXPR
,
6803 GET_MODE (value
), op1
, op2
, target
, 0);
6805 return expand_divmod (1, TRUNC_MOD_EXPR
, GET_MODE (value
), op1
, op2
,
6808 return expand_divmod (0, TRUNC_DIV_EXPR
, GET_MODE (value
), op1
, op2
,
6811 return expand_divmod (1, TRUNC_MOD_EXPR
, GET_MODE (value
), op1
, op2
,
6814 return expand_simple_binop (GET_MODE (value
), code
, op1
, op2
,
6815 target
, 0, OPTAB_LIB_WIDEN
);
6817 return expand_simple_binop (GET_MODE (value
), code
, op1
, op2
,
6818 target
, 1, OPTAB_LIB_WIDEN
);
6821 if (UNARY_P (value
))
6824 target
= gen_reg_rtx (GET_MODE (value
));
6825 op1
= force_operand (XEXP (value
, 0), NULL_RTX
);
6832 case FLOAT_TRUNCATE
:
6833 convert_move (target
, op1
, code
== ZERO_EXTEND
);
6838 expand_fix (target
, op1
, code
== UNSIGNED_FIX
);
6842 case UNSIGNED_FLOAT
:
6843 expand_float (target
, op1
, code
== UNSIGNED_FLOAT
);
6847 return expand_simple_unop (GET_MODE (value
), code
, op1
, target
, 0);
6851 #ifdef INSN_SCHEDULING
6852 /* On machines that have insn scheduling, we want all memory reference to be
6853 explicit, so we need to deal with such paradoxical SUBREGs. */
6854 if (paradoxical_subreg_p (value
) && MEM_P (SUBREG_REG (value
)))
6856 = simplify_gen_subreg (GET_MODE (value
),
6857 force_reg (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (value
)),
6858 force_operand (SUBREG_REG (value
),
6860 GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (value
)),
6861 SUBREG_BYTE (value
));
6867 /* Subroutine of expand_expr: return nonzero iff there is no way that
6868 EXP can reference X, which is being modified. TOP_P is nonzero if this
6869 call is going to be used to determine whether we need a temporary
6870 for EXP, as opposed to a recursive call to this function.
6872 It is always safe for this routine to return zero since it merely
6873 searches for optimization opportunities. */
6876 safe_from_p (const_rtx x
, tree exp
, int top_p
)
6882 /* If EXP has varying size, we MUST use a target since we currently
6883 have no way of allocating temporaries of variable size
6884 (except for arrays that have TYPE_ARRAY_MAX_SIZE set).
6885 So we assume here that something at a higher level has prevented a
6886 clash. This is somewhat bogus, but the best we can do. Only
6887 do this when X is BLKmode and when we are at the top level. */
6888 || (top_p
&& TREE_TYPE (exp
) != 0 && COMPLETE_TYPE_P (TREE_TYPE (exp
))
6889 && TREE_CODE (TYPE_SIZE (TREE_TYPE (exp
))) != INTEGER_CST
6890 && (TREE_CODE (TREE_TYPE (exp
)) != ARRAY_TYPE
6891 || TYPE_ARRAY_MAX_SIZE (TREE_TYPE (exp
)) == NULL_TREE
6892 || TREE_CODE (TYPE_ARRAY_MAX_SIZE (TREE_TYPE (exp
)))
6894 && GET_MODE (x
) == BLKmode
)
6895 /* If X is in the outgoing argument area, it is always safe. */
6897 && (XEXP (x
, 0) == virtual_outgoing_args_rtx
6898 || (GET_CODE (XEXP (x
, 0)) == PLUS
6899 && XEXP (XEXP (x
, 0), 0) == virtual_outgoing_args_rtx
))))
6902 /* If this is a subreg of a hard register, declare it unsafe, otherwise,
6903 find the underlying pseudo. */
6904 if (GET_CODE (x
) == SUBREG
)
6907 if (REG_P (x
) && REGNO (x
) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
)
6911 /* Now look at our tree code and possibly recurse. */
6912 switch (TREE_CODE_CLASS (TREE_CODE (exp
)))
6914 case tcc_declaration
:
6915 exp_rtl
= DECL_RTL_IF_SET (exp
);
6921 case tcc_exceptional
:
6922 if (TREE_CODE (exp
) == TREE_LIST
)
6926 if (TREE_VALUE (exp
) && !safe_from_p (x
, TREE_VALUE (exp
), 0))
6928 exp
= TREE_CHAIN (exp
);
6931 if (TREE_CODE (exp
) != TREE_LIST
)
6932 return safe_from_p (x
, exp
, 0);
6935 else if (TREE_CODE (exp
) == CONSTRUCTOR
)
6937 constructor_elt
*ce
;
6938 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT idx
;
6940 FOR_EACH_VEC_ELT (constructor_elt
, CONSTRUCTOR_ELTS (exp
), idx
, ce
)
6941 if ((ce
->index
!= NULL_TREE
&& !safe_from_p (x
, ce
->index
, 0))
6942 || !safe_from_p (x
, ce
->value
, 0))
6946 else if (TREE_CODE (exp
) == ERROR_MARK
)
6947 return 1; /* An already-visited SAVE_EXPR? */
6952 /* The only case we look at here is the DECL_INITIAL inside a
6954 return (TREE_CODE (exp
) != DECL_EXPR
6955 || TREE_CODE (DECL_EXPR_DECL (exp
)) != VAR_DECL
6956 || !DECL_INITIAL (DECL_EXPR_DECL (exp
))
6957 || safe_from_p (x
, DECL_INITIAL (DECL_EXPR_DECL (exp
)), 0));
6960 case tcc_comparison
:
6961 if (!safe_from_p (x
, TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 1), 0))
6966 return safe_from_p (x
, TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0), 0);
6968 case tcc_expression
:
6971 /* Now do code-specific tests. EXP_RTL is set to any rtx we find in
6972 the expression. If it is set, we conflict iff we are that rtx or
6973 both are in memory. Otherwise, we check all operands of the
6974 expression recursively. */
6976 switch (TREE_CODE (exp
))
6979 /* If the operand is static or we are static, we can't conflict.
6980 Likewise if we don't conflict with the operand at all. */
6981 if (staticp (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0))
6982 || TREE_STATIC (exp
)
6983 || safe_from_p (x
, TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0), 0))
6986 /* Otherwise, the only way this can conflict is if we are taking
6987 the address of a DECL a that address if part of X, which is
6989 exp
= TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0);
6992 if (!DECL_RTL_SET_P (exp
)
6993 || !MEM_P (DECL_RTL (exp
)))
6996 exp_rtl
= XEXP (DECL_RTL (exp
), 0);
7002 && alias_sets_conflict_p (MEM_ALIAS_SET (x
),
7003 get_alias_set (exp
)))
7008 /* Assume that the call will clobber all hard registers and
7010 if ((REG_P (x
) && REGNO (x
) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
)
7015 case WITH_CLEANUP_EXPR
:
7016 case CLEANUP_POINT_EXPR
:
7017 /* Lowered by gimplify.c. */
7021 return safe_from_p (x
, TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0), 0);
7027 /* If we have an rtx, we do not need to scan our operands. */
7031 nops
= TREE_OPERAND_LENGTH (exp
);
7032 for (i
= 0; i
< nops
; i
++)
7033 if (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, i
) != 0
7034 && ! safe_from_p (x
, TREE_OPERAND (exp
, i
), 0))
7040 /* Should never get a type here. */
7044 /* If we have an rtl, find any enclosed object. Then see if we conflict
7048 if (GET_CODE (exp_rtl
) == SUBREG
)
7050 exp_rtl
= SUBREG_REG (exp_rtl
);
7052 && REGNO (exp_rtl
) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
)
7056 /* If the rtl is X, then it is not safe. Otherwise, it is unless both
7057 are memory and they conflict. */
7058 return ! (rtx_equal_p (x
, exp_rtl
)
7059 || (MEM_P (x
) && MEM_P (exp_rtl
)
7060 && true_dependence (exp_rtl
, VOIDmode
, x
,
7061 rtx_addr_varies_p
)));
7064 /* If we reach here, it is safe. */
7069 /* Return the highest power of two that EXP is known to be a multiple of.
7070 This is used in updating alignment of MEMs in array references. */
7072 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT
7073 highest_pow2_factor (const_tree exp
)
7075 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT c0
, c1
;
7077 switch (TREE_CODE (exp
))
7080 /* We can find the lowest bit that's a one. If the low
7081 HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT bits are zero, return BIGGEST_ALIGNMENT.
7082 We need to handle this case since we can find it in a COND_EXPR,
7083 a MIN_EXPR, or a MAX_EXPR. If the constant overflows, we have an
7084 erroneous program, so return BIGGEST_ALIGNMENT to avoid any
7086 if (TREE_OVERFLOW (exp
))
7087 return BIGGEST_ALIGNMENT
;
7090 /* Note: tree_low_cst is intentionally not used here,
7091 we don't care about the upper bits. */
7092 c0
= TREE_INT_CST_LOW (exp
);
7094 return c0
? c0
: BIGGEST_ALIGNMENT
;
7098 case PLUS_EXPR
: case MINUS_EXPR
: case MIN_EXPR
: case MAX_EXPR
:
7099 c0
= highest_pow2_factor (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0));
7100 c1
= highest_pow2_factor (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 1));
7101 return MIN (c0
, c1
);
7104 c0
= highest_pow2_factor (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0));
7105 c1
= highest_pow2_factor (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 1));
7108 case ROUND_DIV_EXPR
: case TRUNC_DIV_EXPR
: case FLOOR_DIV_EXPR
:
7110 if (integer_pow2p (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 1))
7111 && host_integerp (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 1), 1))
7113 c0
= highest_pow2_factor (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0));
7114 c1
= tree_low_cst (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 1), 1);
7115 return MAX (1, c0
/ c1
);
7120 /* The highest power of two of a bit-and expression is the maximum of
7121 that of its operands. We typically get here for a complex LHS and
7122 a constant negative power of two on the RHS to force an explicit
7123 alignment, so don't bother looking at the LHS. */
7124 return highest_pow2_factor (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 1));
7128 return highest_pow2_factor (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0));
7131 return highest_pow2_factor (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 1));
7134 c0
= highest_pow2_factor (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 1));
7135 c1
= highest_pow2_factor (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 2));
7136 return MIN (c0
, c1
);
7145 /* Similar, except that the alignment requirements of TARGET are
7146 taken into account. Assume it is at least as aligned as its
7147 type, unless it is a COMPONENT_REF in which case the layout of
7148 the structure gives the alignment. */
7150 static unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT
7151 highest_pow2_factor_for_target (const_tree target
, const_tree exp
)
7153 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT talign
= target_align (target
) / BITS_PER_UNIT
;
7154 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT factor
= highest_pow2_factor (exp
);
7156 return MAX (factor
, talign
);
7159 /* Subroutine of expand_expr. Expand the two operands of a binary
7160 expression EXP0 and EXP1 placing the results in OP0 and OP1.
7161 The value may be stored in TARGET if TARGET is nonzero. The
7162 MODIFIER argument is as documented by expand_expr. */
7165 expand_operands (tree exp0
, tree exp1
, rtx target
, rtx
*op0
, rtx
*op1
,
7166 enum expand_modifier modifier
)
7168 if (! safe_from_p (target
, exp1
, 1))
7170 if (operand_equal_p (exp0
, exp1
, 0))
7172 *op0
= expand_expr (exp0
, target
, VOIDmode
, modifier
);
7173 *op1
= copy_rtx (*op0
);
7177 /* If we need to preserve evaluation order, copy exp0 into its own
7178 temporary variable so that it can't be clobbered by exp1. */
7179 if (flag_evaluation_order
&& TREE_SIDE_EFFECTS (exp1
))
7180 exp0
= save_expr (exp0
);
7181 *op0
= expand_expr (exp0
, target
, VOIDmode
, modifier
);
7182 *op1
= expand_expr (exp1
, NULL_RTX
, VOIDmode
, modifier
);
7187 /* Return a MEM that contains constant EXP. DEFER is as for
7188 output_constant_def and MODIFIER is as for expand_expr. */
7191 expand_expr_constant (tree exp
, int defer
, enum expand_modifier modifier
)
7195 mem
= output_constant_def (exp
, defer
);
7196 if (modifier
!= EXPAND_INITIALIZER
)
7197 mem
= use_anchored_address (mem
);
7201 /* A subroutine of expand_expr_addr_expr. Evaluate the address of EXP.
7202 The TARGET, TMODE and MODIFIER arguments are as for expand_expr. */
7205 expand_expr_addr_expr_1 (tree exp
, rtx target
, enum machine_mode tmode
,
7206 enum expand_modifier modifier
, addr_space_t as
)
7208 rtx result
, subtarget
;
7210 HOST_WIDE_INT bitsize
, bitpos
;
7211 int volatilep
, unsignedp
;
7212 enum machine_mode mode1
;
7214 /* If we are taking the address of a constant and are at the top level,
7215 we have to use output_constant_def since we can't call force_const_mem
7217 /* ??? This should be considered a front-end bug. We should not be
7218 generating ADDR_EXPR of something that isn't an LVALUE. The only
7219 exception here is STRING_CST. */
7220 if (CONSTANT_CLASS_P (exp
))
7221 return XEXP (expand_expr_constant (exp
, 0, modifier
), 0);
7223 /* Everything must be something allowed by is_gimple_addressable. */
7224 switch (TREE_CODE (exp
))
7227 /* This case will happen via recursion for &a->b. */
7228 return expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0), target
, tmode
, modifier
);
7232 tree tem
= TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0);
7233 if (!integer_zerop (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 1)))
7234 tem
= fold_build_pointer_plus (tem
, TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 1));
7235 return expand_expr (tem
, target
, tmode
, modifier
);
7239 /* Expand the initializer like constants above. */
7240 return XEXP (expand_expr_constant (DECL_INITIAL (exp
), 0, modifier
), 0);
7243 /* The real part of the complex number is always first, therefore
7244 the address is the same as the address of the parent object. */
7247 inner
= TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0);
7251 /* The imaginary part of the complex number is always second.
7252 The expression is therefore always offset by the size of the
7255 bitpos
= GET_MODE_BITSIZE (TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (exp
)));
7256 inner
= TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0);
7260 /* If the object is a DECL, then expand it for its rtl. Don't bypass
7261 expand_expr, as that can have various side effects; LABEL_DECLs for
7262 example, may not have their DECL_RTL set yet. Expand the rtl of
7263 CONSTRUCTORs too, which should yield a memory reference for the
7264 constructor's contents. Assume language specific tree nodes can
7265 be expanded in some interesting way. */
7266 gcc_assert (TREE_CODE (exp
) < LAST_AND_UNUSED_TREE_CODE
);
7268 || TREE_CODE (exp
) == CONSTRUCTOR
7269 || TREE_CODE (exp
) == COMPOUND_LITERAL_EXPR
)
7271 result
= expand_expr (exp
, target
, tmode
,
7272 modifier
== EXPAND_INITIALIZER
7273 ? EXPAND_INITIALIZER
: EXPAND_CONST_ADDRESS
);
7275 /* If the DECL isn't in memory, then the DECL wasn't properly
7276 marked TREE_ADDRESSABLE, which will be either a front-end
7277 or a tree optimizer bug. */
7279 if (TREE_ADDRESSABLE (exp
)
7281 && ! targetm
.calls
.allocate_stack_slots_for_args())
7283 error ("local frame unavailable (naked function?)");
7287 gcc_assert (MEM_P (result
));
7288 result
= XEXP (result
, 0);
7290 /* ??? Is this needed anymore? */
7291 if (DECL_P (exp
) && !TREE_USED (exp
) == 0)
7293 assemble_external (exp
);
7294 TREE_USED (exp
) = 1;
7297 if (modifier
!= EXPAND_INITIALIZER
7298 && modifier
!= EXPAND_CONST_ADDRESS
)
7299 result
= force_operand (result
, target
);
7303 /* Pass FALSE as the last argument to get_inner_reference although
7304 we are expanding to RTL. The rationale is that we know how to
7305 handle "aligning nodes" here: we can just bypass them because
7306 they won't change the final object whose address will be returned
7307 (they actually exist only for that purpose). */
7308 inner
= get_inner_reference (exp
, &bitsize
, &bitpos
, &offset
,
7309 &mode1
, &unsignedp
, &volatilep
, false);
7313 /* We must have made progress. */
7314 gcc_assert (inner
!= exp
);
7316 subtarget
= offset
|| bitpos
? NULL_RTX
: target
;
7317 /* For VIEW_CONVERT_EXPR, where the outer alignment is bigger than
7318 inner alignment, force the inner to be sufficiently aligned. */
7319 if (CONSTANT_CLASS_P (inner
)
7320 && TYPE_ALIGN (TREE_TYPE (inner
)) < TYPE_ALIGN (TREE_TYPE (exp
)))
7322 inner
= copy_node (inner
);
7323 TREE_TYPE (inner
) = copy_node (TREE_TYPE (inner
));
7324 TYPE_ALIGN (TREE_TYPE (inner
)) = TYPE_ALIGN (TREE_TYPE (exp
));
7325 TYPE_USER_ALIGN (TREE_TYPE (inner
)) = 1;
7327 result
= expand_expr_addr_expr_1 (inner
, subtarget
, tmode
, modifier
, as
);
7333 if (modifier
!= EXPAND_NORMAL
)
7334 result
= force_operand (result
, NULL
);
7335 tmp
= expand_expr (offset
, NULL_RTX
, tmode
,
7336 modifier
== EXPAND_INITIALIZER
7337 ? EXPAND_INITIALIZER
: EXPAND_NORMAL
);
7339 result
= convert_memory_address_addr_space (tmode
, result
, as
);
7340 tmp
= convert_memory_address_addr_space (tmode
, tmp
, as
);
7342 if (modifier
== EXPAND_SUM
|| modifier
== EXPAND_INITIALIZER
)
7343 result
= simplify_gen_binary (PLUS
, tmode
, result
, tmp
);
7346 subtarget
= bitpos
? NULL_RTX
: target
;
7347 result
= expand_simple_binop (tmode
, PLUS
, result
, tmp
, subtarget
,
7348 1, OPTAB_LIB_WIDEN
);
7354 /* Someone beforehand should have rejected taking the address
7355 of such an object. */
7356 gcc_assert ((bitpos
% BITS_PER_UNIT
) == 0);
7358 result
= plus_constant (result
, bitpos
/ BITS_PER_UNIT
);
7359 if (modifier
< EXPAND_SUM
)
7360 result
= force_operand (result
, target
);
7366 /* A subroutine of expand_expr. Evaluate EXP, which is an ADDR_EXPR.
7367 The TARGET, TMODE and MODIFIER arguments are as for expand_expr. */
7370 expand_expr_addr_expr (tree exp
, rtx target
, enum machine_mode tmode
,
7371 enum expand_modifier modifier
)
7373 addr_space_t as
= ADDR_SPACE_GENERIC
;
7374 enum machine_mode address_mode
= Pmode
;
7375 enum machine_mode pointer_mode
= ptr_mode
;
7376 enum machine_mode rmode
;
7379 /* Target mode of VOIDmode says "whatever's natural". */
7380 if (tmode
== VOIDmode
)
7381 tmode
= TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (exp
));
7383 if (POINTER_TYPE_P (TREE_TYPE (exp
)))
7385 as
= TYPE_ADDR_SPACE (TREE_TYPE (TREE_TYPE (exp
)));
7386 address_mode
= targetm
.addr_space
.address_mode (as
);
7387 pointer_mode
= targetm
.addr_space
.pointer_mode (as
);
7390 /* We can get called with some Weird Things if the user does silliness
7391 like "(short) &a". In that case, convert_memory_address won't do
7392 the right thing, so ignore the given target mode. */
7393 if (tmode
!= address_mode
&& tmode
!= pointer_mode
)
7394 tmode
= address_mode
;
7396 result
= expand_expr_addr_expr_1 (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0), target
,
7397 tmode
, modifier
, as
);
7399 /* Despite expand_expr claims concerning ignoring TMODE when not
7400 strictly convenient, stuff breaks if we don't honor it. Note
7401 that combined with the above, we only do this for pointer modes. */
7402 rmode
= GET_MODE (result
);
7403 if (rmode
== VOIDmode
)
7406 result
= convert_memory_address_addr_space (tmode
, result
, as
);
7411 /* Generate code for computing CONSTRUCTOR EXP.
7412 An rtx for the computed value is returned. If AVOID_TEMP_MEM
7413 is TRUE, instead of creating a temporary variable in memory
7414 NULL is returned and the caller needs to handle it differently. */
7417 expand_constructor (tree exp
, rtx target
, enum expand_modifier modifier
,
7418 bool avoid_temp_mem
)
7420 tree type
= TREE_TYPE (exp
);
7421 enum machine_mode mode
= TYPE_MODE (type
);
7423 /* Try to avoid creating a temporary at all. This is possible
7424 if all of the initializer is zero.
7425 FIXME: try to handle all [0..255] initializers we can handle
7427 if (TREE_STATIC (exp
)
7428 && !TREE_ADDRESSABLE (exp
)
7429 && target
!= 0 && mode
== BLKmode
7430 && all_zeros_p (exp
))
7432 clear_storage (target
, expr_size (exp
), BLOCK_OP_NORMAL
);
7436 /* All elts simple constants => refer to a constant in memory. But
7437 if this is a non-BLKmode mode, let it store a field at a time
7438 since that should make a CONST_INT or CONST_DOUBLE when we
7439 fold. Likewise, if we have a target we can use, it is best to
7440 store directly into the target unless the type is large enough
7441 that memcpy will be used. If we are making an initializer and
7442 all operands are constant, put it in memory as well.
7444 FIXME: Avoid trying to fill vector constructors piece-meal.
7445 Output them with output_constant_def below unless we're sure
7446 they're zeros. This should go away when vector initializers
7447 are treated like VECTOR_CST instead of arrays. */
7448 if ((TREE_STATIC (exp
)
7449 && ((mode
== BLKmode
7450 && ! (target
!= 0 && safe_from_p (target
, exp
, 1)))
7451 || TREE_ADDRESSABLE (exp
)
7452 || (host_integerp (TYPE_SIZE_UNIT (type
), 1)
7453 && (! MOVE_BY_PIECES_P
7454 (tree_low_cst (TYPE_SIZE_UNIT (type
), 1),
7456 && ! mostly_zeros_p (exp
))))
7457 || ((modifier
== EXPAND_INITIALIZER
|| modifier
== EXPAND_CONST_ADDRESS
)
7458 && TREE_CONSTANT (exp
)))
7465 constructor
= expand_expr_constant (exp
, 1, modifier
);
7467 if (modifier
!= EXPAND_CONST_ADDRESS
7468 && modifier
!= EXPAND_INITIALIZER
7469 && modifier
!= EXPAND_SUM
)
7470 constructor
= validize_mem (constructor
);
7475 /* Handle calls that pass values in multiple non-contiguous
7476 locations. The Irix 6 ABI has examples of this. */
7477 if (target
== 0 || ! safe_from_p (target
, exp
, 1)
7478 || GET_CODE (target
) == PARALLEL
|| modifier
== EXPAND_STACK_PARM
)
7484 = assign_temp (build_qualified_type (type
, (TYPE_QUALS (type
)
7485 | (TREE_READONLY (exp
)
7486 * TYPE_QUAL_CONST
))),
7487 0, TREE_ADDRESSABLE (exp
), 1);
7490 store_constructor (exp
, target
, 0, int_expr_size (exp
));
7495 /* expand_expr: generate code for computing expression EXP.
7496 An rtx for the computed value is returned. The value is never null.
7497 In the case of a void EXP, const0_rtx is returned.
7499 The value may be stored in TARGET if TARGET is nonzero.
7500 TARGET is just a suggestion; callers must assume that
7501 the rtx returned may not be the same as TARGET.
7503 If TARGET is CONST0_RTX, it means that the value will be ignored.
7505 If TMODE is not VOIDmode, it suggests generating the
7506 result in mode TMODE. But this is done only when convenient.
7507 Otherwise, TMODE is ignored and the value generated in its natural mode.
7508 TMODE is just a suggestion; callers must assume that
7509 the rtx returned may not have mode TMODE.
7511 Note that TARGET may have neither TMODE nor MODE. In that case, it
7512 probably will not be used.
7514 If MODIFIER is EXPAND_SUM then when EXP is an addition
7515 we can return an rtx of the form (MULT (REG ...) (CONST_INT ...))
7516 or a nest of (PLUS ...) and (MINUS ...) where the terms are
7517 products as above, or REG or MEM, or constant.
7518 Ordinarily in such cases we would output mul or add instructions
7519 and then return a pseudo reg containing the sum.
7521 EXPAND_INITIALIZER is much like EXPAND_SUM except that
7522 it also marks a label as absolutely required (it can't be dead).
7523 It also makes a ZERO_EXTEND or SIGN_EXTEND instead of emitting extend insns.
7524 This is used for outputting expressions used in initializers.
7526 EXPAND_CONST_ADDRESS says that it is okay to return a MEM
7527 with a constant address even if that address is not normally legitimate.
7528 EXPAND_INITIALIZER and EXPAND_SUM also have this effect.
7530 EXPAND_STACK_PARM is used when expanding to a TARGET on the stack for
7531 a call parameter. Such targets require special care as we haven't yet
7532 marked TARGET so that it's safe from being trashed by libcalls. We
7533 don't want to use TARGET for anything but the final result;
7534 Intermediate values must go elsewhere. Additionally, calls to
7535 emit_block_move will be flagged with BLOCK_OP_CALL_PARM.
7537 If EXP is a VAR_DECL whose DECL_RTL was a MEM with an invalid
7538 address, and ALT_RTL is non-NULL, then *ALT_RTL is set to the
7539 DECL_RTL of the VAR_DECL. *ALT_RTL is also set if EXP is a
7540 COMPOUND_EXPR whose second argument is such a VAR_DECL, and so on
7544 expand_expr_real (tree exp
, rtx target
, enum machine_mode tmode
,
7545 enum expand_modifier modifier
, rtx
*alt_rtl
)
7549 /* Handle ERROR_MARK before anybody tries to access its type. */
7550 if (TREE_CODE (exp
) == ERROR_MARK
7551 || (TREE_CODE (TREE_TYPE (exp
)) == ERROR_MARK
))
7553 ret
= CONST0_RTX (tmode
);
7554 return ret
? ret
: const0_rtx
;
7557 /* If this is an expression of some kind and it has an associated line
7558 number, then emit the line number before expanding the expression.
7560 We need to save and restore the file and line information so that
7561 errors discovered during expansion are emitted with the right
7562 information. It would be better of the diagnostic routines
7563 used the file/line information embedded in the tree nodes rather
7565 if (cfun
&& EXPR_HAS_LOCATION (exp
))
7567 location_t saved_location
= input_location
;
7568 location_t saved_curr_loc
= get_curr_insn_source_location ();
7569 tree saved_block
= get_curr_insn_block ();
7570 input_location
= EXPR_LOCATION (exp
);
7571 set_curr_insn_source_location (input_location
);
7573 /* Record where the insns produced belong. */
7574 set_curr_insn_block (TREE_BLOCK (exp
));
7576 ret
= expand_expr_real_1 (exp
, target
, tmode
, modifier
, alt_rtl
);
7578 input_location
= saved_location
;
7579 set_curr_insn_block (saved_block
);
7580 set_curr_insn_source_location (saved_curr_loc
);
7584 ret
= expand_expr_real_1 (exp
, target
, tmode
, modifier
, alt_rtl
);
7591 expand_expr_real_2 (sepops ops
, rtx target
, enum machine_mode tmode
,
7592 enum expand_modifier modifier
)
7594 rtx op0
, op1
, op2
, temp
;
7597 enum machine_mode mode
;
7598 enum tree_code code
= ops
->code
;
7600 rtx subtarget
, original_target
;
7602 bool reduce_bit_field
;
7603 location_t loc
= ops
->location
;
7604 tree treeop0
, treeop1
, treeop2
;
7605 #define REDUCE_BIT_FIELD(expr) (reduce_bit_field \
7606 ? reduce_to_bit_field_precision ((expr), \
7612 mode
= TYPE_MODE (type
);
7613 unsignedp
= TYPE_UNSIGNED (type
);
7619 /* We should be called only on simple (binary or unary) expressions,
7620 exactly those that are valid in gimple expressions that aren't
7621 GIMPLE_SINGLE_RHS (or invalid). */
7622 gcc_assert (get_gimple_rhs_class (code
) == GIMPLE_UNARY_RHS
7623 || get_gimple_rhs_class (code
) == GIMPLE_BINARY_RHS
7624 || get_gimple_rhs_class (code
) == GIMPLE_TERNARY_RHS
);
7626 ignore
= (target
== const0_rtx
7627 || ((CONVERT_EXPR_CODE_P (code
)
7628 || code
== COND_EXPR
|| code
== VIEW_CONVERT_EXPR
)
7629 && TREE_CODE (type
) == VOID_TYPE
));
7631 /* We should be called only if we need the result. */
7632 gcc_assert (!ignore
);
7634 /* An operation in what may be a bit-field type needs the
7635 result to be reduced to the precision of the bit-field type,
7636 which is narrower than that of the type's mode. */
7637 reduce_bit_field
= (INTEGRAL_TYPE_P (type
)
7638 && GET_MODE_PRECISION (mode
) > TYPE_PRECISION (type
));
7640 if (reduce_bit_field
&& modifier
== EXPAND_STACK_PARM
)
7643 /* Use subtarget as the target for operand 0 of a binary operation. */
7644 subtarget
= get_subtarget (target
);
7645 original_target
= target
;
7649 case NON_LVALUE_EXPR
:
7652 if (treeop0
== error_mark_node
)
7655 if (TREE_CODE (type
) == UNION_TYPE
)
7657 tree valtype
= TREE_TYPE (treeop0
);
7659 /* If both input and output are BLKmode, this conversion isn't doing
7660 anything except possibly changing memory attribute. */
7661 if (mode
== BLKmode
&& TYPE_MODE (valtype
) == BLKmode
)
7663 rtx result
= expand_expr (treeop0
, target
, tmode
,
7666 result
= copy_rtx (result
);
7667 set_mem_attributes (result
, type
, 0);
7673 if (TYPE_MODE (type
) != BLKmode
)
7674 target
= gen_reg_rtx (TYPE_MODE (type
));
7676 target
= assign_temp (type
, 0, 1, 1);
7680 /* Store data into beginning of memory target. */
7681 store_expr (treeop0
,
7682 adjust_address (target
, TYPE_MODE (valtype
), 0),
7683 modifier
== EXPAND_STACK_PARM
,
7688 gcc_assert (REG_P (target
));
7690 /* Store this field into a union of the proper type. */
7691 store_field (target
,
7692 MIN ((int_size_in_bytes (TREE_TYPE
7695 (HOST_WIDE_INT
) GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode
)),
7696 0, 0, 0, TYPE_MODE (valtype
), treeop0
,
7700 /* Return the entire union. */
7704 if (mode
== TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (treeop0
)))
7706 op0
= expand_expr (treeop0
, target
, VOIDmode
,
7709 /* If the signedness of the conversion differs and OP0 is
7710 a promoted SUBREG, clear that indication since we now
7711 have to do the proper extension. */
7712 if (TYPE_UNSIGNED (TREE_TYPE (treeop0
)) != unsignedp
7713 && GET_CODE (op0
) == SUBREG
)
7714 SUBREG_PROMOTED_VAR_P (op0
) = 0;
7716 return REDUCE_BIT_FIELD (op0
);
7719 op0
= expand_expr (treeop0
, NULL_RTX
, mode
,
7720 modifier
== EXPAND_SUM
? EXPAND_NORMAL
: modifier
);
7721 if (GET_MODE (op0
) == mode
)
7724 /* If OP0 is a constant, just convert it into the proper mode. */
7725 else if (CONSTANT_P (op0
))
7727 tree inner_type
= TREE_TYPE (treeop0
);
7728 enum machine_mode inner_mode
= GET_MODE (op0
);
7730 if (inner_mode
== VOIDmode
)
7731 inner_mode
= TYPE_MODE (inner_type
);
7733 if (modifier
== EXPAND_INITIALIZER
)
7734 op0
= simplify_gen_subreg (mode
, op0
, inner_mode
,
7735 subreg_lowpart_offset (mode
,
7738 op0
= convert_modes (mode
, inner_mode
, op0
,
7739 TYPE_UNSIGNED (inner_type
));
7742 else if (modifier
== EXPAND_INITIALIZER
)
7743 op0
= gen_rtx_fmt_e (unsignedp
? ZERO_EXTEND
: SIGN_EXTEND
, mode
, op0
);
7745 else if (target
== 0)
7746 op0
= convert_to_mode (mode
, op0
,
7747 TYPE_UNSIGNED (TREE_TYPE
7751 convert_move (target
, op0
,
7752 TYPE_UNSIGNED (TREE_TYPE (treeop0
)));
7756 return REDUCE_BIT_FIELD (op0
);
7758 case ADDR_SPACE_CONVERT_EXPR
:
7760 tree treeop0_type
= TREE_TYPE (treeop0
);
7762 addr_space_t as_from
;
7764 gcc_assert (POINTER_TYPE_P (type
));
7765 gcc_assert (POINTER_TYPE_P (treeop0_type
));
7767 as_to
= TYPE_ADDR_SPACE (TREE_TYPE (type
));
7768 as_from
= TYPE_ADDR_SPACE (TREE_TYPE (treeop0_type
));
7770 /* Conversions between pointers to the same address space should
7771 have been implemented via CONVERT_EXPR / NOP_EXPR. */
7772 gcc_assert (as_to
!= as_from
);
7774 /* Ask target code to handle conversion between pointers
7775 to overlapping address spaces. */
7776 if (targetm
.addr_space
.subset_p (as_to
, as_from
)
7777 || targetm
.addr_space
.subset_p (as_from
, as_to
))
7779 op0
= expand_expr (treeop0
, NULL_RTX
, VOIDmode
, modifier
);
7780 op0
= targetm
.addr_space
.convert (op0
, treeop0_type
, type
);
7785 /* For disjoint address spaces, converting anything but
7786 a null pointer invokes undefined behaviour. We simply
7787 always return a null pointer here. */
7788 return CONST0_RTX (mode
);
7791 case POINTER_PLUS_EXPR
:
7792 /* Even though the sizetype mode and the pointer's mode can be different
7793 expand is able to handle this correctly and get the correct result out
7794 of the PLUS_EXPR code. */
7795 /* Make sure to sign-extend the sizetype offset in a POINTER_PLUS_EXPR
7796 if sizetype precision is smaller than pointer precision. */
7797 if (TYPE_PRECISION (sizetype
) < TYPE_PRECISION (type
))
7798 treeop1
= fold_convert_loc (loc
, type
,
7799 fold_convert_loc (loc
, ssizetype
,
7802 /* If we are adding a constant, a VAR_DECL that is sp, fp, or ap, and
7803 something else, make sure we add the register to the constant and
7804 then to the other thing. This case can occur during strength
7805 reduction and doing it this way will produce better code if the
7806 frame pointer or argument pointer is eliminated.
7808 fold-const.c will ensure that the constant is always in the inner
7809 PLUS_EXPR, so the only case we need to do anything about is if
7810 sp, ap, or fp is our second argument, in which case we must swap
7811 the innermost first argument and our second argument. */
7813 if (TREE_CODE (treeop0
) == PLUS_EXPR
7814 && TREE_CODE (TREE_OPERAND (treeop0
, 1)) == INTEGER_CST
7815 && TREE_CODE (treeop1
) == VAR_DECL
7816 && (DECL_RTL (treeop1
) == frame_pointer_rtx
7817 || DECL_RTL (treeop1
) == stack_pointer_rtx
7818 || DECL_RTL (treeop1
) == arg_pointer_rtx
))
7822 treeop1
= TREE_OPERAND (treeop0
, 0);
7823 TREE_OPERAND (treeop0
, 0) = t
;
7826 /* If the result is to be ptr_mode and we are adding an integer to
7827 something, we might be forming a constant. So try to use
7828 plus_constant. If it produces a sum and we can't accept it,
7829 use force_operand. This allows P = &ARR[const] to generate
7830 efficient code on machines where a SYMBOL_REF is not a valid
7833 If this is an EXPAND_SUM call, always return the sum. */
7834 if (modifier
== EXPAND_SUM
|| modifier
== EXPAND_INITIALIZER
7835 || (mode
== ptr_mode
&& (unsignedp
|| ! flag_trapv
)))
7837 if (modifier
== EXPAND_STACK_PARM
)
7839 if (TREE_CODE (treeop0
) == INTEGER_CST
7840 && GET_MODE_PRECISION (mode
) <= HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT
7841 && TREE_CONSTANT (treeop1
))
7845 op1
= expand_expr (treeop1
, subtarget
, VOIDmode
,
7847 /* Use immed_double_const to ensure that the constant is
7848 truncated according to the mode of OP1, then sign extended
7849 to a HOST_WIDE_INT. Using the constant directly can result
7850 in non-canonical RTL in a 64x32 cross compile. */
7852 = immed_double_const (TREE_INT_CST_LOW (treeop0
),
7854 TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (treeop1
)));
7855 op1
= plus_constant (op1
, INTVAL (constant_part
));
7856 if (modifier
!= EXPAND_SUM
&& modifier
!= EXPAND_INITIALIZER
)
7857 op1
= force_operand (op1
, target
);
7858 return REDUCE_BIT_FIELD (op1
);
7861 else if (TREE_CODE (treeop1
) == INTEGER_CST
7862 && GET_MODE_PRECISION (mode
) <= HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT
7863 && TREE_CONSTANT (treeop0
))
7867 op0
= expand_expr (treeop0
, subtarget
, VOIDmode
,
7868 (modifier
== EXPAND_INITIALIZER
7869 ? EXPAND_INITIALIZER
: EXPAND_SUM
));
7870 if (! CONSTANT_P (op0
))
7872 op1
= expand_expr (treeop1
, NULL_RTX
,
7873 VOIDmode
, modifier
);
7874 /* Return a PLUS if modifier says it's OK. */
7875 if (modifier
== EXPAND_SUM
7876 || modifier
== EXPAND_INITIALIZER
)
7877 return simplify_gen_binary (PLUS
, mode
, op0
, op1
);
7880 /* Use immed_double_const to ensure that the constant is
7881 truncated according to the mode of OP1, then sign extended
7882 to a HOST_WIDE_INT. Using the constant directly can result
7883 in non-canonical RTL in a 64x32 cross compile. */
7885 = immed_double_const (TREE_INT_CST_LOW (treeop1
),
7887 TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (treeop0
)));
7888 op0
= plus_constant (op0
, INTVAL (constant_part
));
7889 if (modifier
!= EXPAND_SUM
&& modifier
!= EXPAND_INITIALIZER
)
7890 op0
= force_operand (op0
, target
);
7891 return REDUCE_BIT_FIELD (op0
);
7895 /* Use TER to expand pointer addition of a negated value
7896 as pointer subtraction. */
7897 if ((POINTER_TYPE_P (TREE_TYPE (treeop0
))
7898 || (TREE_CODE (TREE_TYPE (treeop0
)) == VECTOR_TYPE
7899 && POINTER_TYPE_P (TREE_TYPE (TREE_TYPE (treeop0
)))))
7900 && TREE_CODE (treeop1
) == SSA_NAME
7901 && TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (treeop0
))
7902 == TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (treeop1
)))
7904 gimple def
= get_def_for_expr (treeop1
, NEGATE_EXPR
);
7907 treeop1
= gimple_assign_rhs1 (def
);
7913 /* No sense saving up arithmetic to be done
7914 if it's all in the wrong mode to form part of an address.
7915 And force_operand won't know whether to sign-extend or
7917 if ((modifier
!= EXPAND_SUM
&& modifier
!= EXPAND_INITIALIZER
)
7918 || mode
!= ptr_mode
)
7920 expand_operands (treeop0
, treeop1
,
7921 subtarget
, &op0
, &op1
, EXPAND_NORMAL
);
7922 if (op0
== const0_rtx
)
7924 if (op1
== const0_rtx
)
7929 expand_operands (treeop0
, treeop1
,
7930 subtarget
, &op0
, &op1
, modifier
);
7931 return REDUCE_BIT_FIELD (simplify_gen_binary (PLUS
, mode
, op0
, op1
));
7935 /* For initializers, we are allowed to return a MINUS of two
7936 symbolic constants. Here we handle all cases when both operands
7938 /* Handle difference of two symbolic constants,
7939 for the sake of an initializer. */
7940 if ((modifier
== EXPAND_SUM
|| modifier
== EXPAND_INITIALIZER
)
7941 && really_constant_p (treeop0
)
7942 && really_constant_p (treeop1
))
7944 expand_operands (treeop0
, treeop1
,
7945 NULL_RTX
, &op0
, &op1
, modifier
);
7947 /* If the last operand is a CONST_INT, use plus_constant of
7948 the negated constant. Else make the MINUS. */
7949 if (CONST_INT_P (op1
))
7950 return REDUCE_BIT_FIELD (plus_constant (op0
, - INTVAL (op1
)));
7952 return REDUCE_BIT_FIELD (gen_rtx_MINUS (mode
, op0
, op1
));
7955 /* No sense saving up arithmetic to be done
7956 if it's all in the wrong mode to form part of an address.
7957 And force_operand won't know whether to sign-extend or
7959 if ((modifier
!= EXPAND_SUM
&& modifier
!= EXPAND_INITIALIZER
)
7960 || mode
!= ptr_mode
)
7963 expand_operands (treeop0
, treeop1
,
7964 subtarget
, &op0
, &op1
, modifier
);
7966 /* Convert A - const to A + (-const). */
7967 if (CONST_INT_P (op1
))
7969 op1
= negate_rtx (mode
, op1
);
7970 return REDUCE_BIT_FIELD (simplify_gen_binary (PLUS
, mode
, op0
, op1
));
7975 case WIDEN_MULT_PLUS_EXPR
:
7976 case WIDEN_MULT_MINUS_EXPR
:
7977 expand_operands (treeop0
, treeop1
, NULL_RTX
, &op0
, &op1
, EXPAND_NORMAL
);
7978 op2
= expand_normal (treeop2
);
7979 target
= expand_widen_pattern_expr (ops
, op0
, op1
, op2
,
7983 case WIDEN_MULT_EXPR
:
7984 /* If first operand is constant, swap them.
7985 Thus the following special case checks need only
7986 check the second operand. */
7987 if (TREE_CODE (treeop0
) == INTEGER_CST
)
7994 /* First, check if we have a multiplication of one signed and one
7995 unsigned operand. */
7996 if (TREE_CODE (treeop1
) != INTEGER_CST
7997 && (TYPE_UNSIGNED (TREE_TYPE (treeop0
))
7998 != TYPE_UNSIGNED (TREE_TYPE (treeop1
))))
8000 enum machine_mode innermode
= TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (treeop0
));
8001 this_optab
= usmul_widen_optab
;
8002 if (mode
== GET_MODE_2XWIDER_MODE (innermode
))
8004 if (optab_handler (this_optab
, mode
) != CODE_FOR_nothing
)
8006 if (TYPE_UNSIGNED (TREE_TYPE (treeop0
)))
8007 expand_operands (treeop0
, treeop1
, NULL_RTX
, &op0
, &op1
,
8010 expand_operands (treeop0
, treeop1
, NULL_RTX
, &op1
, &op0
,
8016 /* Check for a multiplication with matching signedness. */
8017 else if ((TREE_CODE (treeop1
) == INTEGER_CST
8018 && int_fits_type_p (treeop1
, TREE_TYPE (treeop0
)))
8019 || (TYPE_UNSIGNED (TREE_TYPE (treeop1
))
8020 == TYPE_UNSIGNED (TREE_TYPE (treeop0
))))
8022 tree op0type
= TREE_TYPE (treeop0
);
8023 enum machine_mode innermode
= TYPE_MODE (op0type
);
8024 bool zextend_p
= TYPE_UNSIGNED (op0type
);
8025 optab other_optab
= zextend_p
? smul_widen_optab
: umul_widen_optab
;
8026 this_optab
= zextend_p
? umul_widen_optab
: smul_widen_optab
;
8028 if (mode
== GET_MODE_2XWIDER_MODE (innermode
)
8029 && TREE_CODE (treeop0
) != INTEGER_CST
)
8031 if (optab_handler (this_optab
, mode
) != CODE_FOR_nothing
)
8033 expand_operands (treeop0
, treeop1
, NULL_RTX
, &op0
, &op1
,
8035 temp
= expand_widening_mult (mode
, op0
, op1
, target
,
8036 unsignedp
, this_optab
);
8037 return REDUCE_BIT_FIELD (temp
);
8039 if (optab_handler (other_optab
, mode
) != CODE_FOR_nothing
8040 && innermode
== word_mode
)
8043 op0
= expand_normal (treeop0
);
8044 if (TREE_CODE (treeop1
) == INTEGER_CST
)
8045 op1
= convert_modes (innermode
, mode
,
8046 expand_normal (treeop1
), unsignedp
);
8048 op1
= expand_normal (treeop1
);
8049 temp
= expand_binop (mode
, other_optab
, op0
, op1
, target
,
8050 unsignedp
, OPTAB_LIB_WIDEN
);
8051 hipart
= gen_highpart (innermode
, temp
);
8052 htem
= expand_mult_highpart_adjust (innermode
, hipart
,
8056 emit_move_insn (hipart
, htem
);
8057 return REDUCE_BIT_FIELD (temp
);
8061 treeop0
= fold_build1 (CONVERT_EXPR
, type
, treeop0
);
8062 treeop1
= fold_build1 (CONVERT_EXPR
, type
, treeop1
);
8063 expand_operands (treeop0
, treeop1
, subtarget
, &op0
, &op1
, EXPAND_NORMAL
);
8064 return REDUCE_BIT_FIELD (expand_mult (mode
, op0
, op1
, target
, unsignedp
));
8068 optab opt
= fma_optab
;
8071 /* If there is no insn for FMA, emit it as __builtin_fma{,f,l}
8073 if (optab_handler (fma_optab
, mode
) == CODE_FOR_nothing
)
8075 tree fn
= mathfn_built_in (TREE_TYPE (treeop0
), BUILT_IN_FMA
);
8078 gcc_assert (fn
!= NULL_TREE
);
8079 call_expr
= build_call_expr (fn
, 3, treeop0
, treeop1
, treeop2
);
8080 return expand_builtin (call_expr
, target
, subtarget
, mode
, false);
8083 def0
= get_def_for_expr (treeop0
, NEGATE_EXPR
);
8084 def2
= get_def_for_expr (treeop2
, NEGATE_EXPR
);
8089 && optab_handler (fnms_optab
, mode
) != CODE_FOR_nothing
)
8092 op0
= expand_normal (gimple_assign_rhs1 (def0
));
8093 op2
= expand_normal (gimple_assign_rhs1 (def2
));
8096 && optab_handler (fnma_optab
, mode
) != CODE_FOR_nothing
)
8099 op0
= expand_normal (gimple_assign_rhs1 (def0
));
8102 && optab_handler (fms_optab
, mode
) != CODE_FOR_nothing
)
8105 op2
= expand_normal (gimple_assign_rhs1 (def2
));
8109 op0
= expand_expr (treeop0
, subtarget
, VOIDmode
, EXPAND_NORMAL
);
8111 op2
= expand_normal (treeop2
);
8112 op1
= expand_normal (treeop1
);
8114 return expand_ternary_op (TYPE_MODE (type
), opt
,
8115 op0
, op1
, op2
, target
, 0);
8119 /* If this is a fixed-point operation, then we cannot use the code
8120 below because "expand_mult" doesn't support sat/no-sat fixed-point
8122 if (ALL_FIXED_POINT_MODE_P (mode
))
8125 /* If first operand is constant, swap them.
8126 Thus the following special case checks need only
8127 check the second operand. */
8128 if (TREE_CODE (treeop0
) == INTEGER_CST
)
8135 /* Attempt to return something suitable for generating an
8136 indexed address, for machines that support that. */
8138 if (modifier
== EXPAND_SUM
&& mode
== ptr_mode
8139 && host_integerp (treeop1
, 0))
8141 tree exp1
= treeop1
;
8143 op0
= expand_expr (treeop0
, subtarget
, VOIDmode
,
8147 op0
= force_operand (op0
, NULL_RTX
);
8149 op0
= copy_to_mode_reg (mode
, op0
);
8151 return REDUCE_BIT_FIELD (gen_rtx_MULT (mode
, op0
,
8152 gen_int_mode (tree_low_cst (exp1
, 0),
8153 TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (exp1
)))));
8156 if (modifier
== EXPAND_STACK_PARM
)
8159 expand_operands (treeop0
, treeop1
, subtarget
, &op0
, &op1
, EXPAND_NORMAL
);
8160 return REDUCE_BIT_FIELD (expand_mult (mode
, op0
, op1
, target
, unsignedp
));
8162 case TRUNC_DIV_EXPR
:
8163 case FLOOR_DIV_EXPR
:
8165 case ROUND_DIV_EXPR
:
8166 case EXACT_DIV_EXPR
:
8167 /* If this is a fixed-point operation, then we cannot use the code
8168 below because "expand_divmod" doesn't support sat/no-sat fixed-point
8170 if (ALL_FIXED_POINT_MODE_P (mode
))
8173 if (modifier
== EXPAND_STACK_PARM
)
8175 /* Possible optimization: compute the dividend with EXPAND_SUM
8176 then if the divisor is constant can optimize the case
8177 where some terms of the dividend have coeffs divisible by it. */
8178 expand_operands (treeop0
, treeop1
,
8179 subtarget
, &op0
, &op1
, EXPAND_NORMAL
);
8180 return expand_divmod (0, code
, mode
, op0
, op1
, target
, unsignedp
);
8185 case TRUNC_MOD_EXPR
:
8186 case FLOOR_MOD_EXPR
:
8188 case ROUND_MOD_EXPR
:
8189 if (modifier
== EXPAND_STACK_PARM
)
8191 expand_operands (treeop0
, treeop1
,
8192 subtarget
, &op0
, &op1
, EXPAND_NORMAL
);
8193 return expand_divmod (1, code
, mode
, op0
, op1
, target
, unsignedp
);
8195 case FIXED_CONVERT_EXPR
:
8196 op0
= expand_normal (treeop0
);
8197 if (target
== 0 || modifier
== EXPAND_STACK_PARM
)
8198 target
= gen_reg_rtx (mode
);
8200 if ((TREE_CODE (TREE_TYPE (treeop0
)) == INTEGER_TYPE
8201 && TYPE_UNSIGNED (TREE_TYPE (treeop0
)))
8202 || (TREE_CODE (type
) == INTEGER_TYPE
&& TYPE_UNSIGNED (type
)))
8203 expand_fixed_convert (target
, op0
, 1, TYPE_SATURATING (type
));
8205 expand_fixed_convert (target
, op0
, 0, TYPE_SATURATING (type
));
8208 case FIX_TRUNC_EXPR
:
8209 op0
= expand_normal (treeop0
);
8210 if (target
== 0 || modifier
== EXPAND_STACK_PARM
)
8211 target
= gen_reg_rtx (mode
);
8212 expand_fix (target
, op0
, unsignedp
);
8216 op0
= expand_normal (treeop0
);
8217 if (target
== 0 || modifier
== EXPAND_STACK_PARM
)
8218 target
= gen_reg_rtx (mode
);
8219 /* expand_float can't figure out what to do if FROM has VOIDmode.
8220 So give it the correct mode. With -O, cse will optimize this. */
8221 if (GET_MODE (op0
) == VOIDmode
)
8222 op0
= copy_to_mode_reg (TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (treeop0
)),
8224 expand_float (target
, op0
,
8225 TYPE_UNSIGNED (TREE_TYPE (treeop0
)));
8229 op0
= expand_expr (treeop0
, subtarget
,
8230 VOIDmode
, EXPAND_NORMAL
);
8231 if (modifier
== EXPAND_STACK_PARM
)
8233 temp
= expand_unop (mode
,
8234 optab_for_tree_code (NEGATE_EXPR
, type
,
8238 return REDUCE_BIT_FIELD (temp
);
8241 op0
= expand_expr (treeop0
, subtarget
,
8242 VOIDmode
, EXPAND_NORMAL
);
8243 if (modifier
== EXPAND_STACK_PARM
)
8246 /* ABS_EXPR is not valid for complex arguments. */
8247 gcc_assert (GET_MODE_CLASS (mode
) != MODE_COMPLEX_INT
8248 && GET_MODE_CLASS (mode
) != MODE_COMPLEX_FLOAT
);
8250 /* Unsigned abs is simply the operand. Testing here means we don't
8251 risk generating incorrect code below. */
8252 if (TYPE_UNSIGNED (type
))
8255 return expand_abs (mode
, op0
, target
, unsignedp
,
8256 safe_from_p (target
, treeop0
, 1));
8260 target
= original_target
;
8262 || modifier
== EXPAND_STACK_PARM
8263 || (MEM_P (target
) && MEM_VOLATILE_P (target
))
8264 || GET_MODE (target
) != mode
8266 && REGNO (target
) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
))
8267 target
= gen_reg_rtx (mode
);
8268 expand_operands (treeop0
, treeop1
,
8269 target
, &op0
, &op1
, EXPAND_NORMAL
);
8271 /* First try to do it with a special MIN or MAX instruction.
8272 If that does not win, use a conditional jump to select the proper
8274 this_optab
= optab_for_tree_code (code
, type
, optab_default
);
8275 temp
= expand_binop (mode
, this_optab
, op0
, op1
, target
, unsignedp
,
8280 /* At this point, a MEM target is no longer useful; we will get better
8283 if (! REG_P (target
))
8284 target
= gen_reg_rtx (mode
);
8286 /* If op1 was placed in target, swap op0 and op1. */
8287 if (target
!= op0
&& target
== op1
)
8294 /* We generate better code and avoid problems with op1 mentioning
8295 target by forcing op1 into a pseudo if it isn't a constant. */
8296 if (! CONSTANT_P (op1
))
8297 op1
= force_reg (mode
, op1
);
8300 enum rtx_code comparison_code
;
8303 if (code
== MAX_EXPR
)
8304 comparison_code
= unsignedp
? GEU
: GE
;
8306 comparison_code
= unsignedp
? LEU
: LE
;
8308 /* Canonicalize to comparisons against 0. */
8309 if (op1
== const1_rtx
)
8311 /* Converting (a >= 1 ? a : 1) into (a > 0 ? a : 1)
8312 or (a != 0 ? a : 1) for unsigned.
8313 For MIN we are safe converting (a <= 1 ? a : 1)
8314 into (a <= 0 ? a : 1) */
8315 cmpop1
= const0_rtx
;
8316 if (code
== MAX_EXPR
)
8317 comparison_code
= unsignedp
? NE
: GT
;
8319 if (op1
== constm1_rtx
&& !unsignedp
)
8321 /* Converting (a >= -1 ? a : -1) into (a >= 0 ? a : -1)
8322 and (a <= -1 ? a : -1) into (a < 0 ? a : -1) */
8323 cmpop1
= const0_rtx
;
8324 if (code
== MIN_EXPR
)
8325 comparison_code
= LT
;
8327 #ifdef HAVE_conditional_move
8328 /* Use a conditional move if possible. */
8329 if (can_conditionally_move_p (mode
))
8333 /* ??? Same problem as in expmed.c: emit_conditional_move
8334 forces a stack adjustment via compare_from_rtx, and we
8335 lose the stack adjustment if the sequence we are about
8336 to create is discarded. */
8337 do_pending_stack_adjust ();
8341 /* Try to emit the conditional move. */
8342 insn
= emit_conditional_move (target
, comparison_code
,
8347 /* If we could do the conditional move, emit the sequence,
8351 rtx seq
= get_insns ();
8357 /* Otherwise discard the sequence and fall back to code with
8363 emit_move_insn (target
, op0
);
8365 temp
= gen_label_rtx ();
8366 do_compare_rtx_and_jump (target
, cmpop1
, comparison_code
,
8367 unsignedp
, mode
, NULL_RTX
, NULL_RTX
, temp
,
8370 emit_move_insn (target
, op1
);
8375 op0
= expand_expr (treeop0
, subtarget
,
8376 VOIDmode
, EXPAND_NORMAL
);
8377 if (modifier
== EXPAND_STACK_PARM
)
8379 /* In case we have to reduce the result to bitfield precision
8380 expand this as XOR with a proper constant instead. */
8381 if (reduce_bit_field
)
8382 temp
= expand_binop (mode
, xor_optab
, op0
,
8383 immed_double_int_const
8384 (double_int_mask (TYPE_PRECISION (type
)), mode
),
8385 target
, 1, OPTAB_LIB_WIDEN
);
8387 temp
= expand_unop (mode
, one_cmpl_optab
, op0
, target
, 1);
8391 /* ??? Can optimize bitwise operations with one arg constant.
8392 Can optimize (a bitwise1 n) bitwise2 (a bitwise3 b)
8393 and (a bitwise1 b) bitwise2 b (etc)
8394 but that is probably not worth while. */
8403 gcc_assert (VECTOR_MODE_P (TYPE_MODE (type
))
8404 || (GET_MODE_PRECISION (TYPE_MODE (type
))
8405 == TYPE_PRECISION (type
)));
8410 /* If this is a fixed-point operation, then we cannot use the code
8411 below because "expand_shift" doesn't support sat/no-sat fixed-point
8413 if (ALL_FIXED_POINT_MODE_P (mode
))
8416 if (! safe_from_p (subtarget
, treeop1
, 1))
8418 if (modifier
== EXPAND_STACK_PARM
)
8420 op0
= expand_expr (treeop0
, subtarget
,
8421 VOIDmode
, EXPAND_NORMAL
);
8422 temp
= expand_variable_shift (code
, mode
, op0
, treeop1
, target
,
8424 if (code
== LSHIFT_EXPR
)
8425 temp
= REDUCE_BIT_FIELD (temp
);
8428 /* Could determine the answer when only additive constants differ. Also,
8429 the addition of one can be handled by changing the condition. */
8436 case UNORDERED_EXPR
:
8444 temp
= do_store_flag (ops
,
8445 modifier
!= EXPAND_STACK_PARM
? target
: NULL_RTX
,
8446 tmode
!= VOIDmode
? tmode
: mode
);
8450 /* Use a compare and a jump for BLKmode comparisons, or for function
8451 type comparisons is HAVE_canonicalize_funcptr_for_compare. */
8454 || modifier
== EXPAND_STACK_PARM
8455 || ! safe_from_p (target
, treeop0
, 1)
8456 || ! safe_from_p (target
, treeop1
, 1)
8457 /* Make sure we don't have a hard reg (such as function's return
8458 value) live across basic blocks, if not optimizing. */
8459 || (!optimize
&& REG_P (target
)
8460 && REGNO (target
) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
)))
8461 target
= gen_reg_rtx (tmode
!= VOIDmode
? tmode
: mode
);
8463 emit_move_insn (target
, const0_rtx
);
8465 op1
= gen_label_rtx ();
8466 jumpifnot_1 (code
, treeop0
, treeop1
, op1
, -1);
8468 if (TYPE_PRECISION (type
) == 1 && !TYPE_UNSIGNED (type
))
8469 emit_move_insn (target
, constm1_rtx
);
8471 emit_move_insn (target
, const1_rtx
);
8477 /* Get the rtx code of the operands. */
8478 op0
= expand_normal (treeop0
);
8479 op1
= expand_normal (treeop1
);
8482 target
= gen_reg_rtx (TYPE_MODE (type
));
8484 /* Move the real (op0) and imaginary (op1) parts to their location. */
8485 write_complex_part (target
, op0
, false);
8486 write_complex_part (target
, op1
, true);
8490 case WIDEN_SUM_EXPR
:
8492 tree oprnd0
= treeop0
;
8493 tree oprnd1
= treeop1
;
8495 expand_operands (oprnd0
, oprnd1
, NULL_RTX
, &op0
, &op1
, EXPAND_NORMAL
);
8496 target
= expand_widen_pattern_expr (ops
, op0
, NULL_RTX
, op1
,
8501 case REDUC_MAX_EXPR
:
8502 case REDUC_MIN_EXPR
:
8503 case REDUC_PLUS_EXPR
:
8505 op0
= expand_normal (treeop0
);
8506 this_optab
= optab_for_tree_code (code
, type
, optab_default
);
8507 temp
= expand_unop (mode
, this_optab
, op0
, target
, unsignedp
);
8512 case VEC_EXTRACT_EVEN_EXPR
:
8513 case VEC_EXTRACT_ODD_EXPR
:
8515 expand_operands (treeop0
, treeop1
,
8516 NULL_RTX
, &op0
, &op1
, EXPAND_NORMAL
);
8517 this_optab
= optab_for_tree_code (code
, type
, optab_default
);
8518 temp
= expand_binop (mode
, this_optab
, op0
, op1
, target
, unsignedp
,
8524 case VEC_INTERLEAVE_HIGH_EXPR
:
8525 case VEC_INTERLEAVE_LOW_EXPR
:
8527 expand_operands (treeop0
, treeop1
,
8528 NULL_RTX
, &op0
, &op1
, EXPAND_NORMAL
);
8529 this_optab
= optab_for_tree_code (code
, type
, optab_default
);
8530 temp
= expand_binop (mode
, this_optab
, op0
, op1
, target
, unsignedp
,
8536 case VEC_LSHIFT_EXPR
:
8537 case VEC_RSHIFT_EXPR
:
8539 target
= expand_vec_shift_expr (ops
, target
);
8543 case VEC_UNPACK_HI_EXPR
:
8544 case VEC_UNPACK_LO_EXPR
:
8546 op0
= expand_normal (treeop0
);
8547 temp
= expand_widen_pattern_expr (ops
, op0
, NULL_RTX
, NULL_RTX
,
8553 case VEC_UNPACK_FLOAT_HI_EXPR
:
8554 case VEC_UNPACK_FLOAT_LO_EXPR
:
8556 op0
= expand_normal (treeop0
);
8557 /* The signedness is determined from input operand. */
8558 temp
= expand_widen_pattern_expr
8559 (ops
, op0
, NULL_RTX
, NULL_RTX
,
8560 target
, TYPE_UNSIGNED (TREE_TYPE (treeop0
)));
8566 case VEC_WIDEN_MULT_HI_EXPR
:
8567 case VEC_WIDEN_MULT_LO_EXPR
:
8569 tree oprnd0
= treeop0
;
8570 tree oprnd1
= treeop1
;
8572 expand_operands (oprnd0
, oprnd1
, NULL_RTX
, &op0
, &op1
, EXPAND_NORMAL
);
8573 target
= expand_widen_pattern_expr (ops
, op0
, op1
, NULL_RTX
,
8575 gcc_assert (target
);
8579 case VEC_PACK_TRUNC_EXPR
:
8580 case VEC_PACK_SAT_EXPR
:
8581 case VEC_PACK_FIX_TRUNC_EXPR
:
8582 mode
= TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (treeop0
));
8587 tree oprnd0
= treeop0
;
8588 tree oprnd1
= treeop1
;
8589 tree oprnd2
= treeop2
;
8592 expand_operands (oprnd0
, oprnd1
, NULL_RTX
, &op0
, &op1
, EXPAND_NORMAL
);
8593 op2
= expand_normal (oprnd2
);
8594 target
= expand_widen_pattern_expr (ops
, op0
, op1
, op2
,
8599 case REALIGN_LOAD_EXPR
:
8601 tree oprnd0
= treeop0
;
8602 tree oprnd1
= treeop1
;
8603 tree oprnd2
= treeop2
;
8606 this_optab
= optab_for_tree_code (code
, type
, optab_default
);
8607 expand_operands (oprnd0
, oprnd1
, NULL_RTX
, &op0
, &op1
, EXPAND_NORMAL
);
8608 op2
= expand_normal (oprnd2
);
8609 temp
= expand_ternary_op (mode
, this_optab
, op0
, op1
, op2
,
8619 /* Here to do an ordinary binary operator. */
8621 expand_operands (treeop0
, treeop1
,
8622 subtarget
, &op0
, &op1
, EXPAND_NORMAL
);
8624 this_optab
= optab_for_tree_code (code
, type
, optab_default
);
8626 if (modifier
== EXPAND_STACK_PARM
)
8628 temp
= expand_binop (mode
, this_optab
, op0
, op1
, target
,
8629 unsignedp
, OPTAB_LIB_WIDEN
);
8631 /* Bitwise operations do not need bitfield reduction as we expect their
8632 operands being properly truncated. */
8633 if (code
== BIT_XOR_EXPR
8634 || code
== BIT_AND_EXPR
8635 || code
== BIT_IOR_EXPR
)
8637 return REDUCE_BIT_FIELD (temp
);
8639 #undef REDUCE_BIT_FIELD
8642 expand_expr_real_1 (tree exp
, rtx target
, enum machine_mode tmode
,
8643 enum expand_modifier modifier
, rtx
*alt_rtl
)
8645 rtx op0
, op1
, temp
, decl_rtl
;
8648 enum machine_mode mode
;
8649 enum tree_code code
= TREE_CODE (exp
);
8650 rtx subtarget
, original_target
;
8653 bool reduce_bit_field
;
8654 location_t loc
= EXPR_LOCATION (exp
);
8655 struct separate_ops ops
;
8656 tree treeop0
, treeop1
, treeop2
;
8657 tree ssa_name
= NULL_TREE
;
8660 type
= TREE_TYPE (exp
);
8661 mode
= TYPE_MODE (type
);
8662 unsignedp
= TYPE_UNSIGNED (type
);
8664 treeop0
= treeop1
= treeop2
= NULL_TREE
;
8665 if (!VL_EXP_CLASS_P (exp
))
8666 switch (TREE_CODE_LENGTH (code
))
8669 case 3: treeop2
= TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 2);
8670 case 2: treeop1
= TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 1);
8671 case 1: treeop0
= TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0);
8681 ignore
= (target
== const0_rtx
8682 || ((CONVERT_EXPR_CODE_P (code
)
8683 || code
== COND_EXPR
|| code
== VIEW_CONVERT_EXPR
)
8684 && TREE_CODE (type
) == VOID_TYPE
));
8686 /* An operation in what may be a bit-field type needs the
8687 result to be reduced to the precision of the bit-field type,
8688 which is narrower than that of the type's mode. */
8689 reduce_bit_field
= (!ignore
8690 && INTEGRAL_TYPE_P (type
)
8691 && GET_MODE_PRECISION (mode
) > TYPE_PRECISION (type
));
8693 /* If we are going to ignore this result, we need only do something
8694 if there is a side-effect somewhere in the expression. If there
8695 is, short-circuit the most common cases here. Note that we must
8696 not call expand_expr with anything but const0_rtx in case this
8697 is an initial expansion of a size that contains a PLACEHOLDER_EXPR. */
8701 if (! TREE_SIDE_EFFECTS (exp
))
8704 /* Ensure we reference a volatile object even if value is ignored, but
8705 don't do this if all we are doing is taking its address. */
8706 if (TREE_THIS_VOLATILE (exp
)
8707 && TREE_CODE (exp
) != FUNCTION_DECL
8708 && mode
!= VOIDmode
&& mode
!= BLKmode
8709 && modifier
!= EXPAND_CONST_ADDRESS
)
8711 temp
= expand_expr (exp
, NULL_RTX
, VOIDmode
, modifier
);
8717 if (TREE_CODE_CLASS (code
) == tcc_unary
8718 || code
== COMPONENT_REF
|| code
== INDIRECT_REF
)
8719 return expand_expr (treeop0
, const0_rtx
, VOIDmode
,
8722 else if (TREE_CODE_CLASS (code
) == tcc_binary
8723 || TREE_CODE_CLASS (code
) == tcc_comparison
8724 || code
== ARRAY_REF
|| code
== ARRAY_RANGE_REF
)
8726 expand_expr (treeop0
, const0_rtx
, VOIDmode
, modifier
);
8727 expand_expr (treeop1
, const0_rtx
, VOIDmode
, modifier
);
8730 else if (code
== BIT_FIELD_REF
)
8732 expand_expr (treeop0
, const0_rtx
, VOIDmode
, modifier
);
8733 expand_expr (treeop1
, const0_rtx
, VOIDmode
, modifier
);
8734 expand_expr (treeop2
, const0_rtx
, VOIDmode
, modifier
);
8741 if (reduce_bit_field
&& modifier
== EXPAND_STACK_PARM
)
8744 /* Use subtarget as the target for operand 0 of a binary operation. */
8745 subtarget
= get_subtarget (target
);
8746 original_target
= target
;
8752 tree function
= decl_function_context (exp
);
8754 temp
= label_rtx (exp
);
8755 temp
= gen_rtx_LABEL_REF (Pmode
, temp
);
8757 if (function
!= current_function_decl
8759 LABEL_REF_NONLOCAL_P (temp
) = 1;
8761 temp
= gen_rtx_MEM (FUNCTION_MODE
, temp
);
8766 /* ??? ivopts calls expander, without any preparation from
8767 out-of-ssa. So fake instructions as if this was an access to the
8768 base variable. This unnecessarily allocates a pseudo, see how we can
8769 reuse it, if partition base vars have it set already. */
8770 if (!currently_expanding_to_rtl
)
8771 return expand_expr_real_1 (SSA_NAME_VAR (exp
), target
, tmode
, modifier
,
8774 g
= get_gimple_for_ssa_name (exp
);
8775 /* For EXPAND_INITIALIZER try harder to get something simpler. */
8777 && modifier
== EXPAND_INITIALIZER
8778 && !SSA_NAME_IS_DEFAULT_DEF (exp
)
8779 && (optimize
|| DECL_IGNORED_P (SSA_NAME_VAR (exp
)))
8780 && stmt_is_replaceable_p (SSA_NAME_DEF_STMT (exp
)))
8781 g
= SSA_NAME_DEF_STMT (exp
);
8783 return expand_expr_real (gimple_assign_rhs_to_tree (g
), target
, tmode
,
8787 decl_rtl
= get_rtx_for_ssa_name (ssa_name
);
8788 exp
= SSA_NAME_VAR (ssa_name
);
8789 goto expand_decl_rtl
;
8793 /* If a static var's type was incomplete when the decl was written,
8794 but the type is complete now, lay out the decl now. */
8795 if (DECL_SIZE (exp
) == 0
8796 && COMPLETE_OR_UNBOUND_ARRAY_TYPE_P (TREE_TYPE (exp
))
8797 && (TREE_STATIC (exp
) || DECL_EXTERNAL (exp
)))
8798 layout_decl (exp
, 0);
8800 /* ... fall through ... */
8804 decl_rtl
= DECL_RTL (exp
);
8806 gcc_assert (decl_rtl
);
8807 decl_rtl
= copy_rtx (decl_rtl
);
8808 /* Record writes to register variables. */
8809 if (modifier
== EXPAND_WRITE
8811 && HARD_REGISTER_P (decl_rtl
))
8812 add_to_hard_reg_set (&crtl
->asm_clobbers
,
8813 GET_MODE (decl_rtl
), REGNO (decl_rtl
));
8815 /* Ensure variable marked as used even if it doesn't go through
8816 a parser. If it hasn't be used yet, write out an external
8818 if (! TREE_USED (exp
))
8820 assemble_external (exp
);
8821 TREE_USED (exp
) = 1;
8824 /* Show we haven't gotten RTL for this yet. */
8827 /* Variables inherited from containing functions should have
8828 been lowered by this point. */
8829 context
= decl_function_context (exp
);
8830 gcc_assert (!context
8831 || context
== current_function_decl
8832 || TREE_STATIC (exp
)
8833 || DECL_EXTERNAL (exp
)
8834 /* ??? C++ creates functions that are not TREE_STATIC. */
8835 || TREE_CODE (exp
) == FUNCTION_DECL
);
8837 /* This is the case of an array whose size is to be determined
8838 from its initializer, while the initializer is still being parsed.
8841 if (MEM_P (decl_rtl
) && REG_P (XEXP (decl_rtl
, 0)))
8842 temp
= validize_mem (decl_rtl
);
8844 /* If DECL_RTL is memory, we are in the normal case and the
8845 address is not valid, get the address into a register. */
8847 else if (MEM_P (decl_rtl
) && modifier
!= EXPAND_INITIALIZER
)
8850 *alt_rtl
= decl_rtl
;
8851 decl_rtl
= use_anchored_address (decl_rtl
);
8852 if (modifier
!= EXPAND_CONST_ADDRESS
8853 && modifier
!= EXPAND_SUM
8854 && !memory_address_addr_space_p (DECL_MODE (exp
),
8856 MEM_ADDR_SPACE (decl_rtl
)))
8857 temp
= replace_equiv_address (decl_rtl
,
8858 copy_rtx (XEXP (decl_rtl
, 0)));
8861 /* If we got something, return it. But first, set the alignment
8862 if the address is a register. */
8865 if (MEM_P (temp
) && REG_P (XEXP (temp
, 0)))
8866 mark_reg_pointer (XEXP (temp
, 0), DECL_ALIGN (exp
));
8871 /* If the mode of DECL_RTL does not match that of the decl, it
8872 must be a promoted value. We return a SUBREG of the wanted mode,
8873 but mark it so that we know that it was already extended. */
8874 if (REG_P (decl_rtl
) && GET_MODE (decl_rtl
) != DECL_MODE (exp
))
8876 enum machine_mode pmode
;
8878 /* Get the signedness to be used for this variable. Ensure we get
8879 the same mode we got when the variable was declared. */
8880 if (code
== SSA_NAME
8881 && (g
= SSA_NAME_DEF_STMT (ssa_name
))
8882 && gimple_code (g
) == GIMPLE_CALL
)
8884 gcc_assert (!gimple_call_internal_p (g
));
8885 pmode
= promote_function_mode (type
, mode
, &unsignedp
,
8886 gimple_call_fntype (g
),
8890 pmode
= promote_decl_mode (exp
, &unsignedp
);
8891 gcc_assert (GET_MODE (decl_rtl
) == pmode
);
8893 temp
= gen_lowpart_SUBREG (mode
, decl_rtl
);
8894 SUBREG_PROMOTED_VAR_P (temp
) = 1;
8895 SUBREG_PROMOTED_UNSIGNED_SET (temp
, unsignedp
);
8902 temp
= immed_double_const (TREE_INT_CST_LOW (exp
),
8903 TREE_INT_CST_HIGH (exp
), mode
);
8909 tree tmp
= NULL_TREE
;
8910 if (GET_MODE_CLASS (mode
) == MODE_VECTOR_INT
8911 || GET_MODE_CLASS (mode
) == MODE_VECTOR_FLOAT
8912 || GET_MODE_CLASS (mode
) == MODE_VECTOR_FRACT
8913 || GET_MODE_CLASS (mode
) == MODE_VECTOR_UFRACT
8914 || GET_MODE_CLASS (mode
) == MODE_VECTOR_ACCUM
8915 || GET_MODE_CLASS (mode
) == MODE_VECTOR_UACCUM
)
8916 return const_vector_from_tree (exp
);
8917 if (GET_MODE_CLASS (mode
) == MODE_INT
)
8919 tree type_for_mode
= lang_hooks
.types
.type_for_mode (mode
, 1);
8921 tmp
= fold_unary_loc (loc
, VIEW_CONVERT_EXPR
, type_for_mode
, exp
);
8924 tmp
= build_constructor_from_list (type
,
8925 TREE_VECTOR_CST_ELTS (exp
));
8926 return expand_expr (tmp
, ignore
? const0_rtx
: target
,
8931 return expand_expr (DECL_INITIAL (exp
), target
, VOIDmode
, modifier
);
8934 /* If optimized, generate immediate CONST_DOUBLE
8935 which will be turned into memory by reload if necessary.
8937 We used to force a register so that loop.c could see it. But
8938 this does not allow gen_* patterns to perform optimizations with
8939 the constants. It also produces two insns in cases like "x = 1.0;".
8940 On most machines, floating-point constants are not permitted in
8941 many insns, so we'd end up copying it to a register in any case.
8943 Now, we do the copying in expand_binop, if appropriate. */
8944 return CONST_DOUBLE_FROM_REAL_VALUE (TREE_REAL_CST (exp
),
8945 TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (exp
)));
8948 return CONST_FIXED_FROM_FIXED_VALUE (TREE_FIXED_CST (exp
),
8949 TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (exp
)));
8952 /* Handle evaluating a complex constant in a CONCAT target. */
8953 if (original_target
&& GET_CODE (original_target
) == CONCAT
)
8955 enum machine_mode mode
= TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (TREE_TYPE (exp
)));
8958 rtarg
= XEXP (original_target
, 0);
8959 itarg
= XEXP (original_target
, 1);
8961 /* Move the real and imaginary parts separately. */
8962 op0
= expand_expr (TREE_REALPART (exp
), rtarg
, mode
, EXPAND_NORMAL
);
8963 op1
= expand_expr (TREE_IMAGPART (exp
), itarg
, mode
, EXPAND_NORMAL
);
8966 emit_move_insn (rtarg
, op0
);
8968 emit_move_insn (itarg
, op1
);
8970 return original_target
;
8973 /* ... fall through ... */
8976 temp
= expand_expr_constant (exp
, 1, modifier
);
8978 /* temp contains a constant address.
8979 On RISC machines where a constant address isn't valid,
8980 make some insns to get that address into a register. */
8981 if (modifier
!= EXPAND_CONST_ADDRESS
8982 && modifier
!= EXPAND_INITIALIZER
8983 && modifier
!= EXPAND_SUM
8984 && ! memory_address_addr_space_p (mode
, XEXP (temp
, 0),
8985 MEM_ADDR_SPACE (temp
)))
8986 return replace_equiv_address (temp
,
8987 copy_rtx (XEXP (temp
, 0)));
8993 rtx ret
= expand_expr_real_1 (val
, target
, tmode
, modifier
, alt_rtl
);
8995 if (!SAVE_EXPR_RESOLVED_P (exp
))
8997 /* We can indeed still hit this case, typically via builtin
8998 expanders calling save_expr immediately before expanding
8999 something. Assume this means that we only have to deal
9000 with non-BLKmode values. */
9001 gcc_assert (GET_MODE (ret
) != BLKmode
);
9003 val
= build_decl (EXPR_LOCATION (exp
),
9004 VAR_DECL
, NULL
, TREE_TYPE (exp
));
9005 DECL_ARTIFICIAL (val
) = 1;
9006 DECL_IGNORED_P (val
) = 1;
9008 TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0) = treeop0
;
9009 SAVE_EXPR_RESOLVED_P (exp
) = 1;
9011 if (!CONSTANT_P (ret
))
9012 ret
= copy_to_reg (ret
);
9013 SET_DECL_RTL (val
, ret
);
9021 /* If we don't need the result, just ensure we evaluate any
9025 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT idx
;
9028 FOR_EACH_CONSTRUCTOR_VALUE (CONSTRUCTOR_ELTS (exp
), idx
, value
)
9029 expand_expr (value
, const0_rtx
, VOIDmode
, EXPAND_NORMAL
);
9034 return expand_constructor (exp
, target
, modifier
, false);
9036 case TARGET_MEM_REF
:
9038 addr_space_t as
= TYPE_ADDR_SPACE (TREE_TYPE (exp
));
9039 struct mem_address addr
;
9040 enum insn_code icode
;
9043 get_address_description (exp
, &addr
);
9044 op0
= addr_for_mem_ref (&addr
, as
, true);
9045 op0
= memory_address_addr_space (mode
, op0
, as
);
9046 temp
= gen_rtx_MEM (mode
, op0
);
9047 set_mem_attributes (temp
, exp
, 0);
9048 set_mem_addr_space (temp
, as
);
9049 align
= MAX (TYPE_ALIGN (TREE_TYPE (exp
)), get_object_alignment (exp
));
9051 && (unsigned) align
< GET_MODE_ALIGNMENT (mode
)
9052 /* If the target does not have special handling for unaligned
9053 loads of mode then it can use regular moves for them. */
9054 && ((icode
= optab_handler (movmisalign_optab
, mode
))
9055 != CODE_FOR_nothing
))
9057 struct expand_operand ops
[2];
9059 /* We've already validated the memory, and we're creating a
9060 new pseudo destination. The predicates really can't fail,
9061 nor can the generator. */
9062 create_output_operand (&ops
[0], NULL_RTX
, mode
);
9063 create_fixed_operand (&ops
[1], temp
);
9064 expand_insn (icode
, 2, ops
);
9065 return ops
[0].value
;
9073 = TYPE_ADDR_SPACE (TREE_TYPE (TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 1))));
9074 enum machine_mode address_mode
;
9075 tree base
= TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0);
9077 enum insn_code icode
;
9079 /* Handle expansion of non-aliased memory with non-BLKmode. That
9080 might end up in a register. */
9081 if (TREE_CODE (base
) == ADDR_EXPR
)
9083 HOST_WIDE_INT offset
= mem_ref_offset (exp
).low
;
9085 base
= TREE_OPERAND (base
, 0);
9089 base
= get_addr_base_and_unit_offset (base
, &off
);
9093 /* If we are expanding a MEM_REF of a non-BLKmode non-addressable
9094 decl we must use bitfield operations. */
9096 && !TREE_ADDRESSABLE (base
)
9097 && DECL_MODE (base
) != BLKmode
9098 && DECL_RTL_SET_P (base
)
9099 && !MEM_P (DECL_RTL (base
)))
9103 && host_integerp (TYPE_SIZE (TREE_TYPE (exp
)), 1)
9104 && (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (DECL_MODE (base
))
9105 == TREE_INT_CST_LOW (TYPE_SIZE (TREE_TYPE (exp
)))))
9106 return expand_expr (build1 (VIEW_CONVERT_EXPR
,
9107 TREE_TYPE (exp
), base
),
9108 target
, tmode
, modifier
);
9109 bit_offset
= bitsize_int (offset
* BITS_PER_UNIT
);
9110 bftype
= TREE_TYPE (base
);
9111 if (TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (exp
)) != BLKmode
)
9112 bftype
= TREE_TYPE (exp
);
9113 return expand_expr (build3 (BIT_FIELD_REF
, bftype
,
9115 TYPE_SIZE (TREE_TYPE (exp
)),
9117 target
, tmode
, modifier
);
9120 address_mode
= targetm
.addr_space
.address_mode (as
);
9121 base
= TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0);
9122 if ((def_stmt
= get_def_for_expr (base
, BIT_AND_EXPR
)))
9124 tree mask
= gimple_assign_rhs2 (def_stmt
);
9125 base
= build2 (BIT_AND_EXPR
, TREE_TYPE (base
),
9126 gimple_assign_rhs1 (def_stmt
), mask
);
9127 TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0) = base
;
9129 align
= MAX (TYPE_ALIGN (TREE_TYPE (exp
)), get_object_alignment (exp
));
9130 op0
= expand_expr (base
, NULL_RTX
, VOIDmode
, EXPAND_SUM
);
9131 op0
= memory_address_addr_space (address_mode
, op0
, as
);
9132 if (!integer_zerop (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 1)))
9135 = immed_double_int_const (mem_ref_offset (exp
), address_mode
);
9136 op0
= simplify_gen_binary (PLUS
, address_mode
, op0
, off
);
9138 op0
= memory_address_addr_space (mode
, op0
, as
);
9139 temp
= gen_rtx_MEM (mode
, op0
);
9140 set_mem_attributes (temp
, exp
, 0);
9141 set_mem_addr_space (temp
, as
);
9142 if (TREE_THIS_VOLATILE (exp
))
9143 MEM_VOLATILE_P (temp
) = 1;
9145 && (unsigned) align
< GET_MODE_ALIGNMENT (mode
)
9146 /* If the target does not have special handling for unaligned
9147 loads of mode then it can use regular moves for them. */
9148 && ((icode
= optab_handler (movmisalign_optab
, mode
))
9149 != CODE_FOR_nothing
))
9151 struct expand_operand ops
[2];
9153 /* We've already validated the memory, and we're creating a
9154 new pseudo destination. The predicates really can't fail,
9155 nor can the generator. */
9156 create_output_operand (&ops
[0], NULL_RTX
, mode
);
9157 create_fixed_operand (&ops
[1], temp
);
9158 expand_insn (icode
, 2, ops
);
9159 return ops
[0].value
;
9167 tree array
= treeop0
;
9168 tree index
= treeop1
;
9170 /* Fold an expression like: "foo"[2].
9171 This is not done in fold so it won't happen inside &.
9172 Don't fold if this is for wide characters since it's too
9173 difficult to do correctly and this is a very rare case. */
9175 if (modifier
!= EXPAND_CONST_ADDRESS
9176 && modifier
!= EXPAND_INITIALIZER
9177 && modifier
!= EXPAND_MEMORY
)
9179 tree t
= fold_read_from_constant_string (exp
);
9182 return expand_expr (t
, target
, tmode
, modifier
);
9185 /* If this is a constant index into a constant array,
9186 just get the value from the array. Handle both the cases when
9187 we have an explicit constructor and when our operand is a variable
9188 that was declared const. */
9190 if (modifier
!= EXPAND_CONST_ADDRESS
9191 && modifier
!= EXPAND_INITIALIZER
9192 && modifier
!= EXPAND_MEMORY
9193 && TREE_CODE (array
) == CONSTRUCTOR
9194 && ! TREE_SIDE_EFFECTS (array
)
9195 && TREE_CODE (index
) == INTEGER_CST
)
9197 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT ix
;
9200 FOR_EACH_CONSTRUCTOR_ELT (CONSTRUCTOR_ELTS (array
), ix
,
9202 if (tree_int_cst_equal (field
, index
))
9204 if (!TREE_SIDE_EFFECTS (value
))
9205 return expand_expr (fold (value
), target
, tmode
, modifier
);
9210 else if (optimize
>= 1
9211 && modifier
!= EXPAND_CONST_ADDRESS
9212 && modifier
!= EXPAND_INITIALIZER
9213 && modifier
!= EXPAND_MEMORY
9214 && TREE_READONLY (array
) && ! TREE_SIDE_EFFECTS (array
)
9215 && TREE_CODE (array
) == VAR_DECL
&& DECL_INITIAL (array
)
9216 && TREE_CODE (DECL_INITIAL (array
)) != ERROR_MARK
9217 && const_value_known_p (array
))
9219 if (TREE_CODE (index
) == INTEGER_CST
)
9221 tree init
= DECL_INITIAL (array
);
9223 if (TREE_CODE (init
) == CONSTRUCTOR
)
9225 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT ix
;
9228 FOR_EACH_CONSTRUCTOR_ELT (CONSTRUCTOR_ELTS (init
), ix
,
9230 if (tree_int_cst_equal (field
, index
))
9232 if (TREE_SIDE_EFFECTS (value
))
9235 if (TREE_CODE (value
) == CONSTRUCTOR
)
9237 /* If VALUE is a CONSTRUCTOR, this
9238 optimization is only useful if
9239 this doesn't store the CONSTRUCTOR
9240 into memory. If it does, it is more
9241 efficient to just load the data from
9242 the array directly. */
9243 rtx ret
= expand_constructor (value
, target
,
9245 if (ret
== NULL_RTX
)
9249 return expand_expr (fold (value
), target
, tmode
,
9253 else if(TREE_CODE (init
) == STRING_CST
)
9255 tree index1
= index
;
9256 tree low_bound
= array_ref_low_bound (exp
);
9257 index1
= fold_convert_loc (loc
, sizetype
,
9260 /* Optimize the special-case of a zero lower bound.
9262 We convert the low_bound to sizetype to avoid some problems
9263 with constant folding. (E.g. suppose the lower bound is 1,
9264 and its mode is QI. Without the conversion,l (ARRAY
9265 +(INDEX-(unsigned char)1)) becomes ((ARRAY+(-(unsigned char)1))
9266 +INDEX), which becomes (ARRAY+255+INDEX). Opps!) */
9268 if (! integer_zerop (low_bound
))
9269 index1
= size_diffop_loc (loc
, index1
,
9270 fold_convert_loc (loc
, sizetype
,
9273 if (0 > compare_tree_int (index1
,
9274 TREE_STRING_LENGTH (init
)))
9276 tree type
= TREE_TYPE (TREE_TYPE (init
));
9277 enum machine_mode mode
= TYPE_MODE (type
);
9279 if (GET_MODE_CLASS (mode
) == MODE_INT
9280 && GET_MODE_SIZE (mode
) == 1)
9281 return gen_int_mode (TREE_STRING_POINTER (init
)
9282 [TREE_INT_CST_LOW (index1
)],
9289 goto normal_inner_ref
;
9292 /* If the operand is a CONSTRUCTOR, we can just extract the
9293 appropriate field if it is present. */
9294 if (TREE_CODE (treeop0
) == CONSTRUCTOR
)
9296 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT idx
;
9299 FOR_EACH_CONSTRUCTOR_ELT (CONSTRUCTOR_ELTS (treeop0
),
9301 if (field
== treeop1
9302 /* We can normally use the value of the field in the
9303 CONSTRUCTOR. However, if this is a bitfield in
9304 an integral mode that we can fit in a HOST_WIDE_INT,
9305 we must mask only the number of bits in the bitfield,
9306 since this is done implicitly by the constructor. If
9307 the bitfield does not meet either of those conditions,
9308 we can't do this optimization. */
9309 && (! DECL_BIT_FIELD (field
)
9310 || ((GET_MODE_CLASS (DECL_MODE (field
)) == MODE_INT
)
9311 && (GET_MODE_PRECISION (DECL_MODE (field
))
9312 <= HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT
))))
9314 if (DECL_BIT_FIELD (field
)
9315 && modifier
== EXPAND_STACK_PARM
)
9317 op0
= expand_expr (value
, target
, tmode
, modifier
);
9318 if (DECL_BIT_FIELD (field
))
9320 HOST_WIDE_INT bitsize
= TREE_INT_CST_LOW (DECL_SIZE (field
));
9321 enum machine_mode imode
= TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (field
));
9323 if (TYPE_UNSIGNED (TREE_TYPE (field
)))
9325 op1
= GEN_INT (((HOST_WIDE_INT
) 1 << bitsize
) - 1);
9326 op0
= expand_and (imode
, op0
, op1
, target
);
9330 int count
= GET_MODE_PRECISION (imode
) - bitsize
;
9332 op0
= expand_shift (LSHIFT_EXPR
, imode
, op0
, count
,
9334 op0
= expand_shift (RSHIFT_EXPR
, imode
, op0
, count
,
9342 goto normal_inner_ref
;
9345 case ARRAY_RANGE_REF
:
9348 enum machine_mode mode1
, mode2
;
9349 HOST_WIDE_INT bitsize
, bitpos
;
9351 int volatilep
= 0, must_force_mem
;
9352 bool packedp
= false;
9353 tree tem
= get_inner_reference (exp
, &bitsize
, &bitpos
, &offset
,
9354 &mode1
, &unsignedp
, &volatilep
, true);
9355 rtx orig_op0
, memloc
;
9357 /* If we got back the original object, something is wrong. Perhaps
9358 we are evaluating an expression too early. In any event, don't
9359 infinitely recurse. */
9360 gcc_assert (tem
!= exp
);
9362 if (TYPE_PACKED (TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0)))
9363 || (TREE_CODE (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 1)) == FIELD_DECL
9364 && DECL_PACKED (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 1))))
9367 /* If TEM's type is a union of variable size, pass TARGET to the inner
9368 computation, since it will need a temporary and TARGET is known
9369 to have to do. This occurs in unchecked conversion in Ada. */
9372 (TREE_CODE (TREE_TYPE (tem
)) == UNION_TYPE
9373 && (TREE_CODE (TYPE_SIZE (TREE_TYPE (tem
)))
9375 && modifier
!= EXPAND_STACK_PARM
9376 ? target
: NULL_RTX
),
9378 (modifier
== EXPAND_INITIALIZER
9379 || modifier
== EXPAND_CONST_ADDRESS
9380 || modifier
== EXPAND_STACK_PARM
)
9381 ? modifier
: EXPAND_NORMAL
);
9384 /* If the bitfield is volatile, we want to access it in the
9385 field's mode, not the computed mode.
9386 If a MEM has VOIDmode (external with incomplete type),
9387 use BLKmode for it instead. */
9390 if (volatilep
&& flag_strict_volatile_bitfields
> 0)
9391 op0
= adjust_address (op0
, mode1
, 0);
9392 else if (GET_MODE (op0
) == VOIDmode
)
9393 op0
= adjust_address (op0
, BLKmode
, 0);
9397 = CONSTANT_P (op0
) ? TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (tem
)) : GET_MODE (op0
);
9399 /* If we have either an offset, a BLKmode result, or a reference
9400 outside the underlying object, we must force it to memory.
9401 Such a case can occur in Ada if we have unchecked conversion
9402 of an expression from a scalar type to an aggregate type or
9403 for an ARRAY_RANGE_REF whose type is BLKmode, or if we were
9404 passed a partially uninitialized object or a view-conversion
9405 to a larger size. */
9406 must_force_mem
= (offset
9408 || bitpos
+ bitsize
> GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode2
));
9410 /* Handle CONCAT first. */
9411 if (GET_CODE (op0
) == CONCAT
&& !must_force_mem
)
9414 && bitsize
== GET_MODE_BITSIZE (GET_MODE (op0
)))
9417 && bitsize
== GET_MODE_BITSIZE (GET_MODE (XEXP (op0
, 0)))
9420 op0
= XEXP (op0
, 0);
9421 mode2
= GET_MODE (op0
);
9423 else if (bitpos
== GET_MODE_BITSIZE (GET_MODE (XEXP (op0
, 0)))
9424 && bitsize
== GET_MODE_BITSIZE (GET_MODE (XEXP (op0
, 1)))
9428 op0
= XEXP (op0
, 1);
9430 mode2
= GET_MODE (op0
);
9433 /* Otherwise force into memory. */
9437 /* If this is a constant, put it in a register if it is a legitimate
9438 constant and we don't need a memory reference. */
9439 if (CONSTANT_P (op0
)
9441 && targetm
.legitimate_constant_p (mode2
, op0
)
9443 op0
= force_reg (mode2
, op0
);
9445 /* Otherwise, if this is a constant, try to force it to the constant
9446 pool. Note that back-ends, e.g. MIPS, may refuse to do so if it
9447 is a legitimate constant. */
9448 else if (CONSTANT_P (op0
) && (memloc
= force_const_mem (mode2
, op0
)))
9449 op0
= validize_mem (memloc
);
9451 /* Otherwise, if this is a constant or the object is not in memory
9452 and need be, put it there. */
9453 else if (CONSTANT_P (op0
) || (!MEM_P (op0
) && must_force_mem
))
9455 tree nt
= build_qualified_type (TREE_TYPE (tem
),
9456 (TYPE_QUALS (TREE_TYPE (tem
))
9457 | TYPE_QUAL_CONST
));
9458 memloc
= assign_temp (nt
, 1, 1, 1);
9459 emit_move_insn (memloc
, op0
);
9465 enum machine_mode address_mode
;
9466 rtx offset_rtx
= expand_expr (offset
, NULL_RTX
, VOIDmode
,
9469 gcc_assert (MEM_P (op0
));
9472 = targetm
.addr_space
.address_mode (MEM_ADDR_SPACE (op0
));
9473 if (GET_MODE (offset_rtx
) != address_mode
)
9474 offset_rtx
= convert_to_mode (address_mode
, offset_rtx
, 0);
9476 if (GET_MODE (op0
) == BLKmode
9477 /* A constant address in OP0 can have VOIDmode, we must
9478 not try to call force_reg in that case. */
9479 && GET_MODE (XEXP (op0
, 0)) != VOIDmode
9481 && (bitpos
% bitsize
) == 0
9482 && (bitsize
% GET_MODE_ALIGNMENT (mode1
)) == 0
9483 && MEM_ALIGN (op0
) == GET_MODE_ALIGNMENT (mode1
))
9485 op0
= adjust_address (op0
, mode1
, bitpos
/ BITS_PER_UNIT
);
9489 op0
= offset_address (op0
, offset_rtx
,
9490 highest_pow2_factor (offset
));
9493 /* If OFFSET is making OP0 more aligned than BIGGEST_ALIGNMENT,
9494 record its alignment as BIGGEST_ALIGNMENT. */
9495 if (MEM_P (op0
) && bitpos
== 0 && offset
!= 0
9496 && is_aligning_offset (offset
, tem
))
9497 set_mem_align (op0
, BIGGEST_ALIGNMENT
);
9499 /* Don't forget about volatility even if this is a bitfield. */
9500 if (MEM_P (op0
) && volatilep
&& ! MEM_VOLATILE_P (op0
))
9502 if (op0
== orig_op0
)
9503 op0
= copy_rtx (op0
);
9505 MEM_VOLATILE_P (op0
) = 1;
9508 /* In cases where an aligned union has an unaligned object
9509 as a field, we might be extracting a BLKmode value from
9510 an integer-mode (e.g., SImode) object. Handle this case
9511 by doing the extract into an object as wide as the field
9512 (which we know to be the width of a basic mode), then
9513 storing into memory, and changing the mode to BLKmode. */
9514 if (mode1
== VOIDmode
9515 || REG_P (op0
) || GET_CODE (op0
) == SUBREG
9516 || (mode1
!= BLKmode
&& ! direct_load
[(int) mode1
]
9517 && GET_MODE_CLASS (mode
) != MODE_COMPLEX_INT
9518 && GET_MODE_CLASS (mode
) != MODE_COMPLEX_FLOAT
9519 && modifier
!= EXPAND_CONST_ADDRESS
9520 && modifier
!= EXPAND_INITIALIZER
)
9521 /* If the field is volatile, we always want an aligned
9522 access. Only do this if the access is not already naturally
9523 aligned, otherwise "normal" (non-bitfield) volatile fields
9524 become non-addressable. */
9525 || (volatilep
&& flag_strict_volatile_bitfields
> 0
9526 && (bitpos
% GET_MODE_ALIGNMENT (mode
) != 0))
9527 /* If the field isn't aligned enough to fetch as a memref,
9528 fetch it as a bit field. */
9529 || (mode1
!= BLKmode
9530 && (((TYPE_ALIGN (TREE_TYPE (tem
)) < GET_MODE_ALIGNMENT (mode
)
9531 || (bitpos
% GET_MODE_ALIGNMENT (mode
) != 0)
9533 && (MEM_ALIGN (op0
) < GET_MODE_ALIGNMENT (mode1
)
9534 || (bitpos
% GET_MODE_ALIGNMENT (mode1
) != 0))))
9535 && ((modifier
== EXPAND_CONST_ADDRESS
9536 || modifier
== EXPAND_INITIALIZER
)
9538 : SLOW_UNALIGNED_ACCESS (mode1
, MEM_ALIGN (op0
))))
9539 || (bitpos
% BITS_PER_UNIT
!= 0)))
9540 /* If the type and the field are a constant size and the
9541 size of the type isn't the same size as the bitfield,
9542 we must use bitfield operations. */
9544 && TYPE_SIZE (TREE_TYPE (exp
))
9545 && TREE_CODE (TYPE_SIZE (TREE_TYPE (exp
))) == INTEGER_CST
9546 && 0 != compare_tree_int (TYPE_SIZE (TREE_TYPE (exp
)),
9549 enum machine_mode ext_mode
= mode
;
9551 if (ext_mode
== BLKmode
9552 && ! (target
!= 0 && MEM_P (op0
)
9554 && bitpos
% BITS_PER_UNIT
== 0))
9555 ext_mode
= mode_for_size (bitsize
, MODE_INT
, 1);
9557 if (ext_mode
== BLKmode
)
9560 target
= assign_temp (type
, 0, 1, 1);
9565 /* In this case, BITPOS must start at a byte boundary and
9566 TARGET, if specified, must be a MEM. */
9567 gcc_assert (MEM_P (op0
)
9568 && (!target
|| MEM_P (target
))
9569 && !(bitpos
% BITS_PER_UNIT
));
9571 emit_block_move (target
,
9572 adjust_address (op0
, VOIDmode
,
9573 bitpos
/ BITS_PER_UNIT
),
9574 GEN_INT ((bitsize
+ BITS_PER_UNIT
- 1)
9576 (modifier
== EXPAND_STACK_PARM
9577 ? BLOCK_OP_CALL_PARM
: BLOCK_OP_NORMAL
));
9582 op0
= validize_mem (op0
);
9584 if (MEM_P (op0
) && REG_P (XEXP (op0
, 0)))
9585 mark_reg_pointer (XEXP (op0
, 0), MEM_ALIGN (op0
));
9587 op0
= extract_bit_field (op0
, bitsize
, bitpos
, unsignedp
, packedp
,
9588 (modifier
== EXPAND_STACK_PARM
9589 ? NULL_RTX
: target
),
9590 ext_mode
, ext_mode
);
9592 /* If the result is a record type and BITSIZE is narrower than
9593 the mode of OP0, an integral mode, and this is a big endian
9594 machine, we must put the field into the high-order bits. */
9595 if (TREE_CODE (type
) == RECORD_TYPE
&& BYTES_BIG_ENDIAN
9596 && GET_MODE_CLASS (GET_MODE (op0
)) == MODE_INT
9597 && bitsize
< (HOST_WIDE_INT
) GET_MODE_BITSIZE (GET_MODE (op0
)))
9598 op0
= expand_shift (LSHIFT_EXPR
, GET_MODE (op0
), op0
,
9599 GET_MODE_BITSIZE (GET_MODE (op0
))
9602 /* If the result type is BLKmode, store the data into a temporary
9603 of the appropriate type, but with the mode corresponding to the
9604 mode for the data we have (op0's mode). It's tempting to make
9605 this a constant type, since we know it's only being stored once,
9606 but that can cause problems if we are taking the address of this
9607 COMPONENT_REF because the MEM of any reference via that address
9608 will have flags corresponding to the type, which will not
9609 necessarily be constant. */
9610 if (mode
== BLKmode
)
9612 HOST_WIDE_INT size
= GET_MODE_BITSIZE (ext_mode
);
9615 /* If the reference doesn't use the alias set of its type,
9616 we cannot create the temporary using that type. */
9617 if (component_uses_parent_alias_set (exp
))
9619 new_rtx
= assign_stack_local (ext_mode
, size
, 0);
9620 set_mem_alias_set (new_rtx
, get_alias_set (exp
));
9623 new_rtx
= assign_stack_temp_for_type (ext_mode
, size
, 0, type
);
9625 emit_move_insn (new_rtx
, op0
);
9626 op0
= copy_rtx (new_rtx
);
9627 PUT_MODE (op0
, BLKmode
);
9628 set_mem_attributes (op0
, exp
, 1);
9634 /* If the result is BLKmode, use that to access the object
9636 if (mode
== BLKmode
)
9639 /* Get a reference to just this component. */
9640 if (modifier
== EXPAND_CONST_ADDRESS
9641 || modifier
== EXPAND_SUM
|| modifier
== EXPAND_INITIALIZER
)
9642 op0
= adjust_address_nv (op0
, mode1
, bitpos
/ BITS_PER_UNIT
);
9644 op0
= adjust_address (op0
, mode1
, bitpos
/ BITS_PER_UNIT
);
9646 if (op0
== orig_op0
)
9647 op0
= copy_rtx (op0
);
9649 set_mem_attributes (op0
, exp
, 0);
9650 if (REG_P (XEXP (op0
, 0)))
9651 mark_reg_pointer (XEXP (op0
, 0), MEM_ALIGN (op0
));
9653 MEM_VOLATILE_P (op0
) |= volatilep
;
9654 if (mode
== mode1
|| mode1
== BLKmode
|| mode1
== tmode
9655 || modifier
== EXPAND_CONST_ADDRESS
9656 || modifier
== EXPAND_INITIALIZER
)
9658 else if (target
== 0)
9659 target
= gen_reg_rtx (tmode
!= VOIDmode
? tmode
: mode
);
9661 convert_move (target
, op0
, unsignedp
);
9666 return expand_expr (OBJ_TYPE_REF_EXPR (exp
), target
, tmode
, modifier
);
9669 /* All valid uses of __builtin_va_arg_pack () are removed during
9671 if (CALL_EXPR_VA_ARG_PACK (exp
))
9672 error ("%Kinvalid use of %<__builtin_va_arg_pack ()%>", exp
);
9674 tree fndecl
= get_callee_fndecl (exp
), attr
;
9677 && (attr
= lookup_attribute ("error",
9678 DECL_ATTRIBUTES (fndecl
))) != NULL
)
9679 error ("%Kcall to %qs declared with attribute error: %s",
9680 exp
, identifier_to_locale (lang_hooks
.decl_printable_name (fndecl
, 1)),
9681 TREE_STRING_POINTER (TREE_VALUE (TREE_VALUE (attr
))));
9683 && (attr
= lookup_attribute ("warning",
9684 DECL_ATTRIBUTES (fndecl
))) != NULL
)
9685 warning_at (tree_nonartificial_location (exp
),
9686 0, "%Kcall to %qs declared with attribute warning: %s",
9687 exp
, identifier_to_locale (lang_hooks
.decl_printable_name (fndecl
, 1)),
9688 TREE_STRING_POINTER (TREE_VALUE (TREE_VALUE (attr
))));
9690 /* Check for a built-in function. */
9691 if (fndecl
&& DECL_BUILT_IN (fndecl
))
9693 gcc_assert (DECL_BUILT_IN_CLASS (fndecl
) != BUILT_IN_FRONTEND
);
9694 return expand_builtin (exp
, target
, subtarget
, tmode
, ignore
);
9697 return expand_call (exp
, target
, ignore
);
9699 case VIEW_CONVERT_EXPR
:
9702 /* If we are converting to BLKmode, try to avoid an intermediate
9703 temporary by fetching an inner memory reference. */
9705 && TREE_CODE (TYPE_SIZE (TREE_TYPE (exp
))) == INTEGER_CST
9706 && TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (treeop0
)) != BLKmode
9707 && handled_component_p (treeop0
))
9709 enum machine_mode mode1
;
9710 HOST_WIDE_INT bitsize
, bitpos
;
9715 = get_inner_reference (treeop0
, &bitsize
, &bitpos
,
9716 &offset
, &mode1
, &unsignedp
, &volatilep
,
9720 /* ??? We should work harder and deal with non-zero offsets. */
9722 && (bitpos
% BITS_PER_UNIT
) == 0
9724 && compare_tree_int (TYPE_SIZE (TREE_TYPE (exp
)), bitsize
) == 0)
9726 /* See the normal_inner_ref case for the rationale. */
9729 (TREE_CODE (TREE_TYPE (tem
)) == UNION_TYPE
9730 && (TREE_CODE (TYPE_SIZE (TREE_TYPE (tem
)))
9732 && modifier
!= EXPAND_STACK_PARM
9733 ? target
: NULL_RTX
),
9735 (modifier
== EXPAND_INITIALIZER
9736 || modifier
== EXPAND_CONST_ADDRESS
9737 || modifier
== EXPAND_STACK_PARM
)
9738 ? modifier
: EXPAND_NORMAL
);
9740 if (MEM_P (orig_op0
))
9744 /* Get a reference to just this component. */
9745 if (modifier
== EXPAND_CONST_ADDRESS
9746 || modifier
== EXPAND_SUM
9747 || modifier
== EXPAND_INITIALIZER
)
9748 op0
= adjust_address_nv (op0
, mode
, bitpos
/ BITS_PER_UNIT
);
9750 op0
= adjust_address (op0
, mode
, bitpos
/ BITS_PER_UNIT
);
9752 if (op0
== orig_op0
)
9753 op0
= copy_rtx (op0
);
9755 set_mem_attributes (op0
, treeop0
, 0);
9756 if (REG_P (XEXP (op0
, 0)))
9757 mark_reg_pointer (XEXP (op0
, 0), MEM_ALIGN (op0
));
9759 MEM_VOLATILE_P (op0
) |= volatilep
;
9765 op0
= expand_expr (treeop0
,
9766 NULL_RTX
, VOIDmode
, modifier
);
9768 /* If the input and output modes are both the same, we are done. */
9769 if (mode
== GET_MODE (op0
))
9771 /* If neither mode is BLKmode, and both modes are the same size
9772 then we can use gen_lowpart. */
9773 else if (mode
!= BLKmode
&& GET_MODE (op0
) != BLKmode
9774 && (GET_MODE_PRECISION (mode
)
9775 == GET_MODE_PRECISION (GET_MODE (op0
)))
9776 && !COMPLEX_MODE_P (GET_MODE (op0
)))
9778 if (GET_CODE (op0
) == SUBREG
)
9779 op0
= force_reg (GET_MODE (op0
), op0
);
9780 temp
= gen_lowpart_common (mode
, op0
);
9785 if (!REG_P (op0
) && !MEM_P (op0
))
9786 op0
= force_reg (GET_MODE (op0
), op0
);
9787 op0
= gen_lowpart (mode
, op0
);
9790 /* If both types are integral, convert from one mode to the other. */
9791 else if (INTEGRAL_TYPE_P (type
) && INTEGRAL_TYPE_P (TREE_TYPE (treeop0
)))
9792 op0
= convert_modes (mode
, GET_MODE (op0
), op0
,
9793 TYPE_UNSIGNED (TREE_TYPE (treeop0
)));
9794 /* As a last resort, spill op0 to memory, and reload it in a
9796 else if (!MEM_P (op0
))
9798 /* If the operand is not a MEM, force it into memory. Since we
9799 are going to be changing the mode of the MEM, don't call
9800 force_const_mem for constants because we don't allow pool
9801 constants to change mode. */
9802 tree inner_type
= TREE_TYPE (treeop0
);
9804 gcc_assert (!TREE_ADDRESSABLE (exp
));
9806 if (target
== 0 || GET_MODE (target
) != TYPE_MODE (inner_type
))
9808 = assign_stack_temp_for_type
9809 (TYPE_MODE (inner_type
),
9810 GET_MODE_SIZE (TYPE_MODE (inner_type
)), 0, inner_type
);
9812 emit_move_insn (target
, op0
);
9816 /* At this point, OP0 is in the correct mode. If the output type is
9817 such that the operand is known to be aligned, indicate that it is.
9818 Otherwise, we need only be concerned about alignment for non-BLKmode
9822 op0
= copy_rtx (op0
);
9824 if (TYPE_ALIGN_OK (type
))
9825 set_mem_align (op0
, MAX (MEM_ALIGN (op0
), TYPE_ALIGN (type
)));
9826 else if (STRICT_ALIGNMENT
9828 && MEM_ALIGN (op0
) < GET_MODE_ALIGNMENT (mode
))
9830 tree inner_type
= TREE_TYPE (treeop0
);
9831 HOST_WIDE_INT temp_size
9832 = MAX (int_size_in_bytes (inner_type
),
9833 (HOST_WIDE_INT
) GET_MODE_SIZE (mode
));
9835 = assign_stack_temp_for_type (mode
, temp_size
, 0, type
);
9836 rtx new_with_op0_mode
9837 = adjust_address (new_rtx
, GET_MODE (op0
), 0);
9839 gcc_assert (!TREE_ADDRESSABLE (exp
));
9841 if (GET_MODE (op0
) == BLKmode
)
9842 emit_block_move (new_with_op0_mode
, op0
,
9843 GEN_INT (GET_MODE_SIZE (mode
)),
9844 (modifier
== EXPAND_STACK_PARM
9845 ? BLOCK_OP_CALL_PARM
: BLOCK_OP_NORMAL
));
9847 emit_move_insn (new_with_op0_mode
, op0
);
9852 op0
= adjust_address (op0
, mode
, 0);
9858 /* A COND_EXPR with its type being VOID_TYPE represents a
9859 conditional jump and is handled in
9860 expand_gimple_cond_expr. */
9861 gcc_assert (!VOID_TYPE_P (type
));
9863 /* Note that COND_EXPRs whose type is a structure or union
9864 are required to be constructed to contain assignments of
9865 a temporary variable, so that we can evaluate them here
9866 for side effect only. If type is void, we must do likewise. */
9868 gcc_assert (!TREE_ADDRESSABLE (type
)
9870 && TREE_TYPE (treeop1
) != void_type_node
9871 && TREE_TYPE (treeop2
) != void_type_node
);
9873 /* If we are not to produce a result, we have no target. Otherwise,
9874 if a target was specified use it; it will not be used as an
9875 intermediate target unless it is safe. If no target, use a
9878 if (modifier
!= EXPAND_STACK_PARM
9880 && safe_from_p (original_target
, treeop0
, 1)
9881 && GET_MODE (original_target
) == mode
9882 #ifdef HAVE_conditional_move
9883 && (! can_conditionally_move_p (mode
)
9884 || REG_P (original_target
))
9886 && !MEM_P (original_target
))
9887 temp
= original_target
;
9889 temp
= assign_temp (type
, 0, 0, 1);
9891 do_pending_stack_adjust ();
9893 op0
= gen_label_rtx ();
9894 op1
= gen_label_rtx ();
9895 jumpifnot (treeop0
, op0
, -1);
9896 store_expr (treeop1
, temp
,
9897 modifier
== EXPAND_STACK_PARM
,
9900 emit_jump_insn (gen_jump (op1
));
9903 store_expr (treeop2
, temp
,
9904 modifier
== EXPAND_STACK_PARM
,
9912 target
= expand_vec_cond_expr (type
, treeop0
, treeop1
, treeop2
, target
);
9919 gcc_assert (ignore
);
9921 /* Check for |= or &= of a bitfield of size one into another bitfield
9922 of size 1. In this case, (unless we need the result of the
9923 assignment) we can do this more efficiently with a
9924 test followed by an assignment, if necessary.
9926 ??? At this point, we can't get a BIT_FIELD_REF here. But if
9927 things change so we do, this code should be enhanced to
9929 if (TREE_CODE (lhs
) == COMPONENT_REF
9930 && (TREE_CODE (rhs
) == BIT_IOR_EXPR
9931 || TREE_CODE (rhs
) == BIT_AND_EXPR
)
9932 && TREE_OPERAND (rhs
, 0) == lhs
9933 && TREE_CODE (TREE_OPERAND (rhs
, 1)) == COMPONENT_REF
9934 && integer_onep (DECL_SIZE (TREE_OPERAND (lhs
, 1)))
9935 && integer_onep (DECL_SIZE (TREE_OPERAND (TREE_OPERAND (rhs
, 1), 1))))
9937 rtx label
= gen_label_rtx ();
9938 int value
= TREE_CODE (rhs
) == BIT_IOR_EXPR
;
9939 do_jump (TREE_OPERAND (rhs
, 1),
9941 value
? 0 : label
, -1);
9942 expand_assignment (lhs
, build_int_cst (TREE_TYPE (rhs
), value
),
9943 MOVE_NONTEMPORAL (exp
));
9944 do_pending_stack_adjust ();
9949 expand_assignment (lhs
, rhs
, MOVE_NONTEMPORAL (exp
));
9954 return expand_expr_addr_expr (exp
, target
, tmode
, modifier
);
9957 op0
= expand_normal (treeop0
);
9958 return read_complex_part (op0
, false);
9961 op0
= expand_normal (treeop0
);
9962 return read_complex_part (op0
, true);
9969 /* Expanded in cfgexpand.c. */
9972 case TRY_CATCH_EXPR
:
9974 case EH_FILTER_EXPR
:
9975 case TRY_FINALLY_EXPR
:
9976 /* Lowered by tree-eh.c. */
9979 case WITH_CLEANUP_EXPR
:
9980 case CLEANUP_POINT_EXPR
:
9982 case CASE_LABEL_EXPR
:
9988 case PREINCREMENT_EXPR
:
9989 case PREDECREMENT_EXPR
:
9990 case POSTINCREMENT_EXPR
:
9991 case POSTDECREMENT_EXPR
:
9994 /* Lowered by gimplify.c. */
9998 /* Function descriptors are not valid except for as
9999 initialization constants, and should not be expanded. */
10000 gcc_unreachable ();
10002 case WITH_SIZE_EXPR
:
10003 /* WITH_SIZE_EXPR expands to its first argument. The caller should
10004 have pulled out the size to use in whatever context it needed. */
10005 return expand_expr_real (treeop0
, original_target
, tmode
,
10006 modifier
, alt_rtl
);
10008 case COMPOUND_LITERAL_EXPR
:
10010 /* Initialize the anonymous variable declared in the compound
10011 literal, then return the variable. */
10012 tree decl
= COMPOUND_LITERAL_EXPR_DECL (exp
);
10014 /* Create RTL for this variable. */
10015 if (!DECL_RTL_SET_P (decl
))
10017 if (DECL_HARD_REGISTER (decl
))
10018 /* The user specified an assembler name for this variable.
10019 Set that up now. */
10020 rest_of_decl_compilation (decl
, 0, 0);
10022 expand_decl (decl
);
10025 return expand_expr_real (decl
, original_target
, tmode
,
10026 modifier
, alt_rtl
);
10030 return expand_expr_real_2 (&ops
, target
, tmode
, modifier
);
10034 /* Subroutine of above: reduce EXP to the precision of TYPE (in the
10035 signedness of TYPE), possibly returning the result in TARGET. */
10037 reduce_to_bit_field_precision (rtx exp
, rtx target
, tree type
)
10039 HOST_WIDE_INT prec
= TYPE_PRECISION (type
);
10040 if (target
&& GET_MODE (target
) != GET_MODE (exp
))
10042 /* For constant values, reduce using build_int_cst_type. */
10043 if (CONST_INT_P (exp
))
10045 HOST_WIDE_INT value
= INTVAL (exp
);
10046 tree t
= build_int_cst_type (type
, value
);
10047 return expand_expr (t
, target
, VOIDmode
, EXPAND_NORMAL
);
10049 else if (TYPE_UNSIGNED (type
))
10051 rtx mask
= immed_double_int_const (double_int_mask (prec
),
10053 return expand_and (GET_MODE (exp
), exp
, mask
, target
);
10057 int count
= GET_MODE_PRECISION (GET_MODE (exp
)) - prec
;
10058 exp
= expand_shift (LSHIFT_EXPR
, GET_MODE (exp
),
10059 exp
, count
, target
, 0);
10060 return expand_shift (RSHIFT_EXPR
, GET_MODE (exp
),
10061 exp
, count
, target
, 0);
10065 /* Subroutine of above: returns 1 if OFFSET corresponds to an offset that
10066 when applied to the address of EXP produces an address known to be
10067 aligned more than BIGGEST_ALIGNMENT. */
10070 is_aligning_offset (const_tree offset
, const_tree exp
)
10072 /* Strip off any conversions. */
10073 while (CONVERT_EXPR_P (offset
))
10074 offset
= TREE_OPERAND (offset
, 0);
10076 /* We must now have a BIT_AND_EXPR with a constant that is one less than
10077 power of 2 and which is larger than BIGGEST_ALIGNMENT. */
10078 if (TREE_CODE (offset
) != BIT_AND_EXPR
10079 || !host_integerp (TREE_OPERAND (offset
, 1), 1)
10080 || compare_tree_int (TREE_OPERAND (offset
, 1),
10081 BIGGEST_ALIGNMENT
/ BITS_PER_UNIT
) <= 0
10082 || !exact_log2 (tree_low_cst (TREE_OPERAND (offset
, 1), 1) + 1) < 0)
10085 /* Look at the first operand of BIT_AND_EXPR and strip any conversion.
10086 It must be NEGATE_EXPR. Then strip any more conversions. */
10087 offset
= TREE_OPERAND (offset
, 0);
10088 while (CONVERT_EXPR_P (offset
))
10089 offset
= TREE_OPERAND (offset
, 0);
10091 if (TREE_CODE (offset
) != NEGATE_EXPR
)
10094 offset
= TREE_OPERAND (offset
, 0);
10095 while (CONVERT_EXPR_P (offset
))
10096 offset
= TREE_OPERAND (offset
, 0);
10098 /* This must now be the address of EXP. */
10099 return TREE_CODE (offset
) == ADDR_EXPR
&& TREE_OPERAND (offset
, 0) == exp
;
10102 /* Return the tree node if an ARG corresponds to a string constant or zero
10103 if it doesn't. If we return nonzero, set *PTR_OFFSET to the offset
10104 in bytes within the string that ARG is accessing. The type of the
10105 offset will be `sizetype'. */
10108 string_constant (tree arg
, tree
*ptr_offset
)
10110 tree array
, offset
, lower_bound
;
10113 if (TREE_CODE (arg
) == ADDR_EXPR
)
10115 if (TREE_CODE (TREE_OPERAND (arg
, 0)) == STRING_CST
)
10117 *ptr_offset
= size_zero_node
;
10118 return TREE_OPERAND (arg
, 0);
10120 else if (TREE_CODE (TREE_OPERAND (arg
, 0)) == VAR_DECL
)
10122 array
= TREE_OPERAND (arg
, 0);
10123 offset
= size_zero_node
;
10125 else if (TREE_CODE (TREE_OPERAND (arg
, 0)) == ARRAY_REF
)
10127 array
= TREE_OPERAND (TREE_OPERAND (arg
, 0), 0);
10128 offset
= TREE_OPERAND (TREE_OPERAND (arg
, 0), 1);
10129 if (TREE_CODE (array
) != STRING_CST
10130 && TREE_CODE (array
) != VAR_DECL
)
10133 /* Check if the array has a nonzero lower bound. */
10134 lower_bound
= array_ref_low_bound (TREE_OPERAND (arg
, 0));
10135 if (!integer_zerop (lower_bound
))
10137 /* If the offset and base aren't both constants, return 0. */
10138 if (TREE_CODE (lower_bound
) != INTEGER_CST
)
10140 if (TREE_CODE (offset
) != INTEGER_CST
)
10142 /* Adjust offset by the lower bound. */
10143 offset
= size_diffop (fold_convert (sizetype
, offset
),
10144 fold_convert (sizetype
, lower_bound
));
10150 else if (TREE_CODE (arg
) == PLUS_EXPR
|| TREE_CODE (arg
) == POINTER_PLUS_EXPR
)
10152 tree arg0
= TREE_OPERAND (arg
, 0);
10153 tree arg1
= TREE_OPERAND (arg
, 1);
10158 if (TREE_CODE (arg0
) == ADDR_EXPR
10159 && (TREE_CODE (TREE_OPERAND (arg0
, 0)) == STRING_CST
10160 || TREE_CODE (TREE_OPERAND (arg0
, 0)) == VAR_DECL
))
10162 array
= TREE_OPERAND (arg0
, 0);
10165 else if (TREE_CODE (arg1
) == ADDR_EXPR
10166 && (TREE_CODE (TREE_OPERAND (arg1
, 0)) == STRING_CST
10167 || TREE_CODE (TREE_OPERAND (arg1
, 0)) == VAR_DECL
))
10169 array
= TREE_OPERAND (arg1
, 0);
10178 if (TREE_CODE (array
) == STRING_CST
)
10180 *ptr_offset
= fold_convert (sizetype
, offset
);
10183 else if (TREE_CODE (array
) == VAR_DECL
10184 || TREE_CODE (array
) == CONST_DECL
)
10188 /* Variables initialized to string literals can be handled too. */
10189 if (!const_value_known_p (array
)
10190 || !DECL_INITIAL (array
)
10191 || TREE_CODE (DECL_INITIAL (array
)) != STRING_CST
)
10194 /* Avoid const char foo[4] = "abcde"; */
10195 if (DECL_SIZE_UNIT (array
) == NULL_TREE
10196 || TREE_CODE (DECL_SIZE_UNIT (array
)) != INTEGER_CST
10197 || (length
= TREE_STRING_LENGTH (DECL_INITIAL (array
))) <= 0
10198 || compare_tree_int (DECL_SIZE_UNIT (array
), length
) < 0)
10201 /* If variable is bigger than the string literal, OFFSET must be constant
10202 and inside of the bounds of the string literal. */
10203 offset
= fold_convert (sizetype
, offset
);
10204 if (compare_tree_int (DECL_SIZE_UNIT (array
), length
) > 0
10205 && (! host_integerp (offset
, 1)
10206 || compare_tree_int (offset
, length
) >= 0))
10209 *ptr_offset
= offset
;
10210 return DECL_INITIAL (array
);
10216 /* Generate code to calculate OPS, and exploded expression
10217 using a store-flag instruction and return an rtx for the result.
10218 OPS reflects a comparison.
10220 If TARGET is nonzero, store the result there if convenient.
10222 Return zero if there is no suitable set-flag instruction
10223 available on this machine.
10225 Once expand_expr has been called on the arguments of the comparison,
10226 we are committed to doing the store flag, since it is not safe to
10227 re-evaluate the expression. We emit the store-flag insn by calling
10228 emit_store_flag, but only expand the arguments if we have a reason
10229 to believe that emit_store_flag will be successful. If we think that
10230 it will, but it isn't, we have to simulate the store-flag with a
10231 set/jump/set sequence. */
10234 do_store_flag (sepops ops
, rtx target
, enum machine_mode mode
)
10236 enum rtx_code code
;
10237 tree arg0
, arg1
, type
;
10239 enum machine_mode operand_mode
;
10242 rtx subtarget
= target
;
10243 location_t loc
= ops
->location
;
10248 /* Don't crash if the comparison was erroneous. */
10249 if (arg0
== error_mark_node
|| arg1
== error_mark_node
)
10252 type
= TREE_TYPE (arg0
);
10253 operand_mode
= TYPE_MODE (type
);
10254 unsignedp
= TYPE_UNSIGNED (type
);
10256 /* We won't bother with BLKmode store-flag operations because it would mean
10257 passing a lot of information to emit_store_flag. */
10258 if (operand_mode
== BLKmode
)
10261 /* We won't bother with store-flag operations involving function pointers
10262 when function pointers must be canonicalized before comparisons. */
10263 #ifdef HAVE_canonicalize_funcptr_for_compare
10264 if (HAVE_canonicalize_funcptr_for_compare
10265 && ((TREE_CODE (TREE_TYPE (arg0
)) == POINTER_TYPE
10266 && (TREE_CODE (TREE_TYPE (TREE_TYPE (arg0
)))
10268 || (TREE_CODE (TREE_TYPE (arg1
)) == POINTER_TYPE
10269 && (TREE_CODE (TREE_TYPE (TREE_TYPE (arg1
)))
10270 == FUNCTION_TYPE
))))
10277 /* Get the rtx comparison code to use. We know that EXP is a comparison
10278 operation of some type. Some comparisons against 1 and -1 can be
10279 converted to comparisons with zero. Do so here so that the tests
10280 below will be aware that we have a comparison with zero. These
10281 tests will not catch constants in the first operand, but constants
10282 are rarely passed as the first operand. */
10293 if (integer_onep (arg1
))
10294 arg1
= integer_zero_node
, code
= unsignedp
? LEU
: LE
;
10296 code
= unsignedp
? LTU
: LT
;
10299 if (! unsignedp
&& integer_all_onesp (arg1
))
10300 arg1
= integer_zero_node
, code
= LT
;
10302 code
= unsignedp
? LEU
: LE
;
10305 if (! unsignedp
&& integer_all_onesp (arg1
))
10306 arg1
= integer_zero_node
, code
= GE
;
10308 code
= unsignedp
? GTU
: GT
;
10311 if (integer_onep (arg1
))
10312 arg1
= integer_zero_node
, code
= unsignedp
? GTU
: GT
;
10314 code
= unsignedp
? GEU
: GE
;
10317 case UNORDERED_EXPR
:
10343 gcc_unreachable ();
10346 /* Put a constant second. */
10347 if (TREE_CODE (arg0
) == REAL_CST
|| TREE_CODE (arg0
) == INTEGER_CST
10348 || TREE_CODE (arg0
) == FIXED_CST
)
10350 tem
= arg0
; arg0
= arg1
; arg1
= tem
;
10351 code
= swap_condition (code
);
10354 /* If this is an equality or inequality test of a single bit, we can
10355 do this by shifting the bit being tested to the low-order bit and
10356 masking the result with the constant 1. If the condition was EQ,
10357 we xor it with 1. This does not require an scc insn and is faster
10358 than an scc insn even if we have it.
10360 The code to make this transformation was moved into fold_single_bit_test,
10361 so we just call into the folder and expand its result. */
10363 if ((code
== NE
|| code
== EQ
)
10364 && TREE_CODE (arg0
) == BIT_AND_EXPR
&& integer_zerop (arg1
)
10365 && integer_pow2p (TREE_OPERAND (arg0
, 1))
10366 && (TYPE_PRECISION (ops
->type
) != 1 || TYPE_UNSIGNED (ops
->type
)))
10368 tree type
= lang_hooks
.types
.type_for_mode (mode
, unsignedp
);
10369 return expand_expr (fold_single_bit_test (loc
,
10370 code
== NE
? NE_EXPR
: EQ_EXPR
,
10372 target
, VOIDmode
, EXPAND_NORMAL
);
10375 if (! get_subtarget (target
)
10376 || GET_MODE (subtarget
) != operand_mode
)
10379 expand_operands (arg0
, arg1
, subtarget
, &op0
, &op1
, EXPAND_NORMAL
);
10382 target
= gen_reg_rtx (mode
);
10384 /* Try a cstore if possible. */
10385 return emit_store_flag_force (target
, code
, op0
, op1
,
10386 operand_mode
, unsignedp
,
10387 (TYPE_PRECISION (ops
->type
) == 1
10388 && !TYPE_UNSIGNED (ops
->type
)) ? -1 : 1);
10392 /* Stubs in case we haven't got a casesi insn. */
10393 #ifndef HAVE_casesi
10394 # define HAVE_casesi 0
10395 # define gen_casesi(a, b, c, d, e) (0)
10396 # define CODE_FOR_casesi CODE_FOR_nothing
10399 /* Attempt to generate a casesi instruction. Returns 1 if successful,
10400 0 otherwise (i.e. if there is no casesi instruction). */
10402 try_casesi (tree index_type
, tree index_expr
, tree minval
, tree range
,
10403 rtx table_label ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED
, rtx default_label
,
10404 rtx fallback_label ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED
)
10406 struct expand_operand ops
[5];
10407 enum machine_mode index_mode
= SImode
;
10408 int index_bits
= GET_MODE_BITSIZE (index_mode
);
10409 rtx op1
, op2
, index
;
10414 /* Convert the index to SImode. */
10415 if (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (TYPE_MODE (index_type
)) > GET_MODE_BITSIZE (index_mode
))
10417 enum machine_mode omode
= TYPE_MODE (index_type
);
10418 rtx rangertx
= expand_normal (range
);
10420 /* We must handle the endpoints in the original mode. */
10421 index_expr
= build2 (MINUS_EXPR
, index_type
,
10422 index_expr
, minval
);
10423 minval
= integer_zero_node
;
10424 index
= expand_normal (index_expr
);
10426 emit_cmp_and_jump_insns (rangertx
, index
, LTU
, NULL_RTX
,
10427 omode
, 1, default_label
);
10428 /* Now we can safely truncate. */
10429 index
= convert_to_mode (index_mode
, index
, 0);
10433 if (TYPE_MODE (index_type
) != index_mode
)
10435 index_type
= lang_hooks
.types
.type_for_size (index_bits
, 0);
10436 index_expr
= fold_convert (index_type
, index_expr
);
10439 index
= expand_normal (index_expr
);
10442 do_pending_stack_adjust ();
10444 op1
= expand_normal (minval
);
10445 op2
= expand_normal (range
);
10447 create_input_operand (&ops
[0], index
, index_mode
);
10448 create_convert_operand_from_type (&ops
[1], op1
, TREE_TYPE (minval
));
10449 create_convert_operand_from_type (&ops
[2], op2
, TREE_TYPE (range
));
10450 create_fixed_operand (&ops
[3], table_label
);
10451 create_fixed_operand (&ops
[4], (default_label
10453 : fallback_label
));
10454 expand_jump_insn (CODE_FOR_casesi
, 5, ops
);
10458 /* Attempt to generate a tablejump instruction; same concept. */
10459 #ifndef HAVE_tablejump
10460 #define HAVE_tablejump 0
10461 #define gen_tablejump(x, y) (0)
10464 /* Subroutine of the next function.
10466 INDEX is the value being switched on, with the lowest value
10467 in the table already subtracted.
10468 MODE is its expected mode (needed if INDEX is constant).
10469 RANGE is the length of the jump table.
10470 TABLE_LABEL is a CODE_LABEL rtx for the table itself.
10472 DEFAULT_LABEL is a CODE_LABEL rtx to jump to if the
10473 index value is out of range. */
10476 do_tablejump (rtx index
, enum machine_mode mode
, rtx range
, rtx table_label
,
10481 if (INTVAL (range
) > cfun
->cfg
->max_jumptable_ents
)
10482 cfun
->cfg
->max_jumptable_ents
= INTVAL (range
);
10484 /* Do an unsigned comparison (in the proper mode) between the index
10485 expression and the value which represents the length of the range.
10486 Since we just finished subtracting the lower bound of the range
10487 from the index expression, this comparison allows us to simultaneously
10488 check that the original index expression value is both greater than
10489 or equal to the minimum value of the range and less than or equal to
10490 the maximum value of the range. */
10493 emit_cmp_and_jump_insns (index
, range
, GTU
, NULL_RTX
, mode
, 1,
10496 /* If index is in range, it must fit in Pmode.
10497 Convert to Pmode so we can index with it. */
10499 index
= convert_to_mode (Pmode
, index
, 1);
10501 /* Don't let a MEM slip through, because then INDEX that comes
10502 out of PIC_CASE_VECTOR_ADDRESS won't be a valid address,
10503 and break_out_memory_refs will go to work on it and mess it up. */
10504 #ifdef PIC_CASE_VECTOR_ADDRESS
10505 if (flag_pic
&& !REG_P (index
))
10506 index
= copy_to_mode_reg (Pmode
, index
);
10509 /* ??? The only correct use of CASE_VECTOR_MODE is the one inside the
10510 GET_MODE_SIZE, because this indicates how large insns are. The other
10511 uses should all be Pmode, because they are addresses. This code
10512 could fail if addresses and insns are not the same size. */
10513 index
= gen_rtx_PLUS (Pmode
,
10514 gen_rtx_MULT (Pmode
, index
,
10515 GEN_INT (GET_MODE_SIZE (CASE_VECTOR_MODE
))),
10516 gen_rtx_LABEL_REF (Pmode
, table_label
));
10517 #ifdef PIC_CASE_VECTOR_ADDRESS
10519 index
= PIC_CASE_VECTOR_ADDRESS (index
);
10522 index
= memory_address (CASE_VECTOR_MODE
, index
);
10523 temp
= gen_reg_rtx (CASE_VECTOR_MODE
);
10524 vector
= gen_const_mem (CASE_VECTOR_MODE
, index
);
10525 convert_move (temp
, vector
, 0);
10527 emit_jump_insn (gen_tablejump (temp
, table_label
));
10529 /* If we are generating PIC code or if the table is PC-relative, the
10530 table and JUMP_INSN must be adjacent, so don't output a BARRIER. */
10531 if (! CASE_VECTOR_PC_RELATIVE
&& ! flag_pic
)
10536 try_tablejump (tree index_type
, tree index_expr
, tree minval
, tree range
,
10537 rtx table_label
, rtx default_label
)
10541 if (! HAVE_tablejump
)
10544 index_expr
= fold_build2 (MINUS_EXPR
, index_type
,
10545 fold_convert (index_type
, index_expr
),
10546 fold_convert (index_type
, minval
));
10547 index
= expand_normal (index_expr
);
10548 do_pending_stack_adjust ();
10550 do_tablejump (index
, TYPE_MODE (index_type
),
10551 convert_modes (TYPE_MODE (index_type
),
10552 TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (range
)),
10553 expand_normal (range
),
10554 TYPE_UNSIGNED (TREE_TYPE (range
))),
10555 table_label
, default_label
);
10559 /* Return a CONST_VECTOR rtx for a VECTOR_CST tree. */
10561 const_vector_from_tree (tree exp
)
10566 enum machine_mode inner
, mode
;
10568 mode
= TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (exp
));
10570 if (initializer_zerop (exp
))
10571 return CONST0_RTX (mode
);
10573 units
= GET_MODE_NUNITS (mode
);
10574 inner
= GET_MODE_INNER (mode
);
10576 v
= rtvec_alloc (units
);
10578 link
= TREE_VECTOR_CST_ELTS (exp
);
10579 for (i
= 0; link
; link
= TREE_CHAIN (link
), ++i
)
10581 elt
= TREE_VALUE (link
);
10583 if (TREE_CODE (elt
) == REAL_CST
)
10584 RTVEC_ELT (v
, i
) = CONST_DOUBLE_FROM_REAL_VALUE (TREE_REAL_CST (elt
),
10586 else if (TREE_CODE (elt
) == FIXED_CST
)
10587 RTVEC_ELT (v
, i
) = CONST_FIXED_FROM_FIXED_VALUE (TREE_FIXED_CST (elt
),
10590 RTVEC_ELT (v
, i
) = immed_double_int_const (tree_to_double_int (elt
),
10594 /* Initialize remaining elements to 0. */
10595 for (; i
< units
; ++i
)
10596 RTVEC_ELT (v
, i
) = CONST0_RTX (inner
);
10598 return gen_rtx_CONST_VECTOR (mode
, v
);
10601 /* Build a decl for a personality function given a language prefix. */
10604 build_personality_function (const char *lang
)
10606 const char *unwind_and_version
;
10610 switch (targetm_common
.except_unwind_info (&global_options
))
10615 unwind_and_version
= "_sj0";
10619 unwind_and_version
= "_v0";
10622 gcc_unreachable ();
10625 name
= ACONCAT (("__", lang
, "_personality", unwind_and_version
, NULL
));
10627 type
= build_function_type_list (integer_type_node
, integer_type_node
,
10628 long_long_unsigned_type_node
,
10629 ptr_type_node
, ptr_type_node
, NULL_TREE
);
10630 decl
= build_decl (UNKNOWN_LOCATION
, FUNCTION_DECL
,
10631 get_identifier (name
), type
);
10632 DECL_ARTIFICIAL (decl
) = 1;
10633 DECL_EXTERNAL (decl
) = 1;
10634 TREE_PUBLIC (decl
) = 1;
10636 /* Zap the nonsensical SYMBOL_REF_DECL for this. What we're left with
10637 are the flags assigned by targetm.encode_section_info. */
10638 SET_SYMBOL_REF_DECL (XEXP (DECL_RTL (decl
), 0), NULL
);
10643 /* Extracts the personality function of DECL and returns the corresponding
10647 get_personality_function (tree decl
)
10649 tree personality
= DECL_FUNCTION_PERSONALITY (decl
);
10650 enum eh_personality_kind pk
;
10652 pk
= function_needs_eh_personality (DECL_STRUCT_FUNCTION (decl
));
10653 if (pk
== eh_personality_none
)
10657 && pk
== eh_personality_any
)
10658 personality
= lang_hooks
.eh_personality ();
10660 if (pk
== eh_personality_lang
)
10661 gcc_assert (personality
!= NULL_TREE
);
10663 return XEXP (DECL_RTL (personality
), 0);
10666 #include "gt-expr.h"